Legrand Distribution & Power Guide

Distribution
and Power
TECHNICAL MANUAL
ex25027_couv.qxd 28/12/05 18:22 Page 2
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 1
Welcome to the first edition of the Protection and Power Guide

from Legrand, which will make life easier for you, day in and day out.
This document serves as both a memorandum and a practical

guide, combining comprehensive information which is both technical
(performance, equipment operation, etc) and practical (instructions
for use, advantages, etc) to guide you when making your selections,
with the best of Legrand solutions.
A powerful specification tool, it integrates a complete approach

which is as exhaustive as possible concerning the functions and
constraints of installations, and helps you always make
the optimum choice in complete confidence.
A guide to our commitment, it illustrates Legrand’s willingness

to be at your side, offering the best product offer with the best
services: XL PRO2, training, technical support, etc,
in order to develop and deepen our relationship.
1
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 2
Contents
2
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 3
››› Technical part

PROTECTION DEVICES general 4
DMX air circuit breakers 18
DPX moulded case circuit breakers 38
DX modular circuit breakers 76
ASSOCIATION of protective devices 84
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS 104
ISOLATION 132
DISTRIBUTION 136
XL3 enclosures 156
››› Offer part

DMX 173
DPX 178
ISOLATING SWITCHES 202
LR RCDS 218
MODULAR DIN-RAIL EQUIPMENT 223
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTOR 240
DISTRIBUTION 242
XL3 250
3
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 4
Protection
devices:
general
DMX ACBs, DPX MCCBs and
DX MCBs: in a fully integrated
protection range
4
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 5
The choice of a protection device must provide the best possible continuity while also taking into account
two compulsory objectives: protecting people and protecting installations.
TECHNICAL PART
On the other hand the choice of a switching device (isolation, functional breaking, emergency breaking)
does not have this automatic protection role as its main objective.
People must be protected against indirect contact

according to the earthing system and the
characteristics of the installation (such as length
of lines). The purpose of protecting cables is to limit
the effects of overloads and short circuits.
The concept of discrimination relates to the aspects
of discrimination between protective devices.
Protection devices protect installations and people:

these are the circuit-breakers and fuses. DX, DPX
and DMX circuit-breakers perform both a breaking
and a protection function. Switching devices are
used to control the various circuits
in an installation: these are the isolating switches,
contactors and even other devices (such as
thermostats, latching relays, etc) if the switching
only has a functional role.
Protection devices for people and installation protection
Product standards
Installation standards
It is important to distinguish between product

standards and installation standards.
Product standards concern devices and are
the responsibility of manufacturers, whereas
installation standards relate to installations:
ensuring their correct operation, safety and
durability. It is the duty of installers to apply
them but, in addition, they must also
guarantee the overall performance level of FOR MORE INFORMATION
the installation (from the main LV distribution
board to the socket) relying on the quality of See the on-line catalogue:
products and the guarantees that only a instructions, technical data
major manufacturer can provide. sheets, etc.
5
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 6
Protection devices:
general (continued)
LEGRAND CIRCUIT BREAKERS: DMX, DPX & DX

A circuit breaker is both a control device which THE TECHNOLOGIES USED
can make, withstand and switch currents whose
intensity is at most equal to its nominal current Overcurrents are detected by three different
(In), and a protection device which can technologies:
automatically break overcurrents which may occur - thermal for overloads,
as a result of faults in installations. Legrand - magnetic for short-circuits,
circuit breakers are divided into three main - electronic for both.
categories: DMX ACBs, DPX MCCBs (moulded Thermal and magnetic releases, which are usually
cases), and DX MCBs (modular). The choice combined (thermal magnetic MCBs), use a tried
of the characteristics of a circuit breaker depends and tested, cost effective technology, but provide
on the size of the installation. less flexibility of adjustment and fewer features
than electronic releases.
Thermal release
This consists of a bimetallic strip which bends
Legrand circuit breakers also when heated beyond the normal operating values,
thus releasing the lock which holds the main
perform the following functions: contacts. The reaction time of a bimetallic strip
is in inverse proportion to the intensity of the
- Manual or automatic control current.
of a circuit As a result of its thermal inertia, each reclosing
- Isolation with positive contact of the faulty circuit reduces its reaction time.
indication and visible contact DPX MCCBs and ACBs can be used to set the trip
indication for plug-in and draw-out current Ir between certain limits (0.4 to 1 x In
devices and for DPX-IS depending on the model).
- Emergency breaking
- Residual current protection
Magnetic release
This consists of a magnetic loop whose effect
releases the lock which holds the main contacts,
thus triggering a break if there is a high overcurrent.
The response time is very short (a few hundredths
of a second). DPX MCCBs have a magnetic setting
Im (up to 10 x Ir), which can be used to set the
release value to the protection conditions of the
installation (fault current and indirect contact).
Moreover, this setting can be used to find the best
discrimination conditions between the devices.
6
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 7
The electronic release

A coil, placed on each conductor, constantly measures
TECHNICAL PART
the current in each conductor. This information is Typical tripping curves
processed by an electronic module which controls
the tripping of the CB when the values of the
settings are exceeded. The curve of the release t
shows three zones of operation. Electronic releases
are available on DPX and DMX breakers.
- “Long time delay” operating zone

This is similar to the characteristic of a thermal
release. It protects conductors against overloads.
- “Short time delay” operating zone
This provides protection against lower intensity
short-circuits, generally at the end of the line.
Thermal Magnetic I
The trip threshold can usually be adjusted.
release release
The period of the delay may be increased zone zone
by thresholds up to one second, mainly used
to ensure discrimination with devices placed Thermal-magnetic release
downstream.
- “Instantaneous” operating zone
This provides protection against high intensity t
short-circuits. It is factory set at a fixed value
depending on the model.
Long Short Instantaneous I

delay delay operating
operating operating zone
zone zone
Electronic release
FOR MORE INFORMATION

Other electronic protection
units on request
7
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 8
Protection devices:
general (continued)
The electric arc

The current is broken in the circuit breaker arc
chamber, which is designed to control the electric I
arc produced when the contacts open (rather like Prospective
Isc
electrodes). Energy
The arc energy can become considerable, up to Limited limiting
Isc
100 kilojoules and 20,000°C, and can cause the
contacts to be eroded by vaporising the metal.
It is therefore a good idea to extinguish the arc as
U t
quickly as possible, to limit its effects.
The magnetic field produced by the arc (which Arc U
is a conductor) is used to move it into an “arc Mains U
chamber” and extend it until it has been
extinguished. The circuit breaker mechanisms
Restored
must combine very quick contact opening (limiting voltage
erosion) and high contact pressure (opposition to
the electrodynamic forces). t
8
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 9
BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS
TECHNICAL PART
Rated operating voltage Ue (in V) Following the test, the circuit breaker must
This is the voltage(s) at which the circuit breaker continue to offer a guaranteed minimum level
can be used. The value indicated is usually the of safety (isolation, dielectric strength).
maximum value. In standard IEC 60898, the device breaking
At lower voltages, certain characteristics may capacity is tested in the same way but is called Icn.
differ, or even be improved, such as the breaking After the test, the circuit breaker must retain its
capacity. dielectric properties and able to trip in accordance
with the specifications in the standard.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (in V)
This value acts as a reference for the device
insulation performance. High voltage tests
(Impulse, industrial frequency) are determined
on this basis.
Breaking capacity
Impulse voltage Uimp (in kV) Modular circuit breakers are often identified
This value characterises the ability of the device to with two breaking capacities.
withstand transient overvoltages due to lightning, This distinction results from standards using
for example. different test conditions.
Nominal current In (in A) • 10000 : standard IEC 60898 for household

or analogue applications where unqualified
This is the maximum current value the circuit
people can close a circuit with a persistent
breaker can withstand on a permanent basis.
fault several times. The breaking capacity (in
This value is always given for an ambient
Amps) then appears in a box, with no mention
temperature around the device of 40°C in
of the unit.
accordance with standard IEC 60947-2, and 30°C
in accordance with standard IEC 60898. If the • 10 kA: standard IEC 60947-2 for all
device is used at a higher temperature, it may be applications where the maintenance
necessary to reduce the rated current. personnel are suitably qualified.
The breaking capacity then appears along
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (in kA) with its unit (kA).
This is the maximum short-circuit current value
that a circuit breaker can break at a given voltage
and phase shift (cos ϕ).
The tests are executed according to the sequence
O - t - CO; O represents a break operation, t an
interval of time and CO a make operation followed
by an automatic break operation.
9
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 10
Protection devices:
general (continued)
BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS (continued)

Standard breaking capacity Ics Rated short-circuit making
This is the value expressed as a percentage of Icu, capacity Icm (kA peak)
from the following values: 25% (category A only), This is the maximum current intensity a device
50%, 75% or 100%. The circuit breaker must be can make at its rated voltage according to the
capable of operating normally after breaking the conditions of the standard.
Ics current several times using the sequence Devices without a protection function, such as
O-CO-CO. switches, must be able to withstand short-circuit
Standard IEC 60898 gives the minimum values currents with a value and duration resulting from
to be attained according to the device Icn. the action of the associated protection device.
Short time withstand current Icw Utilization category

(in kA) IEC 60947-2 designates circuit breakers
This is the value of the short-circuit current that a as belonging to one of two categories:
category B circuit breaker (see below) is capable of - category A for circuit breakers which do not have
withstanding for a defined period without altering a time delay before tripping on a short-circuit
its characteristics. - category B for circuit breakers which have a time
This value is intended to enable discrimination delay. This can be adjusted in order to perform
between devices. The relevant circuit breaker can time discrimination for a short-circuit value less
remain closed while the fault is eliminated by the than Icw. The value of Icw must be at least equal
downstream device as long as the energy I2t does to the larger of the two values, 12 In or 5 kA,
not exceed Icw2 (1 s). This value is one of the most for circuit breakers with a rated current of 2,500 A
characteristic values of a switch. at most, and 30 kA thereafter.
By convention the value Icw is given for a time

t = 1 s. For a different duration t, this should be
indicated, for example Icw0.2. It is then necessary
to check that the thermal stress I2t, generated
until the downstream device breaks, is actually
less than Icw2t.
10
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 11
TECHNICAL PART
Product standards
There are two product standards for circuit breakers: standard IEC 60898 and standard IEC 60947.
››› Standard IEC 60898

In practice, this standard is referred to for domestic and residential installations, small commercial
installations and all situations where people are unqualified.
It applies up to 125 A, 25,000 A breaking capacity and 440 V.
Thermal tripping occurs between 1.05 and 1.3 x In.
It determines operating ranges B, C and D for the magnetic trip zone.
››› Standard IEC 60947-2

The standard used in industry, this assumes that maintenance workers are qualified.
It does not determine the operating range: all characteristics (Ir, Im, t, etc) can be adjusted.
For Ir = In, tripping resulting from overloads should occur between 1.13 and 1.45 x In.
Products complying with standard IEC 60898 can also be used in industrial installations to the extent that
their characteristics allow.
Legrand DX circuit breakers comply with the following standards.

This applies to circuit breakers with a residual current function.

This applies switches with residual current fonction.
11
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 12
Protection devices:
general (continued)
LIMITING
In the event of a short-circuit, without any Current limiting curves
protection, the current flowing through the
installation would be the prospective short-circuit These give the maximum peak current values
current. When a short-circuit current crosses a (in Â peak), limited by the devices according to the
circuit breaker, this has the capacity, to a greater value of the prospective short-circuit current.
or lesser extent, to allow only part of this current The limited current values are used to determine
to flow. The short-circuit is then limited in the size of the busbars and to check the withstand
amplitude and duration. of conductors and devices.
The purpose of limiting is to reduce:

- thermal stress Current limiting curve
- electrodynamic forces
- effects of electromagnetic induction
In addition, it makes discrimination and
association easier. The limiting power of devices is
represented in the form of limiting curves. Peak Isc (Â)
sc
a kI
pe
ted
li mi
Limited Un
Prospective short-circuit current limiting peak Isc
Prospective
rms Isc
Isc
Prospective Isc at the Device breaking
Prospective device terminals capacity
peak Isc
Prospective
Isc
Prospective
rms Isc
Limited
peak Isc
Limited
Isc
12
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 13
TECHNICAL PART
Thermal stress limiting curves
Limiting class for modular circuit breakers
These give the image of the energy (in that A2s)
the device allows to flow depending on Appendix ZA of standard IEC 60898 defines
the prospective short-circuit current. the thermal stress limiting classes for ratings
They can be used to check the thermal stress of 32 A or less. The limiting classes are used
withstand of cables protected by the device. to assign hierarchical priority to thermal
stress limit capacities.
Example for a 6 kA type C circuit breaker from

Thermal stress limiting curve 20 to 32 A:
- class 1: unlimited thermal stress
- class 2: thermal stress limited to
160,000 A2s maximum
I2t (A2s)
Thermal stress curve - class 3: thermal stress limited to
permitted by the cable 55,000 A2s maximum
All Legrand circuit breakers rated up to 32 A
or less are class 3.
Device
breaking
capacity
Icc (A)
Thermal Magnetic
trip zone trip zone
13
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 14
Protection devices:
general (continued)
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

The residual current device continuously measures Current-sensing relay
the difference between the value of the outward The current-sensing relay consists of a magnetised
current and the value of the return current on the coil which, as long as no fault current is present,
circuit it is protecting. If this difference is other holds a vane in the closed position.
than zero, it means that there is a leak or This vane is fixed on a shaft and is subject to the
insulation fault. When this value reaches the level force from a spring.
at which the residual current device has been set, As long as the coil is not excited by a current,
the circuit power supply is broken automatically. the permanent magnet opposes a force holding
the vane which is greater than the force of the
COMPOSITION AND OPERATION spring. If the coil is excited, the induced magnetic
OF RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES flux opposes the permanent magnetisation.
An electromagnetic residual current device The force generated by the spring then drives the
consists primarily of a core and a current-sensing movement of the vane which controls the contact
relay. opening mechanism.
Magnetic core
The magnetic core works like a transformer.
The primary measures all the currents on the Residual current principle
circuit being monitored, the secondary powers
the current-sensing relay. If there is a leakage
or fault current, the vectorial sum of the currents N L
is not zero and results in a residual current. Above

the preset threshold IΔn, the current-sensing relay
controls opening of the main contacts of the
associated breaking device (switch or circuit 2 1
breaker).
RCBO phase + neutral
Current- Magnetic
sensing core
relay
14
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 15
TECHNICAL PART
Operating principle
Without a fault With fault present
N L
N L
2 1
2 1
2=- 1
2= 1
1+ 2=0
1+ 2= d
Id
The value of the outward current (phase) is The value of the outward current (phase)
the same as the value of the return current is different from the value of the return
(neutral). If there is no residual current, current (neutral). The residual current
no magnetic flux is created in the core. causes magnetic flux in the core, which
The current-sensing relay coil is not excited. generates a current that will excite the
The contacts remain closed. The device current-sensing relay.
works normally.
15
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 16
Protection devices:
general (continued)
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (continued)
SELECTING RESIDUAL CURRENT

DEVICES Residual current devices are equipped
with a “test” button. This simulates a
The choice of a residual current device depends fault current. A test should be
on the required level of protection (IΔn sensitivity), performed once a month.
on the nature of the associated breaking device
(circuit breaker or switch) and the specific
conditions of use (delayed, discriminating,
immune).
> Residual current device with overcurrent > Residual current circuit breaker
protection
This both breaks This is used to break the
the circuit and circuit in the event of a
protects against residual current fault but does
overcurrents not provide protection against
(overloads and overcurrents. A protection
short-circuits). device, such as a circuit
> Residual current breaker or fuse, must
› Four-pole monobloc RCBOs circuit breaker therefore be associated with it,
with 4 modules only up to 32 A which will also protect the
switch (see page 77).
It exists in several
forms:
- modular monobloc
- add-on module Residual current relays with separate core
for modular device
- associable add-on
module
(mounted on side
› Add-on module or underneath)
for modular circuit breakers for DPX
- residual current
relay with
separate core
These add a residual current function

to DPX and DMX circuit breakers and
› Side-mounted add-on module switches equipped with trip coils.
Cat. No. 260 36 associated
with a DPX 250 ER
16
ex25027_001-017.qxd 28/12/05 17:29 Page 17
TECHNICAL PART
Specific conditions of use • Hpi version (high level of immunity) Hpi
There are two types of residual current device: This is a variant of type A with reinforced immunity
to transient phenomena.
It is therefore particularly suitable for installations
Type AC producing electrical interference.
Used for standard applications Its minimal sensitivity to permanent leakage
without DC components currents makes it more specifically suitable for
present. installations supplying computers and avoids the
need for multiple divisions
of circuits. This enables the number of residual
current protection devices to be reduced.
Type A
Used when the loads distort
the signal (the current is not The residual current trip thresholds
a perfect sine wave or has are usually guaranteed for a low
a DC component); they are temperature down to – 5 °C.
recommended for the For some versions,
protection of electronic especially “Hpi”,
equipment, computers, or
fluorescent lighting devices etc.
they are guaranteed
down to – 25 °C.
-25
A special mark
indicates this.
Each type of residual current device can be obtained in:
• “Standard” version
Tripping is deemed to be instantaneous.
• “S” version (discriminating or delayed) Discrimination between residual current
devices See page 103
Tripping is delayed to enable discrimination with
other downstream residual current devices.
17
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 18
DMX
air circuit
breakers
DMX circuit breakers
and isolating switches
provide control and protection
at the head of low voltage
distribution installations
up to 4000 A.
Find the complete offer

on page 173
18
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 19
DMX AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TECHNICAL PART
The technology of the “air” circuit breaker has have also been developed. The Legrand DMX units
improved considerably: in fact breaking does not have evolved in line with these general developments.
really take place in the open air anymore, but in
sophisticated arcing chambers, and the equipment They are used to protect the most powerful
has become a great deal smaller. installations. Their ease of installation and clarity
of layout have been particularly carefully studied.
At the same time, their specific characteristics All devices in the DMX range are mounted
(electrical and mechanical strength, breaking behind the same front panel and have same depth
capacity, maintainability, optional accessories, etc) and height.
A 4000 A system within your reach
DMX INTEGRATION
• Fixed or • Clear, easy mounting
draw-out • All DMX have the same front panel,
• Circuit and are the same depth and height.
breaker
with MP17
integrated
electronic CONNECTION AND IDENTIFICATION
protection
unit.
OF AUXILIARIES
• On front panel terminal block
• 32 connection points available
• Identification on front panel
• Accessories attached via front panel for extremely
easy installation.
OPTION
• MP20
electronic CONTROL AND SIGNALLING
protection
unit with
AUXILIARIES
advanced • Shunt release • Closing release
functions.
• Undervoltage release • Signalling contacts
• Motor operators • Locking options
19
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 20
DMX
air circuit breakers (continued)
THE DMX RANGE

DMX circuit breakers and switches are available in The designation DMX corresponds to a standard
just two frame sizes: breaking capacity of 50 kA(1) while DMX-H offers
a breaking capacity of 65 kA(1) ,and DMX-L a
- DMX and DMX-I 2500 (800, 1250, 1600, 2000 breaking capacity of 100 kA(1). With the DMX-L,
and 2500 A ratings) the size of the devices is identical to that of the
- DMX and DMX-I 4000 (3200 and 4000 A ratings). DMX 4000 for all ratings from 800 to 4000 A.
±
(1) (at 415 V )
DMX 2500 fixed version DMX 2500 draw-out version DMX 4000 draw-out version
All DMX, both circuit breakers and

One catalogue number = one complete product isolating switches, are available in
fixed and draw-out version.
• All breakers are delivered
as standard with: In comparison with the fixed version,
the draw-out version has additional
- MP17 electronic trip unit locking facilities, optimum safety when
- 8 Auxiliary contacts 5NO+3NC work is being carried out on them
- Rear connection and on the installation (padlocking and
- Auxiliary terminal block physical separation of the installation)
- Padlocking shroud for ON and OFF buttons and is easily interchangeable
- Panel door seal (no disconnection to be carried out).
• For draw-out, the following features

are delivered as standard as well:
- Lockable safety shutters

- Racking handle
- Adjustable rear terminals
20
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 21
TECHNICAL PART
Retractable handles are used to draw out the device Safety shutters provide protection against the risk of contact
with live parts, as standard on every DMX
External Memory Unit
The design of the DMX contributes

considerably to their strength and
maintainability. Removing the front panel
gives direct access to all the control and
signalling auxiliaries: trips, coils, contacts,
motorisation, counter, etc.
If a device is changed, the external memory

unit (EMU) retains the settings and all the
data recorded during the operation of the
breaker which was previously installed
(faults, operations, currents, etc).
This function makes safe maintenance
and reduces downtime to a minimum.
The settings are thus not associated with
the device anymore, but with the circuit
which is being protected.
21
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 22
DMX
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS

In addition to the integration capabilities of these MP17 electronic protection unit
circuit breakers, their easy mounting and
connection, strength and the maximum continuity DMX circuit breakers are equipped with the MP17
of operation they provide, they also have modern electronic protection unit as standard. The settings
electronic protection units which enable very are adjusted using rotary selector switches:
precise setting of protection conditions while - Long time delay protection against overloads:
maintaining total discrimination with downstream Ir from 0.4 to 1 x In (7 steps)
breakers. - Short time delay protection against short circuits:
Im from 2 to 12 x Ir (7 steps)
- Short time delay protection operation time:
Tm from 0 to 1 s (7 steps)
The protection unit is adjusted using rotary selector

switches and therefore independently of the power
supply of the device.
The MP17 protection unit also has instantaneous

protection against very high intensity short-circuits.
MP17 protection unit on draw-out DMX 2500
Ir Ir setting
t (s)
Im and Tm settings
Im
Tripping curve
LED indicating correct operation

Tm
Test connector and portable

external power supply
I (A)
22
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 23
Tripping curve for Thermal stress limitation curve
TECHNICAL PART
electronic protection unit MP17 for electronic protection unit MP17
Adjustement of Ir, Im, Tm on front face
10000 1010
t(s) I 2 t (A 2 s)
Ir 109
1000
108
100
107
106
10
Im 105
1
104
Tm
0.1 103
102
0.01
101
0.001 kA
1 2 3 4 5 10 I/Ir If 100
100 101 102 103 104 105
Ik (A)
• Long delay protection against overloads

Ir = 0,4 - 0,5 - 0,6 - 0,7 - 0,8 - 0,9 - 1 x In (7 steps)
Neutral protection at 50% of the value of phases
• Short delay protection against short-circuits

Im = 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 10 - 12 x Ir (7 steps)
Tm = instantaneous -0,1 - 0,2 - 0,4 - 0,6 -0,8 - 1,0 s
(7 steps)
• Instantaneous protection
If = 50 kA for DMX
65 kA for DMX-H
80 kA for DMX-L
23
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 24
DMX
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS (CONTINUED)
MP20 electronic protection unit
On request, DMX circuit breakers can be fitted with

MP20 electronic protection units which have
advanced functions.
The settings are adjusted via a touch sensitive
keypad with the setting point displayed on an
illuminated curve.
Numbers of operations, maintenance indicator, Ir
t (s)
fault history, load shedding parameters (early
warning, load control) and current values can be
tr
displayed.
Modbus or Profibus communication and control Imr
functions are also available.
Every MP20 is equipped with EMU. tmr
Im
Possible settings: tm
- Long time delay protection against overloads:
Ir from 0.4 to 1.0 x In (60 steps)
- Long time delay protection operation time: I (A)
tr from 0.25 to 35 s (16 steps)
- Delayed protection against short circuits:
Imr from 1.5 to 12 x Ir (8 steps)
- Delayed protection operation time:
tmr from 1 to 10 s (tr function)
- Short delay protection against short circuits:
Im from 1.5 to 12 x Ir (8 steps) Liquid crystal display
- Short delay protection operation time:
tm from 0 to 1 s (10 steps) Alarm indicator
- Instantaneous protection against very high short
Correct operation indicator
circuits
Tripping curve with display
Reset button (manual or auto)
Tripping curve for earth fault
with display
Touch-sensitive keypad
Test connector and portable

external power supply
MP20 control & protection unit on DMX 4000 circuit breaker
24
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 25
Tripping curve for Thermal stress limitation curve
TECHNICAL PAR(T
electronic protection unit MP20 for electronic protection unit MP20
Adjustement of Ir, Imr, Tmr, Im, Tm
10000 1010
Ir I t (A 2 s)
2
t(s)
109
1000
108
100
107
Tr
106
10
105
Imr
1
104
Tmr
0.1
Im 103
Tm
102
0.01
101
0.001 kA 100
1 2 3 4 5 10 I/Ir If
100 101 102 103 104 105
Ik (A)
• Long delay protection against overloads

Ir = 0,4 to 1,0 In (by steps of 0,01)
Tr = ,025 to 35 s at 7,2 x Ir (16 steps)
• Delayed protection against short-circuits

Imr = 1,5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 10 - 12 x Ir
Tmr = fixed according to Tr Protection against earth fault :
• Short delay protection against short-circuits On request, the MP17 & MP20 protection units can
Im = 1,5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 10 - 12 x Ir be equipped with protection against earth faults.
Tm = instantaneous -0,1 - 0,2 - 0,3 - 0,4 - 0,5 - 0,6 The level of the earth fault current is adjustable
- 0,7 - 0,8 - 0,9 - 1,0 s from 0 to 1.0 x In in 6 steps on MP17 protection
units and 10 steps on MP20.
• Instantaneous protection The time delay on tripping is adjustable from 0 to 1s.
If = 50 kA for DMX MP20 units also have a “I2t = constant” function for
65 kA for DMX-H
eliminating the unwanted section of the protection
80 kA for DMX-L
curve. This function can be deactivated at any time.
25
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 26
DMX
Front panel of draw-out DMX circuit breakers
External memory unit (EMU) Isolator terminal blocks

for auxiliary circuits
Windows for displaying

Electronic protection unit MP20 auxiliary equipment
Spring loading lever (stored energy control)

Circuit breaker: black lever
Protective cover with security
Switch: grey lever
of access to settings
Padlockable close control button
Identification of the type Padlockable open control button

DMX: grey Indicator showing the position
DMX-H: yellow of the main contacts
DMX-L: red
Indicator showing the load status
of the springs
Space for a lock (device open)
Device position indication

Plugged-in: red
Test: yellow
Drawn-out: greeen Housing for the extraction handle
(This housing can be fitted with a lock
in drawn-out position)
Padlocking in drawn-out position
( 2 padlocks) Independent padlocking
of the isolating shutters
Lockable aperture for insertion Safety device for insertion

of the extraction handle of the extraction handle
26
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 27
CONTROL ACCESSORIES
TECHNICAL PART
• Shunt trips • Time delay undervoltage releases
Shunt trips are devices used for the remote These releases are equipped with an electronic
instantaneous opening of the device. They are device which delays their operation for
generally controlled with an N/O type contact. approximately 3 seconds. They are designed to be
These devices are available in AC and DC versions, used in unstable supplies, where the supply voltage
with various supply voltages. They are simply of the release may be subject to variations or micro-
clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool breaks, to avoid unwanted opening of the circuit
required. breaker. They are also equipped with a power saving
An auxiliary contact is connected in series with the device for limiting their consumption. They are
coil, cutting off its power supply when the main simply clipped on to the front panel of the device.
poles are open. Nominal voltage Un: 48 V= , 110/130 V= , 220/250 V± ,
Nominal voltage Un : 48 V= , 110/130 V± /= , 380/440 V±
220/250 V± /= , 380/440 V± Tolerance on nominal voltage: 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Tolerance on nominal voltage: 0.7 to 1.1 x Un Trip voltage: 35%
Maximum opening time: 50 ms Feedback voltage: 60%
Maximum power consumption: 300 VA (for ± ) Tripping time: 3 s
and 250 W (for = ) Maximum power consumption: 300 VA reduced
to 20 VA after 400 ms.
• Undervoltage release
Undervoltage releases are devices which are • Closing coils
generally controlled by an N/C type contact. These coils are used for remotely controlling the
They trigger instantaneous opening of the circuit closing of the circuit breaker (the circuit breaker
breaker if their supply voltage drops below a being dependent on the prior loading of the springs).
certain threshold and in particular if the control They are controlled by an N/O type contact.
contact opens. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the
These releases are equipped with a device for device. No tool required.
limiting their consumption after the circuit has Nominal voltage Un: 24/30 V= , 48 V= , 110/130 V± /= ,
been closed. 230/250 V±
They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the Tolerance on nominal voltage: 0.85 to 1.1 Un
device. No tool required. Opening time: 50 ms
Nominal voltage Un: 24/30 V= , 48 V= , 110/130 V= , Power consumption: 300 VA (for ± ) and 250 W (for = ).
220/250 V± , 380/440 V±
Tolerance on nominal voltage: 0.85 to 1.1 x Un
Trip voltage: 35% Number of control auxiliaries for DMX
Feedback voltage: 60%
Shunt trip 1
Opening time: 50 ms
Maximum power consumption: 300 VA reduced Undervoltage release (standard or time delayed) 1
to 20 VA after 400 ms Closing coils 1
27
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 28
DMX
• Motor operators Motor-driven controls have “limit switch” contacts

Motor operators, which are available in different which cut off the power supply of their motor after
voltages, are used for remotely reloading the the springs have been reloaded.
springs of the circuit breaker mechanism An auxiliary signalling contact Cat. No. 269 51 can
immediately after the device closes. The device can be added to feed back the load status of the springs.
thus be re-closed almost immediately after an They are easy to mount, with only three screws.
opening operation. Nominal voltage Un: 24/30 V= , 48 V= , 110/130 V= ,
Combined with a release (current shunt trip or 110/130 V± , 230/250 V±
undervoltage release) and a closing coil, they can Tolerance on nominal voltage: 0.85 to 1.1 x Un
thus be used for remotely controlling the circuit Spring reloading time: 3 s
breaker. If the supply voltage of the controls fails, Maximum power consumption: 300 VA (for ± )
it is still possible to reload the springs manually. and 250 W (for = )
Mounting accessories
Shunt trip Closing coil
Undervoltage release
(standard or time delayed)
Motor-driven control
28
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:37 Page 29
SIGNALLING ACCESSORIES
TECHNICAL PART
Signalling contacts The contact block is supplied in a 6 N/0 + 6 N/C
configuration, but it can be reconfigured by the user
All DMX devices are equipped as standard according to requirements.
with 8 auxiliary contacts (5 N/O + 3 N/C).
An electrical fault signal contact (1 N/O)
Cat. No. 269 52 can be added to indicate a fault trip.
This contact remains closed until the device is
reset.
Permissible current: 10 A for 250 V± , 5 A for
125 V= , 0.25 A for 250 V= , Connection and identification
Utilization category: AC23 – DC3 (2 contacts of accessories
in series).
Electrical auxiliaries are connected on the
Position indicating contacts front panel on terminal blocks provided
for this purpose : 32 connection points available.
An additional block of 12 changeover contacts
Accessories are identified on the front panel.
(6 N/O+ 6 N/C) Cat. No. 269 50 can be fitted on the
As the cover has window, it is easy to ascertain
draw-out versions to indicate the position of the
which coils are fitted on the device. In addition,
device in its base (inserted/test/drawn-out).
an identification label each device indicates its
The “drawn-out” position is indicated only when the
composition on delivery.
minimum clearances of the main circuit and the
auxiliary circuits are reached.
SAFETY AND PADLOCKING ACCESSORIES

The DMX circuit breakers and switches draw-out types are delivery as
standard with safety padlocking shutters preventing access to live terminals.
They have a number of other safety devices.
• Using padlocks:
- ON/OFF buttons
- Safety shutters
- Drawn-out position and insertion of handle
• By key-operated lock:
- Main contacts open
- Isolated position
• Using an obstacle:
- Protection unit settings
- Insertion of the handle
- Rating locating pin
• By cable interlocking, for supply inversion
(see page 30)
29
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 30
DMX
SUPPLY INVERTORS
All DMX and DMX-I devices (fixed and draw-out The interlocking mechanism
version) can be fitted with an interlocking with cables is easy to add
mechanism which guarantees “mechanical safety” to all DMX versions and
in the event of supply inversion. is not dependent on their
Interlocking is achieved using interlocking units position in the assembly
mounted on the side of the devices and a cable
(2 m long cable as standard,
system.
other lengths on demand)
This system allows devices of different sizes and
types (3P, 4P, fixed, draw-out) to be interlocked.
The cable system provides the flexibility to install
DMX devices in a vertical configuration in the same
enclosure or in a horizontal configuration in
different columns.
This mechanical interlocking system can be
supplemented by motorised operators and an
electronic control unit (Cat. No. 261 93), making
the inverter fully automatic.
Electronic control unit

Cat. No. 261 93
to make the inverter
fully automatic

DMX air circuit breakers with supply inversion. Triple inverters: Please consult us
The two circuit breakers are connected to a
common transfer busbar
30
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 31
WIRING DIAGRAM
TECHNICAL PART
user's
designated
LP7 circuits
D1 D4 D7 D10 D13 D16 B7 B9 B1 B11 B13 B15 C1 C3 C5 C7 C9 C11 C13 C15

+ve +ve +ve
AL M
ML UVI
ST CC or
UVT
D3 D6 D9 D12 D15 D18 B8 B10 B2 B12 B14 B16 C2 C4 C6 C8 C10 C12 C14 C16
D2 D5 D8 D11 D14 D17
LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 LP5 LP6 user's

designated
circuits
Terminal References Key

Automatic disconnect L.T. LP1 Disconnected indication
B1 TO B16
blocks LP2 Test indication
Automatic disconnect L.T. LP3 connected indication
C1 TO C16
blocks LP4 ACB tripped indication
Carriage switch blocks for LP5 ACB OFF indication
D1 TO D6
disconnect position (1) LP6 ACB On indication
Carriage switch blocks for Optional features
D7 TO D12
test position (1) LP7 Closing springs charged indication
Carriage switch blocks for CC Closing coil
D13 TO D18 UV Undervoltage release
connect position (1)
(1) Changeover contacts can be reconfigured by user
UVTD Time delayed undervoltage release
AL MP trip alarm (N/O)
ML Charging motor limit switch
M Closing spring charging motor
ST Shunt trip
31
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 32
DMX
CONNECTIONS
Correct sizing and connection are essential for the reliability of installations and in particular for high
power equipment. DMX devices have generously sized connection plates. On the draw-out versions the
connection plates take multi-directional rear terminals.
Minimum recommended dimension of connection plates and bars per pole

Rear terminals Ie (A) Flexible bars (mm) Rigid bars (mm)
800 1 x 50 x 10 or 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 5
100 100 100 4P
17 1000 1 x 50 x 10 or 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 5
10.5 29
13 1250 2 x 50 x 5 1 x 50 x 10 + 1 x 50 x 5
DMX 2500
50
1600 1 x 50 x 10 + 1 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 10
fixed
100 100 100 4P

17
2000 2 x 50 x 10 2 x 60 x 10
10.5 22 13
65 2500 3 x 50 x 10 3 x 60 x 10
100 100 100

800 1 x 50 x 10 or 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 5
4P
15 1000 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 63 x 5
DMX 2500
draw-out
17 31 1250 1 x 50 x 10 + 1 x 50 x 5 2 x 63 x 5
12
65
1600 2 x 50 x 10 1 or 2 x 60 x 10 + 1 x 63 x 5
Ø12 65 or 2 x 60 x 10
15
42.5 -
43 65 20 2000 3 x 60 x 10 or 2 x 80 x 10
11 22.5
43 11 8 -
2500 4 x 60 x 10 or 3 x 80 x 10
-
Fixed version 800 1 x 75 x 5 or 1 x 80 x 5
130 130 130 4P
17 -
1000 1 x 100 x 5
10 25
13
95 -
1250 2 x 75 x 5 or 2 x 80 x 5
fixed and draw-out
DMX/DMX-L 4000
Draw-out version
DMX-L 2500
-
130 130 130 1600 2 x 100 x 5
4P
-
15 2000 3 x 100 x 5 or 2 x 80 x 10
10 25
12 -
95 2500 2 x 100 x 10
Ø12 95 10 15
-
52.5 3200 3 x 100 x 10
60 95 20
42.5
17.5 -
60 17.5 60 4000 4 x 100 x 10
32
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 33
TECHNICAL PART
Tightening
torque of rear
terminals:
The rear terminals can be positioned vertically 45 to 50 Nm. Connection of two 80 x 10 bars on each rear
or horizontally on the draw-out versions
terminal of draw-out DMX 2500
Connections : a few recommendations !

Connections provide the electrical
connection of equipment and are also
responsible for a considerable proportion
of their heat dissipation.
Connections must never be under-sized.
Plates or terminals must be used over a
maximum area. Heat dissipation is
encouraged by arranging the bars vertically.
If an uneven number of bars is connected,
Connection of four 100 x 10 bars on each rear
place the higher number of bars on the terminal of draw-out DMX 4000
upper part of the terminal.
Avoid bars running side by side: this causes
poor heat dissipation and vibrations. Place
spacers between the bars to maintain a
distance between them which is at least
equivalent to their thickness.
33
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 34
DMX
ELECTRICAL CARACTERISTICS
Type of circuit breaker / type of trip free switches DMX 2 500

800 1 000 1 250 1 600
Size 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
No of poles 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
Electrical characteristics (IEC 947-3)
V ± 690 690 690 690

Rated service voltage Ue
V =
Rated insulated voltage Ui (kV) 1 1 1 1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
Category of use B B B B
Rated frequency (Hz)

50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60
Rated current of the release In (A) 800 1 000 1 250 1 600
Neutral protection (% I of phase) 50 50 50 50
Level of performance H L H L H L H L
Breaking capacity Icu (kA) for DMX 230 V± 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100
Icm (kA) for DMX-I 415 V± 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100
500 V± 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80
600 V± 50 50 65 50 50 65 50 50 65 50 50 65
690 V± 40 40 60 40 40 60 40 40 60 40 40 60
Service breaking capacity Ics (% Icu) 100 100 80 100 100 80 100 100 80 100 100 80
Short time withstand current Icw (kA) t = 1s 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80
Suitability for isolation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Display circuit breaker state 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Display contacts state 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Display springs charged/discharged 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Possible accessories
MP…/17… Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Electronic release with microprocessor
MP…/20… Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Protection against overload Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Protection against short-circuit Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Protection against earth fault Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Auxiliary contacts (5 NO + 3 NC) Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Alarm contacts 1 NO Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Opening releases Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Closing coil Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Motorised spring charging unit Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Fixed version Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Draw-out version Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Mechanical interlocks (2 to 3 units) Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
34
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 35
TECHNICAL PART
DMX 2 500 DMX 4 000 DMX-I 2 500 DMX-I 4 000
2 000 2 500 3 200 4 000 1 250 1 600 2 000 2 500 3 200 4 000
1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
B B B B
50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60
2 000 2 500 3 200 4 000 1 250 1 600 2000 2500 3200 4000
50 50 50 50 50-60 50-60 50-60 50-60 50-60 50-60
H L H L H L H L
50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100
50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 143 143 143 143 143 143
50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 143 143 143 143 143 143
50 50 65 50 50 65 50 50 65 50 50 65 105 105 105 105 105 105
40 40 60 40 40 60 40 40 60 40 40 60 84 84 84 84 84 84
100 100 80 100 100 80 100 100 80 100 100 80
50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 65 80 50 50 50 50 50 50
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series Series
35
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 36
DMX
DIMENSIONS
››› DMX 2 500, DMX-I 2 500

Fixed version Base for draw-out version
44 123 123
58 58
3 P : 320 - 4 P : 420
51
20
530
387
123
267
247
216
38
107
55
168 3 P : 154 68 175 13
4 P : 254
31
178 88 201 39 74
3 P : 342 - 4 P : 442 22,6 234
141
3 P : 268 - 4 P : 368
151
3 P : 287 - 4 P : 387
172
3 P : 329 - 4 P : 429
Draw-out version
382
3 P : 329 - 4 P : 429
87 140 25 25
172 34
24 218
123 123 16
24
51
77
43 65
65
43
441
373
Ø 12
65
208
154
85
50
100 100 100 64,5
8 414 50
379 35
36
EX25027_018-037.qxd 28/12/05 17:38 Page 37
››› DMX 4 000 - DMX-H 2 500/4 000 - DMX-L 2 500/4 000 - DMX-I 4 000
TECHNICAL PART
Fixed version Base for draw-out version
104 123 123

58 58
3 P : 410 - 4 P : 540
51
20
519
530
387
123
267
247
38
107
55
228 3 P : 184 68 175 13
4 P : 314
31
238 88 201 39 201

3 P : 432 - 4 P : 562 22,6 3 P : 358 - 4 P : 488
232
3 P : 419 - 4 P : 549
Draw-out version
382
3 P : 419 - 4 P : 549
87 140 25 25
232 34
24 371
123 123 16
51
77
60 95
60
95
441
373
Ø 12
95
198
154
65
50
130 130 130 79.5
10 414 50
379 35
37
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 38
DPX
moulded
case circuit
breakers
The DPX range is

characterised by its innovative
design and excellent
performance.
DPXs offer optimum solutions
for the protection needs of
commercial and industrial
installations.

on page 178
38
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 39
THE RANGE
TECHNICAL PART
Circuit breakers are available in thermal
magnetic and electronic versions with nominal
currents from 16 to 1600 A and breaking
capacities from 16 to 100 kA. The main
characteristics of DPX circuit breakers are their
optimised dimensions, their ease of installation,
use and accessorisation, and their undisputed
reliability.
Thermal magnetic DPXs

Circuit breakers equipped with thermal magnetic
releases are used to set the thermal intervention
DPX 125
thresholds for protection against overloads and
the magnetic intervention thresholds for protection
against short-circuits.
The magnetic threshold setting option is available
on all devices from the DPX 250 upwards. This
threshold is fixed on equipment for DIN rail
mounting (DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER).
Thermal magnetic DPXs are available from 16 to
1250 A with breaking capacities from 16 to 100 kA.
DPX: non-standard products

Legrand make special products on request
based on the DPX standard range, in particular:
DPX 250 ER
- Circuit-breakers for power distribution with side-mounted add-on earth lockage module
companies: designed to the most stringent
specifications to ensure that the conditions
of use are met
- Magnetic-only circuit-breakers
- 2-pole circuit-breakers (3-pole case) FOR MORE INFORMATION
- Ambient temperature higher or lower
than 40°C For all other requests, please consult
- Etc your Legrand sales office
39
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 40
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
THE RANGE (continued)

Electronic DPXs
Electronic releases are available
DPXs equipped with microprocessor-based
in 3 versions:
electronic releases offer the option, depending on the
- S1: adjustment of Ir and Im
version, of setting precisely both the time and
- S2: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im and Tm
current intervention thresholds for overloads,
- Sg: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im Tm, Ig and Tg
short-circuits and also for ground faults.
Electronic DPXs are available from 40 to 1600 A
with breaking capacities from 36 to 100 kA.
DPX-H 630 - Electronic release Sg
Identification of the type

Electrical performance
- Yellow DPX-H
and standard references
Characteristics Marker holders

- Cat No.
- Breaking capacity
- Nominal current (rating)
- Standard Indicator lamps
- Green: normal operation
Adjustment of the neutral - Continuous red: I ≤ 0,9 Ir
(0-0.5-1) - Flashing red: I ≥ 1,05 Ir
Trip indicator
lamps
Test socket
Test button Sealing of settings

Setting the releases
40
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 41
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 DPX 630 DPX 1600
electronic release electronic release electronic 1
Depending on the model, DPX electronic devices provide additional innovative functions.
- Thermal memory: in the context of “long delay” protection, the release memorises the image of the
temperature rise produced by an overload. This “thermal memory” is refreshed regularly if no other
over-load occurs. However, if there are successive overloads, the effects are cumulative and the operating
time of the device will be proportionally reduced. Protection of the cable is thus maintained.
- Setting the neutral current on the front panel (0%, 50%, 100% of the phase current).
- Logical discrimination: a special link between two devices can be used to assign an additional 50 ms delay
to the device installed upstream in order to give the downstream device time to break the circuit.
- Load-shedding function: when a device is crossed by a current greater than 105% of Ir, it is possible, using
the output contacts, to shed the non-priority circuits.
The load shedding information is cancelled when the device load returns to less than 85% of Ir.
- Signalling the device load via LEDs on the front panel
(green: normal ; red continuous: I = 0.9 × Ir ; red flashing: I = 1.05 × Ir).
- Connector on front panel for wiring the electronic test device Cat. No. 261 99.
- Self-protection if there is a microprocessor problem.
- Device for detection of significant earth faults, with adjustment of the current Ig from 0.2 to 1 × In,
and the time Tg from 0.1 to 1 second.
41
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 42
DPX
CHARACTERISTICS
Type of case DPX 125 DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER
DPX E DPX E DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX
Type of MCCB
16 kA 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA
Number of poles 1P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
Nominal rating (A) 16-125 16-125 63-160 40-60 25-250
Electrical characteristics conforming to CEI 60947-2
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 230 VA 500 VA - 250 V= 500 VA - 250 V= 500 VA - 250 V=
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 290 VA 500 VA 500 VA 500 VA
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 6 6 6
Category of use A A A A
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA) 230 VA 16 22 35 40 40 50 65 40 50 65
400 VA 16 25 36 25 36 50 25 36 50
440 VA 10 18 20 20 25 30 20 25 30
480/500 VA 8 12 14 10 12 15 10 12 15
600 VA
690 VA
250 V= 16 25 30 25 36 45 25 36 45
Service breaking capacity Ics (% Icu) 50 100 50 75 100 75 50 100 75 50
Rating closing capacity on short circuit Icm (400 V) 32 32 52.5 75.6 52.5 75.6 105 52.5 75.6 105
Rating short-time withstand current Icw (kA)
Endurance (o.c. cycle) mechanical 8500 7000 7000 7000
electrical 8500 1000 1000 1000
Isolation capability • •
External accessories
Earth leakage modules underneath • • •
side by side • • •
Remote control • •
Fixed type • • • •
Plug-in type • • •
Draw-out type
Rotary handle • • •
Supply inverter • •
Dimension and weight
Dimensions L x H x D (mm) 1-pole 25x120x74
3-pole 75.6 x 120 x 74 90 x 150 x74 90 x 76 x 74
4-pole 101 x 120 x 74 120 x 150 x 74 120 x 176 x 74
Weight (kg) 3-pole 1 1.2 1.6
4-pole 1.2 1.6 2.1
42
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 43
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 ELEC. DPX 250 DPX 630 ELEC. DPX 630 DPX 1250 DPX 1600 ELEC.
DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H
36 kA 36 kA 36 kA 50 kA 50 kA
3P - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 4P 3P - 4P
40-250 40-250 200-630 400-630 200-630 320-630 800-1250 800-1600
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

690 VA 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA
690 VA 690 VA 690 VA 690 VA 690 VA
8 8 8 8 8
A A A (160-400 A) - B (630 A) A B
60 100 170 60 100 170 60 100 170 60 100 170 80 100 170 80 100
36 70 100 36 70 100 36 70 100 36 70 100 50 70 100 50 70
30 60 70 30 60 70 30 60 70 30 60 70 45 65 80 45 65
25 40 45 25 40 45 25 40 45 25 40 45 35 45 55 35 45
20 25 28 20 25 28 20 25 28 20 25 28 25 35 40 25 35
16 20 22 16 20 22 16 20 22 16 20 22 25 25 30 20 25
36 40 40 36 40 40 50 50 50
100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75
75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 105 154 220 105 154
3 5 15 ≤ 1250 < 20
7000 7000 4000 4000
1000 1000 1000
• •
• • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
105 x 200 x 105 105 x 200 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 210 x 320 x 140 210 x 320 x 140
140 x 200 x 105 140 x 200 x 105 183 x 260 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 280 x 320 x 140 280 x 320 x 140
2.5 2.5 5.3 ≤ 400 < 5.8 5.5 18 18
3.7 3.7 6.8 ≤ 400 < 7.4 6.4 23.4 23.4
43
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 44
DPX
TRIPPING CURVES
Tripping curve for a DPX Tripping curve for a DPX electronic trip
thermal-magnetic trip adjustable Ir, Im, Tr and Tm (S2)
10 000 10000
t (s) t (s)
Thermal realease zone Tr = 30 s 20 %
1 000 1000
when cold Tr = 20 s 20 %
Tr = 10 s 20 %
100 Tr = 5 s 20 %
100
10 Thermal realease zone 10

when hot (in steady state)
1 I2t = K
1
Im
Adjustable magnetic In: 1 600 A
realease zone
In: 1 250 A
0.1
Im 0.1 In: 630 A
Tm
0.01
0.01
If
0.001
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 0.001
I/Ir 0.2 1 2 3 4 5 10 5 7 10 30 70
I/Ir I/In
I: actual current
Ir: long delay protection against overloads
I: actual current (adjustable: Ir = x In, 0.4 to 1 x In)
Ir: thermal overload protection Tr: long delay protection operation time
(Ir setting = x In) (adjustment: 5 to 30 s), values given at 6 x Ir
Im: magnetic protection against short-circuits: Im: short delay protection against short-circuits
(Im setting = x In) (adjustable: Im = x Ir, 1.5 to 10 x Ir in the example)
Tm: short delay protection operation time
Since the curve abscissa expresses the I/Ir ratio, (adjustable: 0 to 0.3 s)
modifying the Ir setting does not change I2t constant (adjustment via Tm)
the graphic representation of thermal see discrimination chapter p. 90
tripping. Conversely, the magnetic setting can be If: fixed threshold instantaneous protection
read directly (3.5 to 10 in this example). (5 to 20 kA depending on the model)
44
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 45
TECHNICAL PART
››› Example of reading and adjusting a tripping curve
Rated current Ib = 500 A
Ik3 max = 25 kA at the circuit breaker point of installation
—> Electronic DPX 630, rating 630 A (Cat. No. 256 03/07)
—> Long delay adjustment (overloads) Ir = 0.8 x In, ie. Ir = 504 A
10 000
t (s)
1 000
100
10
In: 630 A
0,1 In: 400 A
In: 250 A
In: 160 A
0,01
If
0.001
0.2 1 2 3 4 5 10 5 7 10 30 70
I/Ir I/In
Scenario 1: high Ik min. end of line Scenario 2: low Ik min. end of line
Ik minimum (at end of line) = 20 kA Ik minimum (at end of line) = 4 kA
—> short delay adjustment (short-circuit) to its —> short delay adjustment (short-circuit)
maximum value ie. Im = 10 × Ir, ie. Im = 5040 A Im = 5 × Ir, ie. 2520 A
Reading the curves: Reading the curves:
If I < 504 A —> no tripping If I < 504 A —> no tripping
If 504 < I < 5 kA —> tripping between 1 and 200 s (long If 504 < I < 2520 A —> tripping between 10 and 200 s
delay protection) (long delay protection)
If I > 5 kA —> tripping in 0.01 s If 2520 A < I < 5 kA —> tripping < 0.1 s
(instantaneous protection at fixed threshold) (short delay protection)
If I > 5 kA —> tripping 0.01 s
—> (instantaneous protection at fixed threshold)
45
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 46
DPX
CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
Connecting the DPX
Version Connection DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 630 DPX 1250/1600
Front terminals Mounted Mounted Mounted Mounted

Cage terminals Mounted Mounted • • • •
High capacity cage terminals • •
Front terminals extended • • • •
Fixed Spreaders • • •
Threaded rear terminals • • • • •
Flat rear terminals • •
Short flat rear terminals •
Long flat rear terminals •
Front terminals • • • • •
Plug-in Threaded rear terminals • • • • •
Flat rear terminals • •
Front terminals • • •
Draw-out
Threaded rear terminals • • •
Reversible supply
All DPXs can be supplied by either the upper
or lower terminals without any derating of
their performance.
46
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 47
Mounting, control and connection accessories
TECHNICAL PART
Connection terminals
and accessories Terminal shields Spreaders
Remote control
Rotary handle
Base for plug-in version

and “débro-lift” mechanism
for draw-out version
Rear terminals Flat rear terminals Earth leakage modules
47
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 48
DPX
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
Current shunt trip Auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts
Used to open the device remotely. These can be used to transfer remotely
It is always connected in series with an NO control information about the circuit breaker status.
type contact. Auxiliary contacts indicate whether the device is
open or closed, whereas alarm contacts indicate
Undervoltage release that the device is in the “tripped” position following
intervention by the protection unit, a shunt trip, an
With or without a time delay, this causes the
undervoltage release, by the residual current
device to open during a significant reduction in
device or following unplugging.
or absence of control voltage.
Undervoltage releases can be equipped with a
These contacts are mounted on the right of the
time-lag module to avoid false tripping of the
control switch handle under the device cover.
device when the release power supply voltage is
Electrical auxiliaries are mounted on the front
not stable.
panel of the device, in reserved insulated
compartments, without affecting the internal
The releases are mounted to the left of the control
mechanism. The cables exit either via the device
switch handle under the device cover.
side or rear opening. For plug-in and draw-out
versions, the auxiliaries are connected on special
connectors (Cat. No. 098 19/6 contacts and
263 99/8 contacts).
Electrical controls
Used to control circuit breaker making and
breaking remotely. They are installed on the side
of DIN rail mounting devices or on the front for
the rest of the DPX range. Electrical controls can
be equipped with locking devices.
48
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 49
Mounting auxiliaries on DPX
TECHNICAL PART
Auxiliary contact
or fault signal
Trips
Maximum number of auxiliaries per DPX
Device Auxiliary contact Fault signal Trip
DPX 125 1 1 1
DPX 160 1 1 1
DPX 250 ER 1 1 1
DPX 250 2 1 1
DPX 630 2 2 1
DPX 1600 3 1 1
49
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 50
DPX
PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS

With the advantage of both plug-in and draw-out versions, DPXs - notwithstanding their ability to “make safe”
installations and devices - represent a significant development in the actual functions of this type of device.
DPX250
plug-in version,
mounted on its base
DPX 1600
with rear terminals
draw-out
DPX mounting versions
DPX 1250
Mounting DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 630 1600
+ Downstr. RCD
+ Downstr. RCD
+ Downstr. RCD
+ Downstr. RCD
+ Downstr. RCD
+ Side RCD
+ Side RCD
+ Side RCD
On its own
On its own
On its own
On its own
On its own
On its own
On rail • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Fixed
Rear terminals • • • • • • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • • • • • •
Plug-in
Rear terminals • • • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • •
Draw-out
Rear terminals • • • • •
50
ex25027_038-051.qxd 28/12/05 17:45 Page 51
Plug-in versions
Plug-in (or disconnectable) devices can be inserted Plug-in devices can, in simple situations, be used
TECHNICAL PART
or removed without powering down the relevant for isolation and making safe, but they are primarily
circuit. Connection and disconnection are only used for their interchangeability, which makes
possible when the device is open; otherwise, maintenance much easier.
disconnection causes mechanical breaking They are sometimes designated by the letter D
of the device. as “Disconnectable parts”.
MCCB Tulip contacts Mounting base
DPX 250 ER
DPX 250
DPX 630
51
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 52
DPX
PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS (continued)
Draw-out versions
Draw-out devices which in addition to the advantages
of plug-in devices (interchangeability and visible
break isolation) can be used, due to the associated
“debro-lift“ mechanism, to control connection and “Debro-lift” mechanism
disconnection, to enable tests and measurements
on the auxiliairy circuits while isolating the main Very simple to install (two screws), the “debro-lift”
circuits, to display the status of these circuits, and mechanism is fixed on the support bases common
finally by means of different systems (padlocks, to the devices.
locks, etc) to lock the device for padlocking The connection/disconnection operation is then
operations. performed mechanically by a crank mechanism.
Draw-out devices can be designated by the letter W
The mechanism determines three positions
as “Withdrawable parts”.
identified by different coloured indicators:
• “connected”, main circuits and auxiliary
Tulip Mounting base circuits connected, red indicator
MCCB • “test”, main circuits isolated and auxiliary
contacts + “débro-lift” circuits connected, yellow indicator
• “drawn-out”, main circuits and auxiliary
circuits isolated, green indicator
Base and
“debro-lift”
DPX 630 mechanism
for DPX 630
Indicator
signalling
the different
positions of
DPX 1600 the mechanism
52
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 53
CONNECTION CAPACITIES
TECHNICAL PART
Numerous accessories are available to meet all the various connection requirements.
In addition to direct connection on a plate, they include terminals, distribution terminals,
connection extension rods, spreader strips, rear terminals with screws or flat connectors, etc.
The tables below give the connection capacities for the various accessories selected.
DPX 125 Maximum capacities for each pole

Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact
Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)
Cage terminals 12 70 70
(included with DPX)
048 67
Distribution 6 x 35 6 x 25
terminal
263 00/01
Rear terminals 15 95-8 120-8
with screws

Cross-section
(mm2)
Direct 18 50-6 50-8

on plate
262 18 13 95 70
Cage terminal
262 17
Connection 20 70-10 185-10
extension rod
262 19
Large-capacity 120 95
terminal
048 67
Distribution 6 x 35 6 x 25
terminal
263 00/01
Rear terminals 18 120-8 185-10 120-10
with screws
53
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 54
DPX
CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued)
DPX 250 ER Maximum capacities for each pole

Cross-section
(mm2)
20 70-8 120-10
Direct
on plate
18 185 150
262 88
Cage terminal
32 185-12 300-10 240-12 300-10
262 90/91
Spreaders
25 120-10 185-10 150-12 185-10

262 31
Adaptors
185-12 240-12
265 10/11
Rear terminals with
screws
95-8 185-10 95-12 185-10

Plug-in version
Front terminals
Rear terminals with screws

Draw-out
version
Rear terminals
54
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 55
TECHNICAL PART
Cross-section
(mm2)
Mode Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
(mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)
25 95-8 185-10 185-10

Direct
on plate
262 35
18 185 150
Cage terminal
32 185-12 300-10 240-12 300-10

262 33/34
Spreaders
Ig 25 120-10 185-10 150-12 185-10

262 31
Adaptors
262 32
25 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10
Connection
extension rod
263 31/32 25 185-12 240-12

Rear terminals with
screws
265 57/28 25 95-10 185-10 150-12 185-10

Rear terminals with flat
connectors
Plug-in version 20 95-10 185-10 95-12 185-10

Front terminals
20 2 x 95-8 2 x 185-10 2 x 185-10

XL-Part base
Plug-in version
Plug-in and
draw-out version Supplied with rear terminals with screws
Rear terminals
55
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 56
DPX
CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued)

Cross-section
(mm2)
32 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10

Direct on
plate
262 50 25 300 240

Cage terminal
262 51
Terminal for 2 x 240 2 x 185
2 conductors
50 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-16 2 x 300-10

262 48/49
Spreaders
262 46
Adaptors
32 2 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10
400A
262 47 32 2 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10

Connection
extension rod
263 50/51 32 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-16

Rear terminals with
screws
263 52/53 40 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10

Rear terminals
with flat connectors
Plug-in or
25 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10
draw-out version
Front terminals
25 1 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10

XL-Part base
Plug-in version
Plug-in or Supplied with rear terminals with flat connectors or screws

draw-out version
Rear terminals
56
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 57
TECHNICAL PART
Cross-section
(mm2)
50 300-14 300-16
Direct on
plate
262 69
2 x 240 2 x 185
Terminal for
2 conductors
262 70
4 x 240 4 x 185
Terminal for
4 conductors
80 4 x 300-14 4 x 300-16 4 x 300-14

262 73/74
Spreaders
262 67 ( 1250 A) 50 2 x 300-14 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-14

262 68
Connection extension rod
50 2 x 300-14 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-14

263 80/82
Short rear terminals
50 3 x 300-14 3 x 300-16 3 x 300-14

263 81/83
Long rear terminals
4 x 120-12
50 4 x 185-10 2 x 300-14 4 x 150-10
2 x 300-14
Draw-out
version
Front terminals
50 2 x 185-12 2 x 240-12
Draw-out
version
Rear terminals
57
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 58
DPX
SUPPLY INVERTERS
Supply inverters can be
created with DPX 160,
DPX 250, DPX 630 and
DPX 1600 devices,
using breakers or
switches in fixed or
draw-out versions,
available in 3 different
versions:
- Manual: the mounting plate, equipped with a
mechanical interlock device, prevents the
simultaneous closing of the two devices it
supports. A device can only close if the other
device is open.
- Remote control: the devices are equipped
with motor-driven control and their operation
can therefore be controlled remotely.
- Automatic: an electronic control unit
(230 VA or 24 V=) drives the inverter.
58
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 59
SWITCH VERSIONS
TECHNICAL PART
Trip-free switches are circuit-breakers without DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I
125 160 250 ER 250 630 1 600
protection release. Ra t e d
50/60 Hz 500 500 500 690 690 690
Their size and overall dimensions are the same o p e rat i n g
vo l t a ge
and they can be equipped with all internal and Ue (V)
dc 250 250 250 250 250 250
external accessories and all remote control Ra t e d

devices. insulat i o n 500 500 500 690 690 690
The DPX-I can be opened via shunt releases or

v o l t a ge Ui (V ±)
undervoltage releases and can be fitted with earth Ra t e d i m p u l s e
w i t h s t a n d vo l t a g e 6 6 6 8 8 8
leakage modules. Uimp (kV)
These devices conform to standard IEC 60947-3,
Ra t e d cl o s i n g
category of use AC 23 A ca p a c i t y
on 400 V 3 3.6 4.3 4.3 13 40
s h o r t - c i rc u i t
Icm (kA)
The same devices and the same accessories Shor t-time

r e s i s t iv e
1,7 2,1 3 3 7,6 20
as for circuit-breakers c u r rent
Icw (kA)
t=1s
E n d u ra n c e
(o. c c yc le)
m e ch a n i c a l 8 500 7 000 7 000 7 000 4 000 2 500
electrical 1 500 1 000 1000 1 000 1 000 500
Conve n t i o n a l
125 160 250 250 630 1600
t h e r m a l c u r r ent (A)
125 160 250
±)
A C 23 A (690 V 250 630 1600
(500 V) (500 V) (500 V)
DC 23 A (250 V ± ) 125 160 250 250 630 -
Other switch ranges

See Isolation chapter p.133
59
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 60
DPX
RESIDUAL CURRENT VERSIONS

All DPX circuit-breakers up to 630 A can be fitted General characteristics
with earth leakage modules without modifying
- Earth leakage module with electronic release
their technical characteristics and with the same
- Type A
options for accessories.
- Time delay and sensitivity can be adjusted:
- IΔn = 30 mA - 300 mA - 1 A - 3 A
Mounting - t = instantaneous - 0.3 s - 1 s - 3 s
There are two versions of the earth leakage - If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, the time delay
module up to 250 ER with the same technical is automatically cancelled.
characteristics but a different method of
mounting:
- mounted side by side
- mounted underneath Electronic modules
They are available in 5 ratings depending on the
rating of the circuit-breaker: power supply
- 63 A for the DPX 125 from 16 to 63 A N L1 L2 L3
- 125 A for the DPX 125 from 100 to 125 A reset isolator switch
- 160 A for the DPX 250 ER
- 250 A for the DPX 250 ER
- 250 A for the DPX 250
Installation of earth leakage modules is a purely electronics
mechanical task and neither device needs to be
dismantled.
If earth leakage modules are mounted on the
underneath, the electrical connection is direct. test
N L1 L2 L3
If they are mounted side by side, the conductors use
have to be connected.
This earth leakage module is adjustable

Residual current relays with separate core - in sensitivity: 0 - 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
- in time delay: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s.
The power supply is taken directly between the
three phases, only two of which are necessary
These add a to ensure operation of the release
residual current
function to DPX
and DMX-E circuit
breakers and
switches equipped Description of residual current devices
with trip coils. See chapter p.16
60
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 61
TECHNICAL PART
Side Side Side
Mounted Underneath Underneath Underneath
by side by side by side
Type 125 125 250 ER 250 ER 250 up to 630
Release electronic electronic electronic electronic electronic electronic
Nominal current In (A) 63-125 63-125 160-250 160-250 160-250 400 and 630
Number of poles 3-4 4 3-4 4 4-3 4-3
width 101 101 120 120 140 183
Dimensions depth 74 74 74 74 105 105

(mm)
height 120 90 150 108 108 152
Nominal voltage Ue V± (50-60 Hz) 500 500 500 500 500 500
Operating voltage V± (50-60 Hz) 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500
Residual current IΔn (A) 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3
Time delay threshold Δt(s) 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3
Operation in presence of DC
• • • • • •
components
DIN rail mounting • •
fixed, front terminals • • • • • •

Versions
fixed, rear terminals • • • •
supplied with DPX • •

Cable
terminals
on request • • • •
For 3-pole and 4-pole DPX › DPX 630, use RCD kits
61
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 62
DPX
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
High temperatures Rated current for DPXs depending

A circuit breaker is set to operate at on the thermal setting (Ir) as a function
of the temperature in the enclosure
In at an ambient temperature of 40°C for
Thermal Rated 40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
DPX circuit breakers (standard IEC 60947-2) magnetic
MCCB current Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max.
When the ambient temperature inside the enclosure 25 A 17 25 16 24 16 23 15 22
where the DPX units are installed is higher than this 40 A 28 40 27 38 26 37 25 36
value, the rated current should be reduced in order
DPX 125 63 A 44 63 42 60 40 58 38 55
to avoid false tripping.
100 A 70 100 67 96 64 92 61 88
The minimum value of the rated current 125 A 87 125 84 120 80 115 76 110
corresponds to the minimum setting of the Ir/In 25 A 16 25 14 23 13 20 12 18
trip unit (0.7 for DPX 125 - 0.64 for DPX 160 - 0.8 40 A 25 40 23 36 20 32 18 28
for DPX 400 - 0.4 for DPX 630 - 0.4 for DPX 1600). DPX 160 63 A 40 63 36 57 32 50 28 43
100 A 63 100 58 91 52 82 48 73
Plug-in and draw-out versions: 160 A 100 160 93 145 83 130 73 115
Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.85 to the 100 A 64 100 58 91 52 82 47 73

DPX 250
maximum found value of the rated current. ER 160 A 102 160 93 145 83 130 74 115
250 A 160 250 147 230 134 210 122 190
100 A 63 100 58 91 52 82 48 73
Version with earth leakage module: DPX 250 160 A 100 160 93 145 83 130 73 115
Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.9 to the maximum 250 A 160 250 147 230 130 210 115 190
found value of the rated current.
400 A 160 400 160 400 150 380
Apply a coefficient of 0.7 if the two versions are DPX 630 500 A 400 500 380 480 360 450 340 420
simultaneous. 630 A 250 630 240 599 227 567
For DPXs rated at temperatures other than 40°C, 800 A 630 800 600 760 570 720 540 680
please contact your local sales office. DPX 1600 1000 A 800 1000 760 950 720 900 680 850
1250 A 1000 1250 950 1190 900 1125 850 1080
Electronic Rated
40°C 50°C 60°C
MCCB current
DPX 250 250 A 250 250 238

400 A 400 400 380
DPX 630
630 A 630 600 567
800 A 800 760 760
DPX 1600 1250 A 1250 1188 1125
1600 A 1600 1520 1440
62
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 63
400 Hz power supply Correction factors to be applied when setting thermal-

magnetic trip DPXs, for use at 400 Hz
The stated characteristics for the devices assume
TECHNICAL PART
a frequency of 50/60 Hz. They should be corrected Thermal setting Magnetic setting
Device Nominal
for use at 400 Hz. type rating Correction In Correction Im
factor at 400 Hz factor at 400 Hz
For DPXs, the correction factors given in the table 16 A 1 16 2 1000
opposite are to be applied when adjusting the 25 A 1 25 2 1250
thermal and the magnetic. 40 A 1 40 2 1800
DPX 125
63 A 0.95 60 2 1900
100 A 0.9 90 2 2500
125 A 0.9 112 2 2500
16 A 1 25 2 800
40 A 1 40 2 800
DPX 160 63 A 0.95 60 2 1250
100 A 0.95 95 2 2000
160 A 0,9 145 2 3200
100 A 0.95 95 2 2000
DPX 250
160 A 0.9 145 2 3200
ER
250 A 0.85 210 2 5000
40 A 1 40 2 280 to 800
63 A 0.95 60 2 440 to 1250
DPX 250 100 A 0.95 95 2 700 to 2000
160 A 0.9 145 2 1120 to 3200
250 A 0.85 210 2 1800 to 5000
DC power supply 400 A 0.8 320 1 2000 to 4000
DPX 630
Thermal-magnetic DPXs can also be used up 630 A 0.6 380 1 3200 to 6300
800 A 0.6 480 1 4000 to 8000
to an operating voltage of 500 VDC (three poles DPX 1600
1250 A 0.6 750 1 3800 to 7500
in series). Their magnetic thresholds are then
increased by 50% (see table below)
Breaking capacity Icu (kA) Protection thresholds
Rated 2 poles in series 2 poles in series 3 poles in series

Thermal Magnetic
current 110 -125 V 250 V 500 V
DPX 125-E 16-125 A 20 16 16 100% 150%

DPX 125 (25 kA) 16-125 A 30 25 25 100% 150%
DPX 125 (36 kA) 16-125 A 36 30 30 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER 25-250 A 30 25 25 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER (36 kA) 25-250 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER (50 kA) 25-250 A 50 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250 25-250 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250-H 25-250 A 45 90 40 100% 150%
DPX 250-L 25-250 A 50 45 45 100% 150%
DPX 630 250-630 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 630-H 250-630 A 45 40 40 100% 150%
DPX 630-L 250-630 A 50 45 45 100% 150%
63
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 64
DPX
DIMENSIONS
››› DPX 125
■ Dimensions
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e
m o d u l e m o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h
97
101 97
75.6 74 8 50.8
8 32 101 10 74 8
12 12 37.8
120
120
101
45
101
45
45
210
193
193
32.25
45
25.4 25.4 M4
25.4 Ø 4.3 or M4
F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e
75.6 101 97 97
74 8 101 74 8
101
120
101
45
45
45
210
191
25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4

45
32.25
M8
81
10
39
M4
25.4 25.4 25.4
M8
81
M4
39
10
64
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 65
TECHNICAL PART
Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX
75.5 60
25.4 8 74 48
20
11.2
A
103
80
A
80
DPX 125 170

40.2
DPX 125 + ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e

mounted side by side 260
12.7 M4
20
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
m o d u l e m o u n t e d s i d e b y s i d e(1)
35
75.5
202 97 25.4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
101 101 72 min.
74
37.8 25.4 10
11.25
62.75
103
80
120
103
45
12.7 M4
8
12.7
113.7
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole
earth leakage modules
65
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 66
DPX
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 160
■ Dimensions
97
120 74 8 120 8 97
90
45 8 23 30
9
150
150
150
45
45
45
247
265
M4
30 18 max. 30 23
45
115
14 30 30 M4 23
45 74 8
F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e
90 120 97
Y
150
150
45
45
45
X
55
247
265
241
55.5
30 30 30 30 30 74 8
161
158
45
115
95
48
30 30 30
74 8
120
97
45
M10
95
48
M4
8
66
ex25027_052-067.qxd 28/12/05 17:51 Page 67
TECHNICAL PART
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX
m o d u l e m o u n t e d s i d e b y s i d e(1)
60
30 M4 8 74 48
Y
240 97 35
120 120 74 8
11.25
30 M4 8
==
115
=
80
38.5
95
86
132
150
1.5 max.
15
45
X
75.5
=
60
45 30
15 135
Y
Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
35
30 M4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
11.25
115
80
38.5
A
15
A
75.5
DPX 160 278
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage
modules
67
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 68
DPX
››› DPX 250 ER
■ Dimensions
module mounted side by side
160 A
120 8 18 Ø max.
90 18
10 max.
30 30 30
Y
240
120 120
M4
30
==
176
145
115
95
45
38.5
176
53.5
69
1.6
30 30 30 18
20 max. 11.5
45 74
60
97
45 30
15 135
250 A
270
150
30 30 30 15
30 30 30
215.5
115
145
176
38.5
53.5
69
20 max.
30 30 30
30 30
45
68
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 69
TECHNICAL PART
F i xe d v e r s i o n w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h
u n d e r nea t h handle on door
Front terminals Rear terminals
120 8 18 Ø 18 max. 282 max.

10 max.
30 30 30 72 min.
60 35
30 M4 8 74 48 2/4
35
M4
M4
91.5
11.25
45
45
115
80
237
38.5
267
298
62.7
62.7
107.7
1.5 max.
15
45
45
75.5
52.8
67.8
83.3
1.6
10 max.
30 30 30 18 74 11.5
8
74 11.5 97
20 max. 45
97
Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
97
74
76.5
115
A
A
M4
DPX 250 ER 296

DPX 250 ER + ear t h l e a k a g e
module 418
69
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 70
DPX
››› DPX 250
■ Dimensions
P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s
105
105 140 186.5
140 105
100 20 32.5
70 17 36
35 17.5 • 4 min.
4 4 min.
33
11
173.5
200
170
94
66.5
M5
341.5
10
245.5
200
90
94
25 52.5 27
35 35 35 35 35 138.5
Ø9
F i xe d v e r s i o n w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
35 35 35 35 35 153
u n d e r nea t h(1)
138.5
105 138.5 P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
140
11 36 105 4 min.
24 52.5
105 186.5
100 140 153
10
100 35 4 min.
94
278
281.5
308
66.5
173.5
173.5
200
90
94
10
52.5 153
35 17.5
70 27
35 35 35 35 35
M5
70
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 71
TECHNICAL PART
Draw - o u t vers i o n , f ro n t t e r m i n a l s Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
187 140 (4 P)
34 45.5 105 (3 P)
20 52.35
5
32.5
34
34 A
DPX 250 330
A
192.75

144.75
m o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h 438
124.5
99.5
66.5
155
90
X
94
449.5
353.5
313
D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h

handle on door
24.75
265 max. 71.5

Ø9
93 min.
100 40 58
2.5 max.
34 50 2/4
35 35 35
25
Y
Draw - o u t vers i o n , rear ter m i n a l s
94
Rear terminal with threaded rod

187 35 35
34 34 45.5
47.5
M12
93.5
108.75
99.5
66.5
155
173.5
35 35 35
90
94
24.75
M12
93.5
47.5
Flat rear terminals

187 35 35
34 34 45.5 19
Ø9 10
81
26
108.75
99.5
37
66.5
155
173.5
90
94
35 35 35
24.75
19 Ø9
26 10
81
37
71
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 72
DPX
››› DPX 630
■ Dimensions
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s
144
140 183 105 4 min. 140 183 153
17 50 32 70 29
32 70 32 70
100 100
15 max.
100 100
260
220
94
15 max.
94
398
302
220
130
94
94
43.5 87 M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 27
4 min.
Ø 14
F i xe d v e r s i o n w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 192
u n d e r nea t h
183 144 P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
70 105 4 min. 144
32 21.75 17 50
105 4 min.
140 183 192
70 153
100
100 100
94
372
412
372
220
265
130
94
94
4 min.
87 Ø 6 or
M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 27
72
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 73
TECHNICAL PART
Draw - o u t vers i o n , f ro n t t e r m i n a l s Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
130 183 34 45.5 34

29
5
34
A
A
DPX 630 390

265
398
302
265
130
155
94
X
m o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h 542
24.7
14
43.5 43.5 43.5 187 D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h

Y
handle on door
Draw - o u t vers i o n , rear ter m i n a l s 265 max. 71.5

93 min.
100 40 58
50
45.5 34
47
34
43.5 43.5 43.5

94
M 16
103
130
220
155
94
58
2.5 max. 2/4

24.7
187
Flat rear terminal

45.5 34
34
43.5 43.5 8
130
220
155
15
94
29
124
59
24.7
187
73
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 74
DPX
››› DPX 1250 - 1600
■ Dimensions
Y
Y 215
210 29
70 70 280
8
25 70 70 70 13 min.
100
169
20
25 max.
158
149
278
280
320
298
94
X X
M12
M10 M8
70 35
50 5 140
140
Y
F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
280 (4 P) Vertical Horizontal

210 (3 P)
13 32 12.5 163 12.5
105 23 140 98 140
12
40
90
169
145.5
100
145.5
M8
68
56
273
273
118
94
320
94
X X
40
6 6
14 3 2.5 max. 3 2.5 max.
Y 238 188 238
13 32
74
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 75
TECHNICAL PART
Draw - o u t vers i o n , rear ter m i n a l s Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
299 364
256 325 34.5
325
360
480
70 70 70 70 70
218.5
253
D i re c t ro t a r y handle on DPX Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
125
49 67.5 125
62.5 265 max. 81
62.5
93 min.
66.5
66.5
125
125
2.5 max. 2/4
75
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 76
DX
modular
circuit
breakers
Legrand DX modular circuit

breakers are used to organize
distribution in rows in
complete freedom

on page 218
76
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 77
DX MODULAR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TECHNICAL PART
18 mm 18 mm
1 module per pole up to 63 A
and 1.5 modules from 80 to 125 A
Quality and approval marks
Circuit identification
Control handle
o I - ON/red
o O - OFF/green
Characteristics
Marking of DX units
Legrand 1 3
Cat. No. 1 3 T
2 protected poles
Im : Making and
breaking capacity Breaking capacity
equal to that of
1 3 T associated MCB
In : Rated
064 66
current (nominal)
400 V 2 4
IΔm = Icn 2 4
C 10 Im = 500 A Im = 1500 A
230 V
086 29
300 mA
078 08
6000
3 2 4
40 A IΔn = 0.03 A
Mensuel I IΔn = 0.3 A 300 mA
10000 TEST Monthly TEST Mensuel
Monthly
Rated sensitivity
Limiting class Short circuit with an
associated protection IΔn : Sensitivity
DX 2-pole MCB DX 2-pole RCCB DX add-on module
77
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 78
DX
modular circuit breakers
CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS
Designa t i o n DX-E 6000 /6 k A DX 6000 /10 kA
Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P + N 1P 2P
Ra t e d c u r r ent in a t 30 °C (A)
Ra t i n g s 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 0,5/1/2/3/4 1/2/3/4/6/10 1/2/3/4/6/10
20/25/32 20/25/32 20/25/32 20/25/32 6/8/10/13/16 16/20/25/32 16/20/25/32
40/50/63 40/50/63 40/50/63 40/50/63 20/25/32/40 40/50/63 40/50/63
Ty p e o f c u r v e B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C
N o m i n a l vo l t a g e ( w i t h s t a n d a r d t o l e r a n c e ) 230/400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 230 V 230/400 V 400 V
N o m i n a l f re q u e n c y 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
O p e r a t i n g v o l t a ge (50/60 Hz) +/- 10% 240/415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V 240 V 240/415 V 415 V
B re a k i n g c a p a c i t y with 127/230 V supply 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A
Icn 50/60 Hz
acc. to EN 60898 with 230/400 V supply 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A
Curve B: 25 kA
B re a k i n g c a p a c i t y
Curve C:
Icu 50/60 Hz with 127/230 V supply 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 10 kA 10 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA
acc. to EN 60947-2
In > 32 A: 20 kA
with 230/400 V supply

6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
S t a n d a rd b re a k i n g c a p a c i t y I c s a c c . t o
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
EN 60947-2
Ra t e d i n s u l a t i o n vo l t a ge Ui
500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 250 V 500 V 500 V
(de g r e e o f p o l l u t i o n 2 )
Ra t e d i m p u l s e w i t h s t a n d c u r r e n t U i m p
6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 4 kV 6 kV 6 kV
(kV)
E n d u rance m e ch a n i c a l 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000
( o p e rat i n g c yc les)
electrical 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000
D i e l e t r i c s t r e n g t h b e t ween 0 and 2000 m 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V
Re m o t e c o n t ro l - - - - - yes yes
A dd-on module - - - - - - yes
O p e rat i n g t e m p e rat u re -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C
78
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 79
TECHNICAL PART
DX 6000 /10 kA DX-H 10000 /25 kA DX-D 6000 DX-L 50 kA
3P, 3P+N 3P, 3P+N

and 4P 1P 1P+N 2P and 4P 1P 2P 3P and 4P 2P 4P
1/2/3/6/10 2/3/6/10 6/10/13/16 2/3/6/10 2/3/6/10 1/2/3/6/10/ 1/2/3/6/10 1/2/3/6/10 10/16/20/25 10/16/20/25
16/20/25/32 13/16/20/25 20/25/32 13/16/20/25 13/16/20/25 13/16/20/25 16/20/25/32 16/20/25 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63
40/50/63 32/40/50/63 40/50/63 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63 40/50/63 32/40/50/63
80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125
B and C B(1) and C B and C C B(1) and C D D D C C
400 V 230/400 V 230 V 400 V 400 V 230/400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
415 V 240/415 V 240 V 415 V 415 V 240/415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V
6 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A
6 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A
Curve B: 25 kA
In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA
Curve C: In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA
25 kA 25 kA In 50/63 A: 25 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA 70 kA 70 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In > 40 A: 25 kA
In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA
In > 32 A: 20 kA
In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 30 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA
In 25 A: 20 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In 25 A: 25 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA
10 kA 50 kA 50 kA
In 32 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 20 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA
In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 40 A: 15 kA In > 40 A: 12,5 kA
100% 75% 75% 75% 75% 75% 80% 75% 75% 75%
500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V
6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV
20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000
10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000
2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V
yes yes - yes yes yes ≤ 63 A: yes ≤ 63 A: yes
yes - - yes yes yes yes yes yes
-25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C
79
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 80
DX
modular circuit breakers (continued)
CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS (continued)
Choice of protection devices according to the neutral earthing system
As a general rule all live conductors (phase and neutral) must be protected against overloads and short-
circuits. It is however possible to do away with this requirement for the neutral conductor in certain
configurations.
Main permitted layouts according to the neutral earthing system and the type of circuit
N N N N N
Neutral
earthing
system
SN = SPH SN = SPH N not distributed SN = SPH SN < SPH SN = SPH SN < SPH SN = SPH SN < SPH
TT (1) (1)
TN-S (1) (1)
TN-C
IT (2) (2)
(1) In TT and TN systems, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if the cross-section of the neutral
conductor is the same as that of the phase conductors. However, the neutral conductor must be protected if there is a risk
of it breaking upstream of the device and there is no residual current protection (TN system).
(2) In IT systems with a distributed neutral conductor, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if a
residual current protection device, with a sensitivity of less than 15% of the current permissible in the neutral, is placed
upstream. This device must break all the poles, including the neutral. This situation should be limited to the supply of devices
which can withstand the full voltage (between phases) with no risk of fire.
80
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 81
Interruption of the neutral (by deliberate breaking or detection of overcurrent) must always lead to
TECHNICAL PART
breaking of all the live conductors. Single-pole breaking of the neutral creates an imbalance in the
voltages applied to single-phase devices supplied by a three-phase circuit.
When the neutral opens the R1 and R2 receivers are

powered in series by the voltage between phases
1
2
(U23: 400 V in the example)
3 U23 = UR1 + UR2
N Depending on the actual impedance of each receiver
R1 and R2, the voltage which will be applied to them
can reach destructive values.
If for example R1 is a 2 kW device and R2 a100 W
R1 R2 device, the voltage at the terminals of R1 will be 20 V
and that at the terminals of R2 will be 380 V(!)
instead of a normal voltage of 230 V.
3-phase breaking devices with neutral pole must break the neutral pole last during opening and make it
again first during closing. For this reason also it is always important to observe the N marking on
devices and not connect the neutral conductor to another pole.
81
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 82
DX
modular circuit breakers (continued)
CONNECTION OF DX UNITS
Maximum capacities for each pole

LEXIC
Control and
signalling DX 40 A DX 63 A DX 125 A DX 63A with supply busbar
Direct cage Direct cage Direct cage Direct cage Incoming terminal Incoming terminal
049 05 049 06
Mode
Connection
rigid 6 16 35 50 25 35
Cross-section 6 10 25 35 16 35
(mm2) flexible
PERFORMANCE
The DX performances vary according Rated current (A) according to the temperature for DX, DX-H
to their conditions of use. circuit breakers curves B and C and DX-D circuit breakers curve D
In (A) 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
Temperature
1 1.1 1.07 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.90
A circuit breaker is set to operate at In 2 2.2 2.1 2.06 2 1.94 1.86 1.80
in an ambient temperature of:
3 3.3 3.2 3.1 3 2.9 2.8 2.6
- 30°C for DX circuit breakers according
to EN 60898. 6 6.6 6.4 6.18 6 6.8 5.5 5.4
10 11 10.7 10.3 10 9.7 9.3 9
16 18 17.3 16.6 16 15.4 14.7 14.1
20 22.4 21.6 20.8 20 19.2 18.4 17.6
25 28.3 27.2 26 25 24 22.7 21.7
32 36.2 34.9 33.3 32 30.7 29.1 27.8
40 46 44 42 40 38 36 34
50 57.5 55 52.5 50 47.5 45 42.5
63 73.1 69.9 66.1 63 59.8 56.1 52.9
80 96 89 86.4 80 73.6 67.2 60.8
100 119 114 108 100 92 84 76
125 148 142 135 125 115 105 95
- Reference temperature = 30°C

82
ex25027_068-083.qxd 28/12/05 17:53 Page 83
400 Hz power supply Protection of capacitor banks
TECHNICAL PART
The stated characteristics for the devices assume The rating for the protection device should be
a frequency of 50/60 Hz. determined on the basis of an actual rated current
They should be corrected for use at 400 Hz. (IB) increased by the K cœfficient.
1-module Neutral + phase DX and DX 80 A, 100 A K = 2 for Q ≤ 25 kVAR
and 125 A circuit breakers have their magnetic K = 1.8 for Q ≤ 50 kVAR
threshold increased by 35%. K = 1.7 for Q ≤ 100 kVAR
This increase is 45% for 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole DX and K = 1.5 for Q > 100 kVAR
DX-H circuit breakers from 1 to 63 A.
The other characteristics, such as the nominal IB = Q x 1000 x K
rating for operation and the thermal thresholds, Ux 3
do not change. This is the case for all ratings. Q: Capacitor bank reactive power (in kVAR)
U: Nominal voltage of 3-phase supply
DC power supply
DXs can protect lines supplied with DC, provided
they do not exceed:
- 60 V per device for DX P+N and DNX P+N
ELECTRICAL AUXILIARIES
(1 module)
- 80 V per pole for DX and DX-H. The DX range has all the necessary electrical
For voltages higher than 80 V, use multi-pole auxiliaries: auxiliary contact, fault signal, shunt
devices and place the poles in series. trips or undervoltage releases.
For DXs, the auxiliaries (3 at maximum(1)) are
Supplying power to fluorescent tubes mounted on the left-hand side of the devices.
They allow the prong-type supply busbars to pass
The rating for the protection device should be
through.
determined on the basis of an actual rated current
(IB) increased by the K cœfficient. (1)
Only 1 control auxiliary per association and 1 signalling
K = 1.8 for compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.85)
auxiliary maximum (0.5 module or 2 auxiliaries of 1 module)
K = 3.4 for non-compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.5)
can be mounted between the m.c.b.s. and control auxiliary.
With 230 V three-phase distribution: IB = P x K

230
With 400 V three-phase distribution: IB = P xK

400 x 3
P: Sum of powers (in W) of fluorescent fittings

depending on models (18 W, 36 W, 58 W, 2 × 36 W,
2 × 58 W, 2 × 80 W, 4 × 18 W, etc).
83
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 84
Association
of protection
devices
Back-up protection is
the technique by which
the breaking capacity of
a breaker is increased by
coordinating it with another
protection device, placed
upstream.
This coordination makes it
possible to use a protection
device with a breaking
capacity which is lower than
the maximum prospective
short-circuit current at
its installation point.
B C D E
84
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 85
BACK-UP PROTECTION
TECHNICAL PART
The breaking capacity of a protection device must
be at least equal to the maximum short-circuit Example of association
which may occur at the point at which this device
is installed.
By exception, the breaking capacity may be lower
than the maximum prospective short-circuit, as Ik max = 30 kA
long as:
- it is associated with a device upstream which has DPX 250 ER 250 A
the necessary breaking capacity at its own Breaking capacity = 50 kA
installation point
Ik max = 23 kA
- the downstream device and the trunking being
protected can withstand the power limited by the
association of the devices.
DX 40 A - C curve
Association therefore leads to substantial savings. Breaking capacity alone = 10 kA
Breaking capacity in association
The association values given in the tables on the with DPX 250 ER = 25 kA
following pages are based on laboratory tests
carried out in accordance with IEC 947-2.
In the case of single phase circuits in a 380/415
Vac system, supplied upstream by a 3-phase
circuit, it is advisable to use the association tables
for 230 Vac.
85
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 86
Association
of protection devices
BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued)
3-level association Association between distribution boards
Association applies to devices installed in the same

distribution board as well as in different boards.
A
It is therefore generally possible to benefit from

the advantages of the association between devices
located, for example, in a main distribution board
B
and in a secondary board.
A
Board n°1
An association may be created on three levels
if one of the conditions below is met.
• The upstream device A must have an adequate
breaking capacity at its installation point.
Devices B and C are associated with device A.
Simply check that the association values B + A Board n°2
and C + A have the necessary breaking capacity.
In this case, there is no need to check the association
between devices B and C. B
• The association is made between successive
devices:
- Upstream device A, which has an adequate
C
breaking capacity at its installation point,
device C is associated with device B which is
in turn associated with device A.
- Simply check that the association values C+B

and B+A have the necessary breaking capacity.
In this case, there is no need to check
the association between devices A and C.
86
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 87
TECHNICAL PART
■ I n 3 - p h a s e n e t w orks (+ N) 400/415 V ■ I n 3 - p h a s e n e t w orks (+ N) 230/240 V
a c c o rding to IEC 60947-2 a c c o rding to IEC 60947-2
F u s e s u p s t r eam F u s e s u p s t r eam
gG type gG type
M C B s d o w n s t r eam 20 to 32 A 63 to 160 A
M C B s d o w n s t r eam 20 to 50 A 63 to 160 A
1 to 40 A 100 100 1 to 40 A 100 100

DX DX
6 000 - 10 kA 6 000 - 10 kA
C and D cur v es C and D cur v es
50 to 125 A 100 50 to 125 A 100
2 to 40 A 100 100 2 to 40 A 100 100

DX-H DX-H
10 000 - 25 kA 10 000 - 25 kA
B and C cur v es B and C cur v es

50 to 63 A 100 50 to 63 A 100
10 to 40 A 100 100 10 to 40 A 100 100
DX-L - 50 kA DX-L - 50 kA
C cur ve C cur ve
50 to 63 A 100 50 to 63 A 100
87
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 88
Association
of protection devices (continued)
■ In 3-phase networks + N 400/415 V according to IEC 60947-2
M C B s / M C C B s u p s t r eam
DPX/
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA DPX-E DPX DPX
DX-L DPX-H
B and C cur v es 125 125 250 ER
160
M C B s d o w n s t r eam 2 to 32 A 40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A 40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
1 to 20 A 25 12.5 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 A 25 12.5 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
32 A 12.5 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
DX 6 000 - 10 kA 40 A 12.5 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
50 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 20 20
B and C cur v es
63 A 16 25 15 20 15 15
80 A 20 25 20 20
100 A 20 25 20 20
125 A 25 15 15
1 to 16 A 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
20 A 50 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 25 A 25 16 25 15 25 25 25 25
B and C c u r v e s
32 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
DX 6 000 - 15 kA
D cur ve 40 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
50 A 25 16 25 15 25 25 20 20
63 A 16 25 25 25 20 15 15
10
DX-L - 50 kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
to
C cur ve
63 A
88
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 89
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L
250 630 630 electro n i c 1 250 1 600
160 A 250 A 250 to 400 A 160 to 400 A 630 A 5 0 0 t o 1 250 A 8 0 0 t o 1 600 A
25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 20 20
25 25 25 25 25 15 15
25 20 20 20 20 15 12.5
20 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5
15 15 15 15 15 12.5
20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20
15 15 15 15 10
25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 20 20
25 25 25 25 25 15 15
25 20 20 20 20 15 15
20 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5
15 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
89
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 90
Association
■ In 3-phase networks + N 230/240 V according to IEC 60947-2
M C B s / M C C B s u p s t r eam
DPX/
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA DPX-E DPX DPX
DX-L DPX-H
B and C cur v es 125 125 250 ER
160
M C B s d o w n s t r eam 2 to 32 A 40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A 40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
1 to 20 A 50 25 50 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
32 & 40 A 25 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
50 A 25 16 25 25 36 36 36 36
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
B and C cur v es 63 A 16 25 15 30 30 30
80 A 16 25 25 25 25 25
100 A 16 25 25 25 25
125 A 25 25 25
1 to 40 A 50 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
B and C cur v es 16 25
50 A 25 25 36 36 36 36
DX 6 000 - 15 kA
D cur ve 63 A 16 25 25 30 30 30
DX-L - 50 kA 10 to 63 A 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
C cur ve
TT or TN neutral earthing systems:

For a 230/400 V supply in order to determine the breaking capacity of a 2 P MCB used as L + N (230 V) downstream a 2 P or 4 P circuit
breaker use values indicated in the table for 230/240 V
90
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 91
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L
250 630 electro n i c 1 250 1 600
160 A 250 A 250 to 400 A 160 to 400 A 630 A 5 0 0 t o 1 250 A 8 0 0 t o 1 600 A
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
36 30 30 30 25 25 25
30 30 30 30 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 20
25 25 25 25 20
25 25 25 25 20
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
36 30 30 30 25 25 25
25 30 30 30 25 25 25
70 70 70 70 70 70
91
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 92
Association
DISCRIMINATION
Discrimination or selectivity is a technique which Discrimination between A and B is said to be

consists of coordinating the protection in such a “partial” in the other cases.
way that a fault on one circuit only trips the The discrimination limit (given in the following
protection placed at the head of that circuit, tables) is therefore defined. This gives the short-
thus avoiding rendering the remainder of the circuit current value below which only breaker B
installation inoperative. Discrimination improves will open and above which breaker A may open.
continuity of service and safety of the installation.
There are a number of techniques for providing
Discrimination between A and B is said to be “total” discrimination:
if it is provided up to the value of the maximum - Current discrimination, used for terminal
prospective short-circuit at the point at which B is circuits which have low short-circuits.
installed. - Time discrimination, provided by a delay on
tripping the upstream breaker.
- Logical discrimination, a variant of time
discrimination, used on electronic breakers
via a special link between the devices.
B C D E
By extension, in the tables on the following pages,

total discrimination, indicated by T, means that
there is discrimination up to the breaking capacity
of device B.
92
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 93
Since almost all faults occur during use, partial discrimination may be adequate if the discrimination
TECHNICAL PART
limit is higher than the value of the maximum short-circuit which may occur at the point of use
(or at the end of the trunking). This is referred to as “operating discrimination“.
This technique is very often adequate, more economical and less restricting in terms of implementation.
DPX 250 ER
160 A
The discrimination limit for the association
DPX 250 ER (160 A) with DX 40 A (curve C) is 6 kA.
Since the prospective ISC at the point
Ik max. : 8 kA of installation is 8 kA, the discrimination is not total.
DX 40 A However, there is discrimination at the point of use at which
the prospective short-circuit is only 3 kA.
Ik max. : 3 kA
Discrimination in current
This technique is based on the offset of the The discrimination limit is then equal to the
intensity of the tripping curves of the upstream magnetic release current ImA of the upstream
and downstream breakers. device. The discrimination is then total as long
It is checked by comparing these curves and as IkB is less than ImA.
checking that they do not overlap. It applies for the
overload zone and the short-circuit zone, and the Discrimination in current is therefore very suitable
further apart the ratings of the devices, the better for terminal circuits where short-circuits are
the discrimination. relatively weak.
In other cases, time discrimination may be used
- On overloads together with current discrimination. (see p. 94)
To have discrimination in the overload zone, the
ratio of the setting currents (Ir) must be at least 2.
- On short-circuits
To have discrimination in the short-circuit zone,
the ratio of the magnetic setting currents (Im)
must be at least 1.6.
93
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 94
Association
DISCRIMINATION (continued)
Current discrimination
B: downstream MCB A: upstream MCB
The discrimination
is total for IkB
Only B opens A and B open
Ir B IrA IkB I
ImB ImA
IkB : maximum short-circuit at the point at which MCB B is installed
IP (kA)
Non-limited current
When the downstream MCB B
is a limiting device, the short-circuit
Limitation curve current is limited in terms of time
of the MCB and amplitude. The discrimination
is therefore total if the limited current
IscB, which device B allows to pass,
is lower than the tripping current
of device A.
I'kB IkB ISC (kA)

IkB : prospective short-circuit at the point at which the device is installed
I'kB : short-circuit limited by device B
94
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 95
Time discrimination
Logical discrimination
This technique is based on the offset of the times
TECHNICAL PART
of the tripping curves of the breakers in series.
It is checked by comparing the curves and is used
for discrimination in the short-circuit zone. It is
also used in addition to current discrimination in
order to obtain discrimination beyond the magnetic
setting current of the upstream breaker (ImA).
50 ms
t (s)
B A
… between two electronic

DPXs via a special link
Tm
ImB ImA I (A) With the same aim of improving continuity of

service, the electronic releases also have a load
shedding function. This function is used to
The following is necessary: disconnect non-priority circuits when the
- It must be possible to set a time delay on the protected circuit has a load of more than 90%.
upstream breaker,
- The upstream breaker must be able to withstand
the short-circuit current and its effects for the
whole period of the time delay, Electronic releases with contstant I 2t setting
- The trunking through which this current passes
must be able to withstand the thermal stresses (I2t).
The use of MCCBs with electronic releases, on
The non-tripping time of the upstream device must
which a constant I2t can be set, improves the
be longer than the breaking time (including any
discrimination.
time delay) of the downstream device.
Removing the heel value of the short delay
DPX MCCBs have a number of time delay setting
tripping curve (I2t = constant) avoids overlapping
positions for creating discrimination with a
of the tripping curves.
number of stages.
This option is available on the DPX-630 and
DPX-1600.
Logical discrimination
This is provided between two devices which t (s) B A
communicate via a special link. When the
downstream breaker detects a fault, it sends a
signal to the upstream device which will then have Set at constant I2t
a 50 ms time delay. If the downstream device has
Normal setting
not been able to eliminate the fault during this
time delay, the upstream device will be activated.
The electronic releases of DPX MCCBs are I (A)
designed to perform logical discrimination.
95
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 96
Association
Up-stream circuit-breaker
DPX-E 125 (25/36 kA) DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 250 electr o n i c
DPX 125 (25 /36 kA) DPX-H 160 (25 /36/70 kA) DPX-H 250 DPX-H 250 electr o n i c
(25/36/50 kA) DPX-L 250 DPX-L 250 electro n i c
Down stream
circuit-breaker In (A) 40 63 100 125 40 63 100 160 250 63 100 160 250 40 63 100 160 250
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-E 125
63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 125 40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(25 k A ) 63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 125 40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(36 k A ) 63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 160
DPX 250 ER 63 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(25/36/50 k A ) 100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
160 2.5 2.5 3.5
250
25 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 250 63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
160 2.5 3.5
250
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5
63 1 1.6 2.5
DPX 250
e l e c t ro n i c 100 1.6 2.5
160 2.5
250
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-H 250 63 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-L 250 100 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
160 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
250 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
63 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-H 250 elec. 100 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-L 250 elec. 160 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
250 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
96
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 97
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 630 DPX 630 electr o n i c DPX 1 250 DPX 1 600 S1 DPX 1 600 S2 Sg DPX 1 600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-H 630 DPX-H 630 electr o n i c DPX-H 1 250
DPX-H 1 600 S1 DPX-H 1 600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1 600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-L 630 DPX-L 630 electro n i c DPX-L 1 250
250 320 400 500 630 160 250 400 630 500 630 800 1 000 1 250 630 800 630 800 1 250 1 600
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
97
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 98
Association
Up-stream circuit-breaker
DPX 630 DPX 630 electr o n i c DPX 1 250 DPX 1 600 S1
DPX-H 630 DPX-H 630 electr o n i c DPX-H 1 250 DPX-H 1 600 S1
DPX-L 630 DPX-L 630 electro n i c DPX-L 1 250
Down stream
circuit-breaker In (A) 250 320 400 500 630 160 250 400 630 500 630 800 1 000 1 250 630 800
250 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
320 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
DPX 630 400 5 6.3 6 10 10 10 6 7,5 15 15
500 6.3 10 10 6 7,5 10 10
630 10 6 7,5 10
250 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
320 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
DPX-H 630
400 5 6.3 6 10 10 10 6 7.5 15 15
DPX-L 630
500 6.3 10 10 6 7.5 10 10
630 10 6 7.5 10
160 6.3 5 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX 630 elec. 250 6.3 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
400 6.3 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
630 8 6 8 15
160 6.3 5 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX-H 630 elec. 250 6.3 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX-H 630 elec. 400 6.3 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
630 8 6 8 15
500 5 8 7.5 15 15
630 8 7.5 15
DPX 1 250 800
1 000 7.5
1 250
500 5 8 7.5 15 15
630 8 7.5 15
DPX-H 1 250 800
DPX-L 1 250
1 000 7.5
1 250
630 15
DPX 630 elec.
800
DPX/DPX-H 630 15
DPX 630 elec. 800
DPX/DPX-H 1 250
S1 S2 Sg 1 600
98
ex25027_084-099.qxd 28/12/05 17:55 Page 99
TECHNICAL PART
Upstream fuse
MCCBs gG type
DPX 1 600 S2 Sg DPX 1 600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-H 1 600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1 600 S1 S2 Sg d o w n s t r eam 250 A 400 A 1 000 A
DPX 125 7 500
630 800 1 250 1 600 DPX 160 10 000
20 20 20 T DPX 250 ER 10 000
20 20 20 T DPX 250 10 000
20 20 20 T
DPX 630 50 000
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 36
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 T
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 36
20 20 20 20
20 20 20
20 20
20 20
20
20 20 20 20
20 20 20
20 20
20 20
20
15 15 20
15 20
15 15 20
15 20
20
99
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 100
Association
MCCBs upstream
DPX
DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX/H/L 250
MCBs downstream 40 A 63 A 100 A 125 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
1 to 4 A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
6A 6 000 6 000 T T T T T T T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 5 000 T T 5 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 5 000 T T 5 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
LR 6 000 16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 4 000 T T 4000 T T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA 20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 4 000 8 000 T 4 000 8 000 T T 4 000 8 000 T T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 3 000 6 000 8 500 3 000 6 000 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 2 000 5 000 7 000 2000 5 000 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
C cur ve 40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 4 000 5 500 4 000 5 500 7 000 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 3 000 5 000 3 000 5 000 6 000 4 000 8 000 T
80 A 2 000 2 500 5 000 2 500 5 000 6 000 8 000 T
100 A 4 000 4 000 5 000 7 500 T
125 A 2 000 2 000 3 000 3 000 8 000
6A 6 000 6 000 T T 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 3 500 6 000 T 3 500 6 000 T T 4 000 T T T
20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 3 500 6 000 T 3 500 6000 T T 4 000 8 000 T T
DX 6 000 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 2 500 5 500 8 500 2 500 5 500 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
D cur ve 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 2 500 5 000 7 000 2 500 5 000 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 2 000 4 500 6 000 2 000 4 500 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 3 500 5 000 3 500 5 500 T 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 3 500 5 000 3 500 5 000 6 000 4 000 8 000 T
80 A 1 500 4 000 4 000 5 000 7 000 T
100 A 3 000 3 000 4 000 6 500 T
125 A 1 500 1 500 2 000 2 000 7 000
6A 6 000 6 000 10 000 10 000 T T T T T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 7 000 T T 7 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
LR 6 000 13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 7 000 T T 7 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA 16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 5 500 9 500 T 5 500 9 500 T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA 20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 5 500 8 500 10 000 5 500 8 500 10 000 T 3 000 8 000 T T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 4 500 7 000 8 500 4 500 7 000 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
B cur ve 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 4 500 5 500 7 000 4 500 5 500 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 5 500 6 000 5 500 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 5 500 4 500 5 500 10 000 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 5 000 4 500 5 000 8 000 4 000 8 000 T
10 A 30 000 30 000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
16 A 20 000 20 000 35 000 35 000 20 000 T T 20 000 T T T 40 000 T T
20 A 15 000 15 000 25 000 25 000 15 000 22 000 T 15 000 22 000 T T 33 000 T T
DX-L 25 0 0 0 - 5 0 k A 25 A 12 000 12 000 20 000 20 000 12 000 18 000 T 12 000 18 000 T T 28 000 T T
C cur ve 32 A 9 000 15 000 15 000 9 000 13 000 T 9 000 13 000 T T 20 000 T T
40 A 6 000 10 000 10 000 6 000 8 000 20 000 6 000 8 000 20 000 25 000 13 000 T T
50 A 5 000 5 000 4 000 10 000 4 000 10 000 20 000 8 000 20 000 T
63 A 5 000 5 000 4 000 10 000 4 000 10 000 15 000 8 000 20 000 T
T= total selection, up to downstream circuit breaker breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2
100
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 101
TECHNICAL PART
DPX
DPX/H/L 630 elec. DPX/H/L 630 DPX/H/L 1250 DPX/H 1600 elec.
250 A 320 A 400 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 500 A 630 A 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 630 A 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
8000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
101
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 102
Association
Discrimination tables
ACBs/ACBs
D M X - E u p s t r eam
1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
800 A T T T T T
1 000 A T T T T
1 250 A T T T
DMX-E 1 600 A T T
d o w n s t r eam 2 000 A T
2 500 A
3 200 A
4 000 A
ACBs/MCCBs
D M X - E u p s t r eam
800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
DPX 125 T T T T T T T T
DPX 250 ER T T T T T T T T
DPX < 400 A T T T T T T T T
down-
s t ream DPX 630 400 A T T T T T T T T
630 A T T T T T T
800 A T T T T T
DPX 1 600 1 250 A T T
1 600 A T T
T = total selectivity, up to downstream circuit breaker capacity according to IEC 60947-2
102
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 103
DISCRIMINATION BETWEEN RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
TECHNICAL PART
The conditions for coordination of residual current
protection devices (RCDs) are defined in IEC 60364. 2-level discrimination
While ensuring maximum safety, they allow
continued operation of those parts of the
installation which are unaffected by any faults that
may have occurred.
Discrimination between two residual current Upstream
RCD 300 mA
protection devices requires the time/current non-
discriminating
tripping characteristic of the upstream device to (80 ms)
be higher than that of the downstream device.
Total discrimination between a downstream

(A) and upstream (B) device
Downstream
RCD 30 mA
instantaneous
t (20 ms)
B
3-level discrimination
A
RCD 1A,
1 second
delay
I
RCD 300 mA
In practice, the upstream device should have a
discriminating
sensitivity 2 to 3 times lower and a breaking time (130 to 500 ms)
at IΔn at least 3 times longer than the downstream
device. A delay of more than 1 s is not usually
permitted.
RCD 30 mA
instantaneous
(20 to 50 ms)
103
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 104
Voltage
Surge
Protectors
(VSP)
Lightning strikes occur

every year and cause
significant damage
throughout the world.
Lightning is a natural
phenomenon which is
increasingly disruptive
to our industrial and
domestic equipment

on page 240
104
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 105
LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES
TECHNICAL PART
By their very nature, powerful and unexpected, THE PHENOMENON OF LIGHTNING
lightning strikes often have dramatic consequences
for electrical installations. Lightning is a very powerful electrical discharge
Knowledge of the phenomenon and its effects is caused by a rebalancing of potential between clouds
essential in order to assess the risks and choose or between clouds and ground. Lightning currents
the best protection equipment. can be as much as 10 to 100 kA with a rise time of a
few microseconds.
Lightning can cause considerable damage.
- Cloud-to-ground lightning strike: a “stepped
leader” traces a conductor channel descending
from the cloud to ground and the lightning is
Risk of lightning: discharged as it returns from the ground to the
cloud.
the annual average of stormy days - Ground-to-cloud lightning strike: the leader rises,
and is established from a point connected to earth
(tree, building, lightning conductor, ground, etc).
The lightning strike occurs as it returns with emission
of light (flash), sound (thunder) and the discharge
of an intense current (several hundred kA).
The different types of ground lightning strike

Depending on the direction in which the charge develops and whether
the charge is negative or positive, there are four different types of
ground lightning strike
-- +++
0-1 40 - 59 --- ++
2-4 60 - 79 -- +++
--- ++
5-9 80 - 99
10 - 19 100 - 139
20 - 39 140 - 200 +
+++++ +++++ ----- -----

Negative Positive ground- Positive cloud-to- Negative ground-
cloud-to-ground to-cloud ground to-cloud
Current
1st Rise time t1: 0.3 to 2 ms
I return arc Reset time to half-value t2: 10 to 25 ms Subsequent arcs
Typical shape Peak current I: several tens of kA
of the atmospheric
discharge current I/2
of a lightning
strike
t1 t2 Time
105
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 106
Voltage Surge Protectors
LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES (continued)

Lightning directly or indirectly generates INDIRECT EFFECTS
the following effects: The lightning current and its effects can reach the
- thermal (blow-outs, fire) installation by three means of access:
- electrodynamic (loosening of terminals) - air connections (power, telecoms, television, etc)
- rise in earth voltage (risk of electrocution) entering or exiting the building ➀
- overvoltages of several thousand volts and - the ground, following its increase in potential, via
destructive induced currents (damage to electrical the exposed conductive parts, the earth network
and electronic equipment, interruption of operation) and protective conductors ➁
- conductive loops (structure, etc), internal
DIRECT EFFECTS networks (power, telecoms, etc) ➂
At the point of impact, lightning generates:
- direct thermal effects (melting, fire) caused by the
electrical arc
- thermal and electrodynamic effects induced by
circulation of the lightning current
- blast effects (shock wave and blast air) produced ➂
by air expansion
➀ ➀
As the lightning current is propagated, it creates overvoltages either by

conduction in the live cables ➀ and the earthing conductors ➁ , or by
inductive or capacitive coupling, directly onto the mains supplies ➂ .
It will then damage any connected electrical or electronic equipment.
The effects of a lightning strike can be felt by

induction within a radius of 1 km and by
conduction within a radius of more than 10 km.
106
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 107
Simplified electrical models of overvoltages caused by lightning
TECHNICAL PART
Overvoltage on the power line input Voltage returned by the earth Overvoltage induced in a loop
U U
U U
Installation Stray Installation Stray Installation Stray

earth connection capacity earth connection capacity earth connection capacity
When lightning strikes overhead power lines A ground lightning strike causes an increase Associated with the lightning discharge is an
it propagates overvoltages on HV in the earth potential which can spread to the electromagnetic field with a wide frequency
and LV networks of several thousand installation (return from earth). spectrum which, as it connects to the loops in
volts. the installation, will give rise to destructive
induced currents.
ASSESSING THE RISKS OF LIGHTNING - “external connections” to the site (electrical,

telephone networks, etc)
The consequences of lightning strikes and the - the structure and scale of the buildings,
probability of the site being hit by lightning can be the activity (installations for the protection
assessed by carrying out a risk analysis. of the environment, public buildings),
In order to do this, a number of factors must first - the consequences associated with the risks
be considered: (environmental, human, financial, etc)
- an assessment of the meteorological risks, - the sensitivity of equipment (computers,
the storm history electronics, etc)
- specific geographical features of the location - the strategic importance of installations (public
- the nature of the site services, transport, civil or military safety, etc)
- the site to be protected and what it is sheltering - the reasonably acceptable failure rate, its cost,
Thus for a given site it is possible to measure more its consequences, with regard to the various
precisely the degree of protection on the basis protection solutions.
of the risks run:
107
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 108

(continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING

This is based essentially on:
• catching and discharging the current to earth Lightning conductors with spark-over device
• the use of voltage surge protectors
• passive protection of the installation These are equipped
Passive protection (poor, good) designates the part
with a device which
of the protection provided by the structure and the
creates an
configuration of the installation itself (neutral
earthing system, area, level of equipotentiality, etc.) electrical field
at their tip
DIRECT EFFECTS
Protection against the direct effects of lightning Lightning conductors with earthing wires
relies on catching the current and discharging it
to earth (lightning conductor, catcher rods, etc). This system is used on
top of certain buildings,
Lightning conductors outdoor storage areas,
These protect installations against direct lightning electrical lines
strikes. By catching the lightning and running the (protective ground
discharge current to earth, they avoid the damage wire), etc.
linked to the lightning impact itself and circulation
of the associated current.
There are four categories of lightning conductor.
Lightning conductors with meshed cage
Single rod lightning conductors

(Franklin type)
The meshed cage consists of a network of conductors arranged

around the outside of the building so that its whole volume is
circumscribed. Catcher rods regularly arranged around the
projecting points of the building can be added to this network.
These consist of All the interconnected conductors are connected to the earth
a tip, one or more connection network by several downcoming conductors.
downcoming The level of protection is defined by the size of the mesh.
conductors and Lightning conductors with a meshed cage complete the
an earth connection arrangements for meshing buildings against radiated
electromagnetic fields to which they must be interconnected
108
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 109
TECHNICAL PART
The electrogeometric model
After assessing the risk of a lightning stike and its
likely consequences in economic terms, the choice
of lightning catching devices (lightning conductors)
will require an implementation study specific to General principle of the electrogeometric model
each site.
In this approach, the aim will to be to check that the
lightning has a preferential tendency to strike at
precise predetermined points, not other parts of the
buildings or installations.
To achieve this, a so-called “electrogeometric” D
method is used which defines the circular zone
theoretically protected by a lightning conductor
according to the intensity of the discharge current
of the 1st arc. The higher this current, the higher
D
the probability of capture and the wider the
protected zone. D
Protected zone
The electrogeometric model should be

The tip of the leader stroke (or precursor) is deemed
adapted according to the protection device:
to represent the centre of a fictional sphere, with a
single rod lightning conductor, meshed cage,
radius D. This sphere follows the random path of the
earthing wires whose protected volumes are
leader stroke. The first element to come into contact
defined in standard IEC 61024-1. This defines
with this sphere will determine the lightning point
four levels of protection according to the
of impact: a tree, a roof, the ground or a lightning
probability of capture.
conductor, if there is one. Beyond the tangent points
of this sphere, protection is no longer provided by
Level I II III IV
the lightning conductor.
Probability The theoretical radius (D) of the sphere is defined
98 95 90 80
of capture (%) by the relationship: D = 10 x I2/3 where D is in metres
Min. capture and I is in kA
2.8 5.2 9.5 14.7
current (kA)
D (m) 15 29 46 96 135 215
Max. spark-over
20 30 45 60 I (kA) 2 5 10 30 50 100
distance (m)
For optimum protection integrating the probable values
For active lightning conductors with a spark-
of the lowest lightning currents (protection level I),
over device, you should refer to the
the sphere we would be looking at is 20 m (I = 2.8 kA).
manufacturer documentation.
109
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 110

(continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued)

The protection plan: capture surface areas INDIRECT EFFECTS
When the site to be protected consists of several buildings or
The principle of protection against
extends beyond the range of a single catcher device (lightning
indirect effects of lightning consists of
conductor), it is necessary to draw up a protection plan for the
preventing the interference-bearing, or
area, juxtaposing the different theoretical capture surface
even destructive, energy from reaching
areas. It is always difficult to achieve total coverage of a site
appliances and equipment. To achieve
when it consists of structures of different heights.
this, three conditions must be fulfilled.
Superimposing the protection plan on the site layout shows
- Avoiding the appearance of dangerous
which zones are not covered and where a lightning strike
overvoltages between the appliances
could have destructive effects.
themselves and between the appliances,
the protection circuits and the various
metal conductive parts, is the role of the
equipotential bonding system
Example of protection plan - Minimising the effects of induction due
to fields generated by the lightning
impact itself and by the lightning
conductor downcomers on all the
Storage Car park
conductive loops (electrical power and
communication lines) and also the
Bays
building structures; the appropriate
Manufacturing
Street lighting
location of devices and their wiring can
Aerial limit induced voltages.
Chimney
- Limiting the rise in potential of the
Reception installation by shunting the lightning
current to the low-lying reference
Automatic exchange
Pumping potential (earthing network), is the role of
the voltage surge protectors.
Silo Silo Waste
treatment
On this (fictional) site we can see that the sensitive areas:

manufacturing, storage, processing etc, have been protected Damage to electrical
effectively by lightning conductors or by a meshed cage, but not installations mainly results
areas such as reception and the car park which are deemed to be from the indirect effects of
low-risk. More in-depth consideration shows that the street lightning strikes.
lighting illuminating the car park can be struck by lightning and
transmit the lightning strike to the installation, and that the
reception area housing the telephone switchboard and paging
aerial (beep) represents a zone which is both vulnerable and
sensitive, the pumping station is in theory protected by the silo
lightning conductors which are much higher, a situation which
must not however lead us to forget that in this case, a sideways
lightning strike is possible.
110
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 111
Radiated electromagnetic field
TECHNICAL PART
The lightning discharge current, whether by direct impact or carried by a lightning conductor downcomer,
generates a field whose electrical and magnetic components reach considerable values: several kV/m and
several tens of microTeslas (μT).
This radiation is received by all the conductors, forming a more or less appropriate aerial, which becomes
the focus of the induced currents. It is particularly on the conductors which make up the wide surface area
loops that the effect of magnetic induction (field H) is predominant.
Coupling loop i
2.5 m 100 m
U
12 m 3m
The field generated by the current i (several kA) in the lightning conductor downcomer connects to the loop
formed by the conductors in the building, generating a voltage U of several kV. This phenomenon also occurs
at a lesser level when there is an impact some distance away, even several hundred metres. By way of
example, a lightning current of 10 kA at 100 m will generate an overvoltage of 600 V in a loop of 30 m2. The
same lightning current in the lightning conductor downcomer (located 3 m away) will generate an
overvoltage of more than 15 kV. In the 1st case, the overvoltage may be absorbed without too much damage,
in the second it will certainly be destructive. This also illustrates how the presence of a lightning conductor
can only be envisaged if voltage surge protectors are installed in the installation.
Inductive coupling of a single conductor

H on a loop:
voltage U equals: U = M x __
di
L1 dt
U where M is a coefficient characterising the coupling according to
L2
distances L1 and L2, the loop surface area and the magnetic permeability
of the environment. In practice, it is assumed that the loop plane is at
right-angles to the current i (therefore L1 = L2) and that the distance is
i longer than the size of the loop.
111
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 112

(continued)
Feedback from earth

When lightning falls on a lightning conductor or even directly on the ground, it causes a local increase in the
earth potential. This then spreads to neighbouring installations via their earth connections and bonding
systems, and to more distant installations via the distribution network.
Installation
Installation Installation
Feedback
from earth
Secondary
spark-over
Local rise in earth potential
Close to the lightning strike, an overvoltage, said to be fed back from earth, spreads from earth to the
network, either via the installation (with destructive effects), or by spark-over in the protectors.
In this last instance, the installation is protected, but other installations supplied by the same mains supply
are not necessarily protected. Overvoltage U, which spreads, can then cause destructive secondary spark-
overs between live conductors and ground, in more distant installations where the earth is referenced to a
different potential. This type of phenomenon can be seen in installations in buildings close to a tall structure
that has been struck by lightning.
To limit the consequences of such phenomena, which are always difficult to foresee, you should:
- Equip all installations supplied by the same LV network with voltage surge protectors
- Make all bonding systems equipotential via interconnected connections. This solution can be executed on
groups of buildings (factory), but does not work in the home.
Note that the neutral conductor, regularly earthed, ensures a certain equipotentiality for the system, but this
is not extended to the installation whose earth connections are separate (TT system). From this point of view,
distribution via a TN system would be more favourable.
Finally, let us add that although they are naturally protected against direct effects, underground distribution
networks can also induce feedback from earth.
112
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 113
Passive protection: installation - The geometric separation of circuits intended to

structure and setup limit the crosstalk couplings between the
TECHNICAL PART
conductors of these circuits (the existence of
The numerous links between the buildings coupling loops sensitive to the electromagnetic field
(computer networks, remote monitoring, generated by the lightning is based on dimensional
communications, alarms and power) create and geometric aspects and must therefore be
interference as a result of the effect of the distinguished from the concept of cohabitation
lightning’s electromagnetic field or that of the distance between the conductors themselves).
potential gradient generated by the ground. There - The electrical separation of power supplies
are two ways in which these links can be protected: between the so-called “sensitive” circuits and
- Shielding or use of Faraday cages which will, in the power circuits.
addition to protecting against these fields, mainly - Equipotentiality created by the bonding system,
consist of maintaining the equipotentiality of the for which five levels are suggested.
link (adjacent earthing conductor, twisting,
conductor screen, etc) The risk linked to the direct effects of lightning
- Galvanic decoupling which will separate buildings is never total zero. The additional cost of
electrically (optocouplers, fibre optics, isolation protection devices, compared to the potential
transformers, etc). losses, is negligible and is reimbursed when
The terms “installation structure and setup” refer the 1st incident happens. But voltage surge
to: protectors are not a panacea if they are
- Earth connection schemes (or neutral earthing incorporated in a badly designed installation.
systems) whose type has an influence on the It is above all through the precautions taken
behaviour of the installation and hence on the in the installation structure and setup (passive
choice of voltage surge protectors. protection) that the best protection will be
established.
Passive protection: configuration logic

Passive protection is defined by independent concepts, and some people may find it difficult to appreciate its
qualitative value precisely: scale of the installation, separation of circuits, level of equipotentiality.
The logic diagram should therefore be read as an indicator of the level of passive protection:
- good when a maximum number of criteria are in the green zone
- poor when a majority are in the red
- and average in the intermediate cases (eg: TN system, but not very large site).
Neutral earthing system
TT IT TN
Scale of the installation (number of loops)
very large (site) large (block of flats) small (house)
Geometric separation of circuits
not separate (coupling) separate shielded (not much coupling)
Separation of the power supply for sensitive circuits
same power supply separate power supply separate supply
Level of equipotentiality
0 1 2 3 4
protection conductors earthing conductors equipotential links meshing of blocks total meshing
113
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 114

(continued)

Active protection: voltage surge voltage to pass through which might damage
protectors the electrical equipment.
Installation in cascade is necessary by adding one
The VSP is a passive component which becomes or two additional voltage surge protectors:
active when it responds to a lightning strike. - by lowering the value of the residual voltage
It behaves like an automatic switch, shunting to a value less than the Up of the last voltage surge
the current when it is subject to transient protector, an acceptable level for the equipment
overvoltage (atmospheric origin). to be protected
A single voltage surge protector may prove - by discharging an additional part of the original
insufficient to protect the whole of an overcurrent to earth
installation effectively: it could allow residual
Principle of active protection
L
N 20% of the original
4% of the
overcurrent 1 First (main)
original
100% of the voltage surge protector
overcurrent
original 2
overcurrent
Second voltage surge protector
3 Proximity voltage surge protector
Stays between 3
0 and 1% of
the original
80% of the overcurrent
original 1 2
16% of the
overcurrent
original
discharged
overcurrent
by the VSP
Reducing
the overvoltage
with voltage a few
µs
surge protectors low supply voltage
in cascade 230/400 V - 50 Hz
20 ms 40 ms 20 ms 40 ms 20 ms 40 ms
10 ms 30 ms 50 ms 10 ms 30 ms 50 ms 10 ms 30 ms 50 ms
Without voltage surge protector Main voltage surge protector Main voltage surge protector
+ proximity voltage surge protector
114
ex25027_100-115.qxd 28/12/05 17:56 Page 115
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
TECHNICAL PART
CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPOLOGY
Two concepts are essential in order to define

the characteristics of a VSP:
- its flow-to-earth capacity Components used in voltage surge protectors
- its protection level VSP are based mainly on the use of 3 types of
There are three main types of VSP: component. The voltage/time characteristics
- Class 1 (VSP to be used in the case of buildings illustrated by the curves below show 2 operating
equipped with a lightning conductor), VSP modes:
characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form
of a conventional wave 10/350 which is closest > voltage breaking
to the direct lightning current wave.
U
This VSP therefore has a high capacity for Spark-over
discharging the energy. It is used to reduce
the difference in potential between the lightning
protection system and the electrical installation
during flow-to-earth of the installation lightning
conductor lightning current. In an apartment block,
it can be replaced by class 2 VSP located at the
Spark gap
source of each of the shunted installations.
It is characterised by I imp. µs
- Class 2 (VSP for general applications), a VSP
characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form > voltage limiting
of an 8/20 wave, a conventional current wave U
closest to the current waves due to the indirect
effects of the lightning. It is characterised by I max.
- Class 3 (used for final protection), a VSP Peak limiting
characterised by a combined wave (voltage 1.2/50;
current 8/20) and by Uoc.
Variable resistor
µs
U
Peak limiting

Zener diode
See the on-line catalogue:
(extremely fragile)
instructions, technical data
µs
sheets, etc.
115
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 116

(continued)
RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS

CONNECTING VOLTAGE SURGE
PROTECTORS Connection in parallel
Class 1 and 2 VSP are connected in parallel on the
electrical installation.
Class 3 VSP can be installed in parallel or in series S
depending on the manufacturer’s recommendations. Uimp
P Up
D
Receiver
Phase or neutral
Connection principles terminal block
For the voltage surge protector to perform its function

as well as possible, it must be installed:
- as a tap-off
- keeping as short a connection length as possible Max.
distance: 0.5 m
between the phase-neutral terminal block and the PE or
PEN terminal block Cross-section:
2
6 mm min
- in accordance with EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) MCB (16 mm2 with
rules: avoid the use of loops, fix the cables against metal (VSP protection) direct lighting
VSP protection)
conductive parts
Main terminal block

protective conductors
Some wiring configurations can create couplings between the VSP upstream and downstream conductors,
which are likely to cause the lightning wave to spread throughout the installation.
Ph
Ph N N
PE Ph
N
Ph
PE PE PE
Upstream and downstream Conductors connected on Return conductor from Conductors for connecting
conductors connected on the same terminal but well the VSP close to the the VSP kept separate
the VSP with a common path separated (circuit VSP) incoming conductors and as short as possible
(main VSP)
116
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 117
TECHNICAL PART
EARTH CONNECTION
The equipotential bonding system is essential
Standards bodies use the generic term “earthing to maintain a low reference potential.
device” to designate both the concept of equipotential The VSP should be connected to this bonding
bonding system and that of an earth connection system for maximum effectiveness.
without distinguishing between them.
Contrary to received opinion, the value of the earth
connection, guaranteed at low frequency to ensure SENSITIVITY OF DEVICES
people’s safety, does not have a direct correlation
to effectiveness of the protection provided by VSP. The recipe for effective protection using a voltage
As demonstrated below, this type of protection can be surge protector should be based on the comparison
established even in the absence of an earth between the prospective value of the lightning
connection. strike dependng on the location and impulse
The impedance opposing the flow-to-earth current withstand of the equipment to be protected
shunted by the VSP can be broken down into two parts. (overvoltage withstand categories).
The first, the earth connection, is formed by the
conductors, which are usually wires and by the ground
Uimp (kV)
resistance. Its essentially inductive nature means that Overvoltage Equipment type and
its effectiveness decreases with the frequency in spite category characteristics Controlled Natural
situation(1) situation(2)
of the wiring precautions taken.
The second part of this impedance is less visible but Equipment installed upstream
essential at high frequency because it is in fact made of the switchboard: meter, gauge,
IV 6 4
fuse carrier and main circuit-
up of the stray capacity between the installation and breaker, etc
earth.
Equipment forming part
of the fixed installation: wiring
The value of the earth connection low accessories, circuit breakers,
frequency resistance must comply with local III socket outlets, trunking, junction 4 2.5
installation regulations. There must only be boxes, or permanently connected
one earth network. Distinct independent equipment for industrial use:
motors, furnaces, etc
circuits (computers, lightning conductor
downcomer) should be prohibited, but this
Everyday equipment designed
does not exclude multiple earth connections
II to be connected: household tools 2.5 1.5
(electrodes) if they are all interconnected. and appliances
Sensitive equipment with

Of course the relative values of each of these
reduced withstand incorporating
components vary according to the type and scale of the I electronic circuits. 1.5 0.8
installation, the location of the VSP (main or proximity Proximity or integrated protection
type) and according to the earth connection scheme may be desirable
(neutral earthing system) but it is demonstrated that (1) Installations where transient overvoltages are reduced
the voltage surge protector’s share of the discharge (> Uimp)(by protection on the line itself or at the installation source
current can reach 60 to 90% on the equipotential (eg: protected overhead network).
system whereas the part directly discharged by the (2) Installations where the risk is naturally low and for which VSP
earth connection is around 10 to 50%. is not usually considered necessary (eg: network entirely underground).
117
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 118

(continued)
RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS (continued)

CONNECTION LENGTH RECOMMENDED CROSS-SECTIONS
In practice we recommend that the total length FOR CONDUCTORS LINKING VOLTAGE
of the VSP circuit does not exceed 50 cm. SURGE PROTECTORS
This requirement is not always easy to
implement, but using the available earths
nearby may help to satisfy it. Cross-section
Capacity Iimp (mm2)
Standard (S) 6
Class 2
Increased (I) 10
High (H) 10 kA 16
Class 1
Lightning arrestor >12.5 kA 16
The 0.5 m rule

In theory, when lightning strikes, the voltage Ut applied to the receiver is the
UI1
same as the protection voltage Up of the VSP (for its In) but in practice the
latter is higher. In effect, the voltage dips caused by the connection
Ud
conductor impedances of the VSP and its protection device are added to this:
Ut = UI1 + Ud + UI2 + Up + UI3 Lt Ut
UI2 receiver
By way of example, the voltage dip in 1 m of conductor travelled over by an
impulse current 10 kA for 10 μs will reach 1000 V Up
Δu = L x __
di
dt UI3
di: current variation 10,000 A
dt: time variation 10 μs
L: inductance of 1 m of conductor = 1 μs
Vaue Δu to be added to the voltage Up
The total length Lt must therefore be as short as possible; in practice we recommend not exceeding 0.5 m.
In the event of difficulty, it may be a good idea to use wide, flat conductors (insulated braids, flexible
insulated bars).
118
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 119
TECHNICAL PART
COORDINATING VSP This arrangement of several VSP requires them to
be coordinated so that each of them draws the
Installation of several VSP allows gradual peak energy in an optimum way and limits spreading of
limitng of the overvoltages generated by the the lightning strike through the installation as much
lightning. This cascade is essential when the as possible. The coordination of VSP is a complex
distance between the VSP and the equipment is too concept which needs to be the subject of specific
great, but also when the level of peak limiting on studies and tests. Minimum distances between VSP
the main VSP is insufficient, which is the case or the interpositioning of decoupling chokes are
whenever senstive equipment needs to be recommended by manufacturers.
protected. For highly sensitive equipment a third
level, known as proximity, is even necessary.
Coordination modules
Minimum distances between Legrand coordination
voltage surge protectors in one installation Coordination modules modules Cat.
Nos. 039 62/63 are used
Distance to coordinate two VSP
Upstream VSP Downstream VSP
(in metres) in the same switchboard
d<2m
Increased (I) 8 (up to 63 A), without
Lighting arrestor
Standard (S) 10 taking acount of the
Increased (I) 6
distances between them.
It is necessary to install
High (H) Standard (S) 8
1 module per live
Proximity (P) 10
conductor on the circuit
Standard (S) 4
Increased (I) to be protected.
Proximity (P) 6
Standard (S) Proximity (P) 2
Coordinating voltage surge protectors

Primary and seconday VSP must be coordinated so that the total energy
to be dissipated (E1 + E2) is shared between them according to their
flow-to-earth capacity.
Primary v.s.p. Secondary v.s.p.
The recommended distance d1 enables decoupling of the VSP, and thus
avoids too much of the energy passing directly into the secondary VSP,
E1 E2
which could destroy it.
This is a situation which in fact depends on the characteristics of each
of the VSP.
Up1 Up2 Two identical VSP (for example Up: 2 kV and Imax: 70 kA) can be
d1
installed without the distance d1 being necessary: the energy will be
split roughly equally between the two VSP. But two different VSP
(for example Up: 2 kV/Imax: 70 kA and Up: 1.2 kV/Imax: 15 kA) should
be separated by at least 10 m to avoid too much demand being placed
on the second VSP.
119
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 120

(continued)
RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS (continued)

PROTECTED LENGTHS The risk of resonance is linked to the installation
characteristics (conductors, equipotential bonding
The implementation of good VSP must absolutely systems) and the potential overvoltage increase is
take account of the length of the lines supplying linked to the value of the impulse current.
the receivers to be protected. The rules for recommended maximum lengths
In fact, above a certain length, the voltage applied therefore arise from a certain empiricism that can
to the receiver can, by means of a resonance be based on three key starting points:
phenomenon, well exceed the expected limiting - position of the VSP
voltage. - composition of the equipotential bonding system
- cross-section of conductors
Maximum line length between voltage surge protector and appliance to be protected
Voltage surge protector position at supply end of installation not at supply end of installation
large cables wiring large cables
Conductor cross-section wiring (domestic)
(industry) (domestic) (industry)
Composition PE conductor < 10 m 10 m < 10 m(1) 20 m(1)
of the
equipotential
bonding system meshed/equipotential 10 m 20 m 20 m(1) 30 m(1)
(1) protection recommended at the point of use if distance is greater
Start of resonance d
Above a certain length d, the circuit protected by the VSP

Ld
will start resonating when the inductance and Ud I
capacitance are equal: (Lw = - __

1 ).
Cw Uimp Uc C
The circuit impedance is then reduced to its resistance.
Despite the part absorbed by the VSP, the residual Urm
Lrm
lightning current I on the circuit is still impulse-based.
Its increase, due to resonance, will result in significant
increases in the Ud, Uc and Urm voltages. In these C: capacity representing the load
conditions, the voltage applied to the receiver can Ld: power supply line inductance
double. Lrm: equipotential bonding system inductance
120
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 121
COMMON MODE AND RESIDUAL CURRENT MODE
TECHNICAL PART
There are two lightning overvoltage modes: Phase/neutral protection in a TT system is justified
- common mode when the neutral on the distributor side is linked to
- residual current mode a connection with a low value (a few ohms whereas
Lightning overvoltages appear mainly in common the installation earth connection is several tens of
mode and usually at the supply end of the electrical ohms).
installation. The current return circuit then risks being made by
Overvoltages in residual current mode usually the installation neutral in preference to the earth.
appear in TT mode and primarily affect sensitive The residual current mode voltage U, between
equipment (electronic equipment, computers, etc). phase and neutral, can increase up to a value equal
to the sum of the residual voltages of each element
of the VSP, ie. double the level of protection in
common mode.
Common mode protection
between phase/neutral and earth
Distributor Installation
Ph
Id Metering U
L1 Imc
L2 L N
L3 Imc Application
N N
Us1 Us2
Imc
5 50
Transformer
A similar phenomenon may occur in a TN-S system

Residual current mode if both the N and PE conductors are separate or not
protection between phase and neutral properly equipotential. The current is then likely to
make use of the neutral conductor on its return
rather than the protective conductor and the
equipotential bonding system.
Id Imd
L L A theoretical optimum protection model, which
Usd Imd Application
N N applies to all neutral earthing systems, can be
defined, although in fact VSP nearly always combine
common mode protection and residual current
mode protection (except IT or TN-C models).
Transformer
121
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 122

(continued)
LOCATION OF THE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
For effective voltage surge Level of protection

protection, it may be necessary Equipment sensitivity
to combine a number of VSP: Standard High Very high
- main VSP ➀
- circuit VSP ➁
Very sensitive
(computers, electronic goods)
➀+➂ ➀+➂ ➀+➁+➂
- proximity VSP ➂
Sensitive
(household appliances)
➀ ➀+➁ ➀+➁+➂
Not very sensitive
(motor, heaters)
➀ ➀ ➀+➁
Supply end of installation Distribution level Application level

L1
L2
L3
N
Main Proximity
protection protection
Circuit
protection
The protection at the supply end Circuit protection (secondary) Proximity protection (final) performs final
(primary) of the installation is supplements the previous peak limiting on residual current mode
used to shunt the majority of the protection by coordination and overvoltages, which are the most
incident energy (common mode limits residual current mode dangerous for appliances. Although they
overvoltage carried by the power overvoltages arising from the are often integrated within VSP,
system) to the equipotential actual configuration of the the effectiveness of a common mode
bonding system and to earth installation protection (phase/earth and
neutral/earth) is usually limited at final
level by the length of the protective
conductors
All Legrand VSP

See page 240
122
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 123
PROTECTION UPSTREAM OF THE INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL PART
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
Electrical installations with voltage surge
protectors must be protected by disconnectors
Installation principles according to
against the effects of heat and short-circuits. the neutral earthing system
After each lightning strike has discharged, the
> VSP in TN system
leakage current increases slightly. Over time, the
variable resistor component ages and heats up. An
HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
internal disconnection device removes the voltage Transformer
surge protector from the circuit at the end of its life;
an LED or contact signals this disconnection status L1
L2
so that the module can be replaced. L3
Above a maximum flow-to-earth value, the voltage PEN N
PE
surge protector will be destroyed by short-
circuiting.
A protection device against short-circuits and
overloads should be installed in series upstream of
the voltage surge protector. Disconnectors will have > VSP in TT system
to comply with the discrimination values of the
upstream protection. HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
Transformer
L1
L2
L3
N
VSP and continuity of service I n
=
type S
Installing VSP should not harm continuity delayed
of service, which would be contrary to the PE

desired aim. They should therefore be
installed, especially at the supply end
of the domestic or similar installations
(TT earthing systems), in accordance with > VSP in IT system
an S type delayed residual current device.
One precaution which should not be HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
Transformer
forgotten is that for significant lightning
strikes (> 5 kA). L1
L2
L3
PE
Disconnectors suitable for Legrand VSP

See page 131
123
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 124

(continued)
SETUP (continued)
The outline diagram on the facing page represents the
general architecture of an installation, its physical Contrary to received opinion, it is not essential
levels between the power supply and the application to link the VSP to the main earth terminal
and also the various links to the protective conductors, when it is too far away. Connection to the
the exposed conductive parts and the earth. nearest, most accessible equipotential link is
The number of distribution levels has been limited to 3. more effective if the 0.5 m rule is adhered to.
In practice a larger number can be observed. The minimum recommended cross-section for
Remember that this architecture does not differ the connection conductors takes account of the
fundamentally between a very high power installation maximum discharge current value and the
(industry) and a low power installation (domestic). It is characteristics of the end of life protection
simply the scale and the number of distribution levels device (DX circuit breakers).
which differ. In domestic installations for example, It is pointless to increase this cross-section to
the installation is reduced to a single level. compensate for a connection distance which is
The level called connection designates both HV and LV too great. At high frequency, the increase in
connection but in fact it is only a question of a legal the conductor impedance is directly linked to
property limit which does not alter the basic electrical their length.
diagram. However, the risk of lightning on the LV link
between the transformer and the main distribution
level could be very different by reason of its nature:
Depending on the activity (EMC sensitivity), the quality
- conductors several hundred metres in length,
or age of the installation; the local equipotential links
sometimes overhead, for public distribution
(solid green line on the diagram) between each
- short conductors, usually protected by buildings,
distribution board and the surrounding local
in industry or large-scale service industry.
conductive parts are more or less in place.
But although they may be systematically established at
Operating circuits (terminals, proximity tables, main distribution level, this is more rarely the case at
direct applications) can be supplied directly final distribution level.
from the main LV distribution board. These These intentional links are often supplemented by
circuits and their devices are therefore subject unintentional links:
to more restrictive conditions (Ik, Uimp) than - simple contact of devices with the ground (by their
they would be at final distribution level. They fixings, by their physical situation on the machine
must therefore be appropriately protected. frame for example)
- shielding of data conductors (computing)
- exposed conductive part (0 potential) of electronic
equipment.
In practice the entry points for overvoltages and
This diagram (facing page) reveals the multiplicity of
feedback from earth are innumerable, especially when
links with earth and therefore, unfortunately, feedback
installations are spread over a wide area. In some
points due to lightning strikes (EMC, equipotentiality in
cases, lightning conductors can protect buildings
the switchboards, circuits for protecting people against
which are located electrically on a secondary
indirect contacts).
distribution level. The overvoltage that they create at
local ground level would also be more likely to spread
to the final circuits.
124
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 125
Outline diagram of an equipotential bonding system
TECHNICAL PART
➀
➅
➆
Example of arrangement of voltage surge protectors used on a large-scale industrial or commercial installation
Number in Type of VSP
the diagram With lightning conductor Without lightning conductor
➀ Possible surge arrester (IT system) installed in the transformer station
Class 2 high capacity VSP(1) (H)
➁ VSP accompanying a Class 1 lightning conductor
or Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I)
Class 1 VSP (if lightning conductor on separate building
Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I) or Class 2
➂ powered by a secondary level or distribution)
or Class 1/Class 2 high capacity VSP (H) standard capacity VSP(1) (S)
➃ Class 2 increased capacity VSP (I) Class 2 standard capacity VSP(1) (S)
➄ Class 2 standard capacity VSP (S) Class 2 standard capacity VSP(2) (S)
➅ Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P) Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P)
➆ VSP(2) incorporated in the receiver VSP(2) incorporated in the receiver
(1) The types of VSP should be chosen according to the exposure conditions, the nature of the circuits and the installation passive protection
(2) Depending on the sensitivity of receivers
125
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 126

(continued)
PRACTICAL EXAMPLES OF MOUNTING
Main installation VSP: Elements of the chassis,

the support rail, uprights and steel rails of
equipotential because XL3 enclosures have
of how it is mounted, can conductivity which
be used for the shortest ensures the equipotential
VSP connection continuity required for
connection of the VSP
terminal block, in this
example a 70 kA high
capacity model
Increased capacity VSP

(40 kA), at the supply end
of an industrial control
system enclosure:
the solid mounting plate
(galvanised steel)
provides the equipotential
bonding and connection
to earth
The use of exposed conductive parts for equipotential bonding purposes for VSP must of course be
accompanied by precautions for construction and setup.
The continuity of the enclosure conductive parts means that they can be used as PE conductors but also for
connecting the VSP. It should also be noted than in addition to being easily accessible and allowing the 0.5 m
rule to be adhered to, the conductive parts of XL3 enclosures have a much lower high-frequency impedance
(typical inductance < 0.01 μH/m) than that of a conductor.
Exposed conductive parts on other enclosures than XL3 or rails, especially in aluminium, should not be used
for connnecting voltage surge protectors without checking first that they are suitable. In case of doubt, it is
then preferable to keep a wire conductor for linking the protective conductors to the terminal block or
collector.
126
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 127
PROTECTION OF TELEPHONE LINES
TECHNICAL PART
When VSP are installed on the low voltage network, it is advisable to add VSP on the telecommunications
network.
If electrical installations are referenced to an equipotential bonding system

which is itself connected to a local earth, the telephone installations are
usually referenced to a “distant earth” whose potential is not influenced by
that of the “electrical earth”.
During a lightning strike, an overvoltage will appear between the
installation conductive parts and the telephone line, creating danger for any
telephone user. The risk exists, by the way, irrespective of which network is
hit by lightning, telephone or power.
Legrand VSP Cat. No. 038 28 for
The solution therefore consists in extreme cases of galvanically separating
the telephone network (special translators) or more simply installing analogue lines and Cat. No. 038 29
special VSP whose earth terminal should be properly connected to the for digital lines are ideal for use
installation equipotential bonding system. in telephone applications
Distant earth
127
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 128

(continued)
INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS

Legrand telephone VSP are installed in series.
Installation principles
> Analogue > Digital
Cat. No. 038 28

Cat. No. 038 29
Room Digital
Sitting room telephone
DTI Distributor Cat. No. 038 29
Hall or fax
DNT
Kitchen
110 V
etc Visio-
Cat. No. 038 29
conference
Cat. No. 038 29
> Analogue or digital

Cat. No. 038 28
DNT Analogue line

Cat. No. 038 83 Analogue
110 V telephone
Digital line
or fax
DNT
110 V
Digital
Cat. No. 038 29 visio-
conference
Cat. No. 038 29
128
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 129
SOME LOCAL INSTALLATION REGULATIONS
TECHNICAL PART
In Europe and throughout the world (1), VSP are widely recommended by all the national bodies
and electricity suppliers. The familiar local standards and guides to installation are:
Recommended values
at the source of the installation
Level of requirement Overhead-
Country Guide Lightning conductor(2)
of national regulations underground
present on the
links without
building
lightning conductor
NF C 15-100
Class 1 Class 2
Lightning conductor for all zones
France UTE C 15-443 Iimp > 12.5 kA In > 5 kA
Overhead lines or overhead-
Up < 2.5 kV Up < 2.5 kV
underground lines in AQ2 Zone
Class 1 Class 2
Iimp > 10 kA In > 10 kA
Italy CEI 81-8 No national obligations in 2005 Up according to Up according to
the equipment the equipment
to be protected to be protected
Class 1
VSP compulsory if risks to: Class 2
Recommended, but not
human or animal life, public Compulsory no min.
BT-23 compulsory, no min.
Spain equipment, economic, agricultural value required in 2005.
(Table A and B) value required.
or industrial activities Consult the
Consult the
Recommended in AQ2 zones manufacturers
manufacturers
DIN V VDE V 100

Germany
DIN V VDE V 0185
IEC 60364-4-44 Class 1 Class 2

Other countries
IEC 60364-5-53 Iimp > 12.5 kA In > 5 kA
(1) Refer to pages 108-110

(2) Telecommunication VSP recommended
129
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 130

(continued)
CHARACTERISTICS OF LEGRAND VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS

VSP FOR POWER LINES
Lightning High Standard

Increased capacity (I)
arrestor capacity (H) capacity (S)
Cat. No. 039 10 039 20/21/22/23 039 30/31/33 039 35/36/38 039 40/41/43
Mains supply 230/400 V 110/230/400 V 110/230 V
Neutral earthing system TT, TN, IT TT, TN
Max. steady state voltage (Uc) 440 V 320 V
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Class 1 1/2
I max wave 8/20 μs 70 kA 40 kA 15 kA
wave 10/350 μs 12.5 kA 10 kA
Level of
1.8 kV - 20 kA 2 kV - 20 kA 1.8 kV - 15 kA 1.4 kV - 15 kA
protection Common mode
1.3 kV - 5 kA 1.5 kV - 5 kA 1.3 kV - 5 kA 1.2 kV - 5 kA
Up - In
Withstand to temporary
440 V 400 V
overvoltages Ut
260 V 20 kA
Ik at Uc 320 V 4 kA
(C20-C40)
440 V 4 kA
Leakage current at Uc (Ic) < 1 mA
Follower current (Is) Zero
Response time 25 ns
Max. Rigid conductor 25 mm2

terminal
capacity Flexible conductor
16 mm2
with cable end
Degree of protection IP 20 installation in an enclosure
Operating
-10°C to +40°C
temperature
Environment
Storage
-20°C to + 70°C
temperature
130
ex25027_116-131.qxd 28/12/05 17:58 Page 131
TECHNICAL PART
DISCONNECTORS FOR USE TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE
IN ASSOCIATION** PROTECTORS
TT* TN IT Analogue Digital
without
neutral 038 28 038 29
Standard capacity C 20 A Nominal voltage 170 V 48 V

5/15 kA class 2 C 20 A F 40 A gG
Uc = 320 V (14 x 51) Maximum discharge
10 kA
current (Imax)
C 20 A
Increased capacity F 125 A gG Protection level (UP) 300 V 100 V
15/40 kA class 2 C 20 A (22 x 58)
Uc = 320 V or Terminal capacity
C 40 A flexible/rigid 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
C 20 A C 20 A Degree of protection IP 20
Increased capacity F 125 A gG F 125 A gG
15/40 kA class 2 C 20 A (22 x 58) (22 x 58) Operating
- 10°C to + 40°C
Uc = 440 V or or temperature
C 40 A C 40 A
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 70°C
High capacity C 40 A C 40 A
20/70 kA class 1/2 C 40 A F 160 A gG F 160 A gG
Uc = 440 V (T00) (T00)
Lightning arrestor C 40 A C 40 A
12.5 kA class 1 C 40 A F 160 A gG F 160 A gG
Uc = 440 V (T00) (T00)
* Cartridge fuses prohibited

** DX, DX-H, DX-L depending on short circuit current in use
131
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 132
Isolation
Designed to separate an
installation or part of an
installation electrically,
the purpose of isolation is
to ensure the safety of people
working on the installation

on page 202
132
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 133
ISOLATION
TECHNICAL PART
A switching device providing the isolation function ensures a minimum contact opening distance of:
must be installed: - 4 mm for 230/400 V voltage
- at the source of any installation - 8 mm for 400/690 V voltage
- at the source of each circuit or group of circuits - 11 mm for 1000 V voltage
The isolator must break all the live conductors
(including the neutral). In contrast, the PE and For double break devices the distances should be
PEN conductors must not be broken. multiplied by 1.25.
The devices which perform isolation may be
isolators, isolating switches, circuit-breakers,
socket outlets, fuse carriers, isolating blades,
disconnect terminals or any other device which
Isolation does not on its own ensure that the installation is made safe. Appropriate methods should be
employed to prevent any unwanted re-energizing (padlocking, signs, locked rooms, earthing) and put the
installation out of use.
Isolation with positive contact indication Isolation with visible contact indication
This characteristic is checked by reliable interlocking The actual position of the separate contacts is
between the position of the contacts and that of the directly visible. Visible contact indication can be
control switch handle. The indication “I” or “O” (red obtained by means of a display window (Vistop,
or green) on the handle thus guarantees the actual DPX-IS) or by using plug-in or draw-in devices
contact position. (DPX, DMX-E).
Legrand solutions
DPX-IS 250
Full load switch unit:

DPX-IS 630 used for emergency breaking Draw-out DPX 630
and isolation
133
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 134
Isolation
CONNECTING VISTOP UNITS

Cross-section
(mm2)
12 70 50
Direct in
cage terminal
048 67 6 x 35 6 x 25
63 - 100 - 125 - 160 A
Distribution
terminal
for rail fixing
VISTOP
227 78/79 30 150-10 195-10 150-12 195-10

Plate
connection box
227 80/81 18 185 150

Cage
connection box
160
20 95-10 195-10 95-12 195-10

Direct on
plate
134
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 135
CONNECTING DPX-IS UNITS
TECHNICAL PART
Cross-section
(mm2)
32 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10

Direct on
plate
25 300 240
262 60
DPX-IS
Cage terminal
250
50 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-12

262 48/49
Spreaders
32 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-16
263 50/51
Rear terminals with screws
50 300 - 14 300 - 16
Direct
DPX-IS
on plate
630
2 x 240 2 x 185 300 - 16

262 69
Terminal for
2 conductors
80 4 x 300 - 14 4 x 300 - 16 4 x 300 - 14

262 73/74
Spreaders
DPX-IS
1600
50 4 x 300 - 14 4 x 300 - 16 4 x 300 - 14
263 80/82
Rear terminals
50 300 - 14 300 - 16
Direct
on plate
135
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 136
Distribution
Protection and switching

of operating circuits are
the basic functions
of a distribution panel.
But upstream there is another
function, possibly more
discreet, but just as essential:
distribution.

on page 242
136
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 137
The selection and setup of distribution equipment Depending on the intensity used, distribution is
call for an approach combining product selection achieved by distribution blocks (up to 400 A)
TECHNICAL PART
(number of outputs, conductor types and and sets of busbars (usually above 250 A).
cross-sections, connection method) and checking
operating conditions (permissible current,
short-circuit level, isolation, etc) in multiple
configurations.
Distribution can be defined as the supply of a number of physically separate

and individually protected circuits from a single circuit
Upstream
protection device
Distribution
Downstream
protection devices
I1 I2 I3 I4
137
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 138
Distribution
BUSBARS
DETERMINING THE CONDUCTOR Current according to standard IEC 60947-1

CROSS-SECTION
Ie: rated operating current to be taken into
The required cross-section of the bars is
consideration in enclosures with natural
determined according to the operating current,
ventilation or in panels which have protection
the IP protection class of the enclosure and after
class IP < 30.
checking the short-circuit thermal stress.
Ithe: thermal current in enclosure
The currents are named according to the
corresponding to the most severe installation
definitions in standard IEC 60947-1 applied to the
conditions. Weatherproof enclosures do not
usual operating conditions for a temperature rise
allow natural renewal of the air.
Δt of the bars which does not exceed 65 °C.
The IP protection class is > 30.
Parallel bars
The permissible current in n bars is less than n times the permissible current in one bar.
By way of example, use n = 1.6 to 1.8 for a group of 2 bars, n = 2.2 to 2.4 for 3 bars and n = 2.7 to 2.9 for 4 bars.
The wider the bars, the more this coefficient is affected, the more difficult they are to cool and the higher the
mutual inductance effects. The permissible current density is not therefore constant: it is approximately 3 A/mm2
for small bars and drops to 1 A/mm2 for groups of large bars.
Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 15/21, Cat. Nos. 373 20/22 and Cat. Nos. 374 14/53
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting

le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Cat. No. Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s) Icw1s (A)
110 80 373 88 12 x 2 1,2 x 107 3430
160 125 373 89 12 x 4 4,7 x 107 6865
200 160 374 33 15 x 4 7,4 x 107 8580
250 200 374 34 18 x 4 1 x 108 10295
280 250 374 38 25 x 4 2,1 x 108 14300
330 270 374 18 25 x 5 3,2 x 108 17875
450 400 374 19 32 x 5 5,2 x 108 22900
700 630 374 40 50 x 5 1,1 x 109 33750
1150 1000 374 40 2 x (50 x 5) 4,5 x 109 67500
800 700 374 41 63 x 5 1,8 x 109 42500
1350 1150 374 41 2 x (63 x 5) 7,2 x 109 85000
950 850 374 59 75 x 5 2,5 x 109 50600
1500 1300 374 59 2 x (75 x 5) 1 x 1010 101000
1000 900 374 43 80 x 5 2,9 x 109 54000
1650 1450 374 43 2 x (80 x 5) 1,2 x 1010 108000
1200 1050 374 46 100 x5 4,5 x 109 67500
1900 1600 374 46 2 x (100 x 5) 1,8 x 1010 135000
138
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 139
Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54
TECHNICAL PART
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting
le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s) le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s)
700 630 1 50 x 5 1.14 x 109 950 850 1 50 x 10 4.56 x 109
1180 1020 2 50 x 5 4.56 x 109 1680 1470 2 50 x 10 1.82 x 1010
1600 1380 3 50 x 5 1.03 x 1010 2300 2030 3 50 x 10 4.10 x 1010
2020 1720 4 50 x 5 1.82 x 1010 1150 1020 1 60 x 10 6.56 x 109
800 700 1 63 x 5 1.81 x 109 2030 1750 2 60 x 10 2.62 x 1010
1380 1180 2 63 x 5 7.23 x 109 2800 2400 3 60 x 10 5.90 x 1010
1900 1600 3 63 x 5 1.63 x 1010 1460 1270 1 80 x 10 1.17 x 1010
2350 1950 4 63 x 5 2.89 x 1010
2500 2150 2 80 x 10 4.67 x 1010
950 850 1 75 x 5 2.56 x 109
3450 2900 3 80 x 10 1.05 x 1011
1600 1400 2 75 x 5 1.03 x 1010
1750 1500 1 100 x 10 1.82 x 1010
2200 1900 3 75 x 5 2.31 x 1010
3050 2550 2 100 x 10 7.29 x 1010
2700 2300 4 75 x 5 4.10 x 1011
4150 3500 3 100 x 10 1.64 x 1011
1000 900 1 80 x 5 2.92 x 109
2000 1750 1 120 x 10 2.62 x 1010
1700 1480 2 80 x 5 1.17 x 1010
3600 2920 2 120 x 10 1.05 x 1011
2350 2000 3 80 x 5 2.62 x 1010
2850 2400 4 80 x 5 4.67 x 1010 4800 4000 3 120 x 10 2.36 x 1011
1200 1050 1 100 x 5 4.56 x 109
2050 1800 2 100 x 5 1.82 x 1010
2900 2450 3 100 x 5 4.10 x 1010
3500 2900 4 100 x 5 7.29 x 1010
1450 1270 1 125 x 5 7.12 x 109
2500 2150 2 125 x 5 2.85 x 1010
3450 2900 3 125 x 5 6.41 x 1010
4150 3450 4 125 x 5 1.14 x 1011
1750 1500 1 160 x 5(1) 1.17 x 1010
3050 2450 2 160 x 5(1) 4.67 x 1010 Positioning of the groups of bars
4200 3300 3 160 x 5(1) 1.05 x 1011
5000 3800 4 160 x 5(1) 1.87 x 1011
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8 ,
to be supplied separately and cut to length
Bars mounted
edgewise
on vertical busbars
or horizontal on supports
Cat. No. 374 54 in horizontal position
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 are used to create very high current
busbars: up to 4000 A in an enclosure
139
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 140
Distribution (continued)
BUSBARS (continued)
Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting
le(A) IP 30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number per pole Dimensions (mm) le(A) IP 30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number per pole Dimensions (mm)
500 420 1 50 x 5 880 650 1 50 x 10
750 630 2 50 x 5 1250 1050 2 50 x 10
1000 900 3 50 x 5 2000 1600 3 50 x 10
1120 1000 4 50 x 5 1000 800 1 60 x 10
600 500 1 63 x 5 1600 1250 2 60 x 10
750 630 2 63 x 5 2250 1850 3 60 x 10
1100 1000 3 63 x 5 1150 950 1 80 x 10
1350 1200 4 63 x 5 1370 1650 2 80 x 10
700 600 1 75 x 5 2500 2000 3 80 x 10
1000 850 2 75 x 5 1350 1150 1 100 x 10
1250 1100 3 75 x 5 2000 1650 2 100 x 10
1600 1400 4 75 x 5 2900 2400 3 100 x 10
750 630 1 80 x 5
1650 1450 1 120 x 10
1050 900 2 80 x 5
1300 1150 3 80 x 5
1650 1450 4 80 x 5
850 700 1 100 x 5
1200 1050 2 100 x 5 Positioning of the groups of bars
1600 1400 3 100 x 5
1900 1650 4 100 x 5
1000 800 1 125 x 5 Bars mounted flatwise
1450 1250 2 125 x 5 in horizontal busbars on
1800 1600 3 125 x 5
2150 1950 4 125 x 5
supports Cat. No. 374 54
1150 900 1 160 x 5(1) in vertical position
1650 1450 2 160 x 5(1)
2000 1800 3 160 x 5(1)
2350 2150 4 160 x 5(1)
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8, to be supplied
separately and cut to length
Orientation of the bars

Positioning bars edgewise encourages heat
dissipation and is much the best option.
If the bars have to be positioned flatwise,
and therefore with the supports in a
vertical position, the permissible currents
must be reduced.
140
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 141
Supports Cat. No. 374 54
TECHNICAL PART
Simply rotate the isolating supports 1 to 4 bars, 5 mm thick, per pole 1 to 3 bars, 10 mm thick, per pole
to take 5 mm or 10 mm thick bars
It is also necessary to check that the permisible thermal stress per bar is higher than that limited by the protection
device.
DETERMINING THE DISTANCE Value of the peak current (Ipk)

BETWEEN THE SUPPORTS The limited peak current is determined from
The distance between the supports is determined the characteristics of the protection device.
according to the electrodynamic stress generated It represents the maximum (peak) value limited by
by the short-circuit. The forces exerted between this device. In the absence of a limiting protection
the bars during a short-circuit are proportional to device, the prospective peak value can be
the peak value of the short-circuit current. calculated from the prospective short-circuit
current and an asymmetry cœfficient.
Rms value of the prospective short-circuit
current (Ik)
Isc
This is the prospective maximum value
of the current which would circulate during a Prospective
short-circuit if there were no protection device. peak Isc
Prospective
It depends on the type and power of the supply. Isc
The actual short-circuit current will usually be Prospective
lower, given the impedance of the electrical rms Isc
trunking.
Limited
peak Isc
Limited Isc
141
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 142
BUSBARS (continued)
Limiting protection device Non-limiting protection device
The limiting curves for the protection devices (DX

and DPX) give the limited peak current according When the set of busbars is protected by a non-
to the prospective short-circuit current. limiting device, the maximum value of the peak
The non-limited peak Isc curve corresponds current is developed during the first half-period
to no protection. of the short-circuit.
Value of Peak Isc

Peak asymmetrical
Isc first peak
Isc
(kÂ)
e ak
dp
ite Rms
l im
N on value
Limitation
Limited curve of Isc
peak Isc
Time
Prospective Isc rms Isc (kA)
The table below gives the limited peak value (Ipk)

directly for the maximum prospective short-circuit
value equal to the breaking capacity (Icu) of the
device. For lower prospective short-circuit values, We then talk of an asymmetrical 1st peak.
read the curves to find an optimised value. The relationship between the peak value and the
rms value of the prospective short-circuit current
is defined by the asymmetry cœfficient n:
Device Rating (A) Max. peak Isc (kÂ) peak Isc (Ipk) = n x prospective rms Isc
DPX 125 16-25 11.9
DPX 125 40-63 15
DPX 125 100-125 17 Prospective rms Isc (kA) n
DPX 160 25 14.3
≤5 1.5
DPX 160 40 to 160 20
DPX 250 ER 100 to 250 22 5 ≤ 1 = 10 1.7
DPX 250 40 to 250 27
10 ≤ 1 = 20 2
DPX-H 250 40 to 250 34
DPX 630 250 to 630 34 20 ≤ 1 = 50 2.1
DPX-H 630 250 to 630 42 50 < 1 2.2
DPX 1600 630 to 1600 85
DPX-H 1600 630 to 1600 110
142
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 143
Practical determination of the distances between

the supports according to the peak current (Ipk) The distance D’ after the last support
TECHNICAL PART
The tables appearing below can be used must always be less than 30% of the distance D
to determine the maximum distances D (in mm)
between the supports, and thus create sets
of busbars, based on the required Ipk value.
The shorter this distance D between the supports,
the higher the permissible Isc.
With single pole supports, it is also possible

to vary the spacing between the bars E (in mm). D
The greater the spacing between the bars,
the higher the permissible Isc.
D'

E instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
143
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 144
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for single pole supports (E adjustable)
Supports 373 98 Supports 374 37 Supports 373 10
374 33 (15 x 4) or 374 34 (18 x 4)

Bars 373 88 (12 x 2) or 373 89 (12 x 4) 374 34 (18 x 4) 374 18 (25 x 5) 374 19 (32 x 5)
or 374 38 (25 x 4)
E (mm) 50 75 100 125 50 75 100 125 55 83 55 83 55 83
Peak Isc 10 400 600 800 350 600 750 500 600 650 700
(Ipk in kA) 15 300 450 600 800 250 400 500 700 300 400 500 600 500 600
20 250 350 450 600 150 225 300 375 250 300 350 400 400 500
25 200 250 300 400 125 150 200 250 200 250 300 350 350 400
30 100 125 150 175 150 200 250 300 300 350
35 100 125 150
40 125 150 200 250 250 300
50 100 125 150 200 200 250
60 100 125 150 150 200
70 100 125 100 150
80 100 100
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports (E fixed)
Supports Supports 373 15
373 96 374 32 374 36

374 33/34
Bars 373 88 373 89 (15 x 4) 374 38 374 34 374 18 374 19
(12 x 2) (12 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 200 400 550 650 1 000 1 200 1 500
(Ipk in kA) 15 150 300 400 500 700 1 000 1 200
20 125 200 300 400 550 750 950
25 100 150 200 350 400 600 750
30 150 200 350 500 650
35 100 150
40 100 250 350 450
50 200 300 400
60 200 250 300
70 150 200 250
80 150 200 250
144
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 145
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 53
TECHNICAL PART
(E fixed: 75 mm)
Supports 373 22 and 374 53
1 bar per pole 2 bars per pole

Bars 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46
(50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 1000 1200 1200 1200 1200
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 800 900 1000 1000 1200
20 650 700 750 750 900
25 500 600 600 600 700
30 400 500 550 550 600 700 800
35 350 450 450 450 550
40 300 350 400 400 450 550 600 650 650 700
45 300 300 350 350 400
50 250 250 300 300 350 450 500 500 500 550
60 200 250 250 250 300 350 400 400 400 450
70 150 200 250 250 250 250 350 350 350 400
80 100 150 200 200 200 250 300 300 300 300
90 100 150 200 200 200 200 250 300 300 300
100 100 150 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 250
110 100 100 150 150 150 200 150 200 200 200
120 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 200 200 200
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 56 and 374 14
(E fixed: 75 mm)
Supports 373 21 Supports 373 20
1 C-section bar per pole 1 flat bar per pole 1 flat bar per pole
Bars 374 60 374 61 374 62 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 42 374 34 374 18 374 19 374 40 374 41
155 mm2 265 mm2 440 mm2 (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (18 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 1100 1600 1600 1100 1200 1200 1200 800 800 900
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 800 1000 1300 800 900 1000 1000 400 600 600 700 800
20 600 800 1000 650 700 750 750 300 450 500 600 700
25 450 650 800 500 600 800 800 250 350 400 500 550
30 400 550 700 400 500 550 550 225 300 350 400 450
35 350 450 600 350 450 450 450 200 250 300 350 400
40 300 400 550 300 350 400 400 175 200 250 275 300
45 300 350 500 300 300 350 350 150 200 200 225 250
50 250 300 450 250 250 300 300 150 150 150 200 200
60 200 300 400 200 250 250 250 125 125 125 150 150
70 150 250 350 150 200 200 200 100 100 100 150 150
80 200 300 100 150 200 200 100 100
90 200 250 100 150 200 200
100 150 250 100 150 150 150
110 150 200 100 100 150 150
120 150 200 100 100 100 100
145
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 146
with 5 mm thick copper bars
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24

and 374 54
1 bar per pole 2 bars per pole
Bars 75 x 5 Bars 75 x 5
50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5
80 x 5 80 x 5
Peak Isc 10 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 1050 1200 1350 1550 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 15 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700
20 800 900 1000 1150 1350 20 1200 1350 1500 1700 1700
25 650 750 800 950 1100 25 950 1100 1200 1400 1550
30 550 600 700 800 900 30 800 900 1000 1150 1300
35 450 550 600 650 800 35 700 800 900 1000 1150
40 400 450 550 600 700 40 600 700 800 900 1000
45 350 400 450 550 600 45 550 600 700 800 900
50 350 350 450 500 550 50 500 550 650 700 800
60 300 300 350 400 450 60 400 450 550 600 700
70 250 250 300 350 400 70 350 400 450 500 650
80 250 250 300 350 80 300 350 400 450 550
90 250 250 300 90 300 300 350 400 500
100 250 300 100 250 300 300 350 500
110 250 250 110 250 250 300 350 450
120 250 120 250 250 300 450
130 250 130 250 300 400
140 140 250 250 400
150 150 250 350
160 160 250 350
170 170 350
180 180 300
3 bars per pole 4 bars per pole

Bars 75 x 5 Bars 75 x 5
50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5
80 x 5 80 x 5
Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 15 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
20 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700 20 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
25 1250 1450 1600 1700 1700 25 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700
30 1050 1200 1350 1550 1700 30 1300 1500 1700 1700 1700
35 900 1050 1150 1300 1500 35 1150 1250 1450 1650 1700
40 800 900 1050 1150 1300 40 1000 1100 1300 1450 1650
45 700 800 900 1050 1200 45 900 1000 1150 1300 1450
50 650 750 850 950 1050 50 800 900 1050 1150 1350
60 550 600 700 800 900 60 650 750 850 1000 1100
70 450 550 600 700 750 70 600 650 750 850 950
80 400 450 550 600 700 80 500 600 650 750 850
90 350 400 500 550 600 90 450 500 600 650 750
100 350 400 450 500 550 100 400 450 550 600 700
110 300 350 400 450 500 110 350 450 500 550 600
120 300 300 350 400 450 120 350 400 450 550 550
130 250 300 350 350 450 130 300 350 400 500 550
140 250 250 300 350 400 140 300 350 400 450 500
150 250 250 300 350 350 150 300 300 350 400 450
160 250 250 300 350 160 250 300 350 400 350
170 250 250 300 350 170 250 300 300 350 300
180 250 300 300 180 250 250 300 350 300
190 250 250 300 190 250 250 300 300 250
200 250 300 200 250 250 300 250
210 250 250 210 250 250 250 200
220 250 250 220 250 250 200
146
ex25027_132-147.qxd 28/12/05 17:59 Page 147
TECHNICAL PART
with 10 mm thick copper bars
Bars
1 bar per pole
80 x 10 100 x10 120 x 10
20 1700 1700 1700
Peak Isc
(Ipk in kÂ) 25 1600 1700 1700
30 1350 1550 1700
35 1150 1300 1450
40 1050 1150 1300
45 900 1050 1150
50 850 950 1050
60 700 800 850
70 600 700 750
80 550 600 650
90 500 550 600
100 450 500 550
110 400 450 500
120 350 400 450
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 130 350 350 400
140 300 350 400
and 374 54 150 300 350 350
160 250 300 350
170 250 300 300
180 250 300 300
190 250 250 300
200 200 250 300
210 200 250 250
220 250 250
230 200 250
240 200
250 200
2 bars per pole 3 bars per pole

Bars Bars
80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
Peak Isc 20 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 20 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 25 1700 1700 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 25 1700 1700 1700
30 1700 1700 1700 30 1700 1700 1700
35 1700 1700 1700 35 1700 1700 1700
40 1500 1700 1700 40 1700 1700 1700
45 1350 1550 1700 45 1700 1700 1700
50 1200 1400 1550 50 1600 1700 1700
60 1000 1150 1300 60 1350 1550 1700
70 900 1000 1100 70 1150 1300 1500
80 750 900 1000 80 1000 1150 1300
90 700 800 900 90 900 1050 1100
100 600 700 800 100 850 900 950
110 550 650 750 110 750 800 800
120 550 600 650 120 700 750 750
130 500 550 600 130 650 700 700
140 450 500 600 140 600 650 650
150 450 500 550 150 550 650 600
160 400 450 500 160 550 600 500
170 350 450 500 170 500 500 500
180 350 400 450 180 500 450 450
190 350 400 450 190 450 400 400
200 300 350 400 200 450 400 400
210 300 350 350 210 400 350 350
220 300 350 300 220 350 300 300
230 300 300 300 230 300 300 300
240 250 300 250 240 300 250 250
250 250 300 250 250 250 250 250
147
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 148
BUSBARS (continued)
CHECKING THE INSULATION

CHARACTERISTICS
Insulation voltage Ui Impulse withstand voltage Uimp
This must be the same as or higher than the This value characterises the permissible
maximum value of the rated operating voltage overvoltage level in the form of a voltage wave
for the assembly, or the reference voltage. representative of a lightning strike.
The latter depends on the mains supply voltage Its value (in kV) depends on the mains voltage,
and the structure of the supply (star, delta, with but also on where it is placed in the installation.
or without neutral). It is highest at the installation source.
Insulation characteristics for busbar supports (Degree of pollution 3)
Cat. No. 373 98 374 37 373 96 374 32 374 36 373 10 374 14 374 53 373 21 374 54
Ui (V) 500 500 690 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
All the recommendations relating to Legrand busbar supports are designed

insulation are defined by international and tested for the harshest operating
standard IEC 60664-1 “Insulation conditions corresponding to the highest
coordination in low-voltage systems overvoltage risks. The value Uimp
(networks)”. They are also found in characterises this safety requirement.
standards IEC 60439-1 and IEC 60947-1.
148
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 149
MAGNETIC EFFECTS ASSOCIATED WITH BUSBARS
TECHNICAL PART
The magnetic effects associated with busbars can - 50 cm for devices with limited sensitivity
be separated into transient effects, which are the (secondary MCBs, including RCDs, relays,
short-circuit electrodynamic forces, and contactors, transformers, etc)
permanent effects created by induction due - 1 m for sensitive devices (electronics and digital
to circulation of high currents. The effects metering equipment, systems with a bus, remote
of induction have several consequences. controls, electronic switches, etc)
- Devices which are very sensitive to magnetic
• Increased impedance in the conductors due fields (analogue gauge, meters, oscillographs,
to the effects of mutual inductance cathode ray tubes, etc) may require greater
separation distances.
Supports on aluminium crosspieces to

• Temperature rise linked to magnetic saturation prevent the formation of a magnetic field.
of materials in the field around the conductors
• Possible interference in sensitive devices for

which minimum recommended cohabitation
distances must be observed.
Non-magnetic stainless steel screws

have the same function on supports
Cat. No. 374 54.
If very high power busbars are being used and

there are no manufacturer instructions, the
minimum distances should be increased to:
- 30 cm for devices with very little sensitivity
(fuses, non residual current devices, connections,
MCCBs, etc)
149
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 150
THE XL-PART SYSTEM
Capable of supplying and

distributing power up to 1600 A,
XL-Part column chassis and active backplate
XL-Part concentrates functions, XL-Part C-section columns are used to distribute
the current directly to the DPX support bases:
multiplies innovations and is
this solution divides the connection points by two
undoubtedly the most
and optimises the use of space in the enclosure.
homogenous solution for
distributing power in industry
and commercial situations.
A simple yet effective solution Power supply unit
which optimises the quality Direct or indirect, from the top or the bottom…
and speed of installation. with the XL-Part column chassis, the power supply
can be used in any configuration
for connecting conductors.
Support bases for DPX

The new XL-Part bases are used both to
distribute current and fix MCCBs.
With plug-in and draw-out versions,
connection of the outputs (or inputs)
is made by the base itself.
Row distribution blocks 400 and 250 A

Fully complementary to C-section columns,
XL-Part row distribution blocks are used
to supply and distribute power up to 400 A,
with bases designed to take and associate
DPX, DX and Lexic wiring accessories.
150
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 151
N L1
L2 L
3
TECHNICAL PART
L3
L2
L1
N
151
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 152
DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS
The distribution block is a prefabricated device. Permissible short-circuit value

It is therefore sized to suit its rated current and, • The value Icw characterises the conventional
unlike sets of busbars, does not require permissible current for 1 s from the point of view
manufacturing definitions. of thermal stress.
In contrast, the diversity of distribution blocks • The value Ipk characterises the maximum
according to their capacity, their connection mode permissible peak current for the distribution
and their installation calls for careful selection block.
while adhering to precise standards-based rules. This value must be higher than that limited by the
Phase balancing is also done at distribution level. upstream protection device for the prospective
The Legrand range of distribution blocks, both vast short-circuit.
and diverse, can satisfy any requirement.
CHARACTERISTICS OF Legrand distribution blocks are designed to

DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS have resistance to thermal stress at least as
With universality as their watchword, distribution high as that of the conductor on the cross-
blocks are suitable for all types of application. section corresponding to the nominal
current, which means that no other checks
Rated current are usually necessary.
Often called nominal current (In), this should be
chosen according to the current of the upstream
device or the power supply conductor cross- Insulation value
section. As a general rule, use a distribution
Legrand distribution blocks are designed and
block with the same current as or immediately
tested for the harshest operating conditions
above that of the main device (It), ensuring that
corresponding to the highest overvoltage risks.
the sum of the distributed circuit currents is not
The value Uimp characterises this safety
higher than the nominal current (In)
requirement.
of the distribution block.
It Insulation values for Legrand distribution blocks
Term.
blocks Lexiclic Modular Extra-plats
Type distribution distribution Stepped distribution blocks
40/100 A
IP 2 x blocks blocks
048 79/80/ 374 42
048 70/ 374 30/31 370 08
Cat. No. 048 XX 81/82/83/84/ 374 47 374 00 spacing
74/75 374 35
85/86/88 50 mm 75 mm
Ui (V) 400 660 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1500 1000
I1 I2 I3 I4
Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 12 12 8 12 12
or
152
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 153
TECHNICAL PART
Connection method The various distribution blocks
Direct connection
It is the actual installation and previously
The conductors are directly connected in the described characteristics: rated current, withstand
terminals without any special preparation. to short-circuits, insulation values, number and
Use of a ferrule (such as StarfixTM) is capacities of outputs, connection method, that
recommended for the flexible conductors allow you to determine the most suitable choice
connected in butt terminals and for external of distribution block.
flexible cables which may be subject to pulling.
Connection via terminals

Type of connection normally used for conductors
with a large cross-section.
It is characterised by excellent mechanical
withstand, excellent electrical reliability and its
ease of connection/disconnection.
Possible installations for distribution blocks
Distribution Upstream Upstream

block Upstream device device
Distribution
device block
Distribution
Distribution Downstream Distribution block
Device block device block
Downstream
device
Distribution Downstream
block device
At the supply end or Directly on the Directly on the Independently Directly on the output
on the panel output output of an input of of the upstream and of the upstream device
for connecting upstream device downstream downstream devices and on the input
incoming or outgoing (output terminal) devices (supply with the need to of downstream devices,
conductors busbar, Lexiclic) connect the input with no wiring
(connection box) and outputs and incorporating
the actual device fixing
mechanisms. It is the
most successful concept:
XL-Part
153
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 154
DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (continued)
Lexic supply busbars XL-Part row distribution blocks

1, 2, 3 or 4-pole supply busbars are used, by direct Active supports used for supplying and distributing
connection, to supply power to Lexic modular power in rows up to 400 A.
devices up to 90 A.
They represent a flexible solution, which takes up
very little space and can be adapted to provide
distribution in rows.
Possibility of direct and

indirect power supply
Possibility of adding supply
busbars on top of or
underneath Lexic devices
Distribution terminals
to suit all local customs
These single pole distribution blocks are fixed
directly in the output terminals of devices DPX
Independent distribution terminal blocks 125, 160, 250 ER, 250, DPX-IS 250 and modular
Vistop from 63 to 160 A.
Totally universal in their application, this type of They are used for direct, simplified distribution
terminal block can be used to distribute up to 100 A for panels where the number of main circuits is
on between 4 and 33 outputs depending on the limited.
catalogue number. The incoming cross-section is
between 4 and 25 mm2, and that of the outputs
between 4 and 16 mm2. These terminal blocks are
fixed on a flat 12 x 2 bar or on a 3 rail.
6 outputs 35 mm2 rigid

(25 mm2 flexible)
for the output terminal
Cat. No. 048 67
By associating IP 2x terminal blocks with a support Cat. No. 048 10,

you can create a 2P, 3P or 4P distribution block
154
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 155
TECHNICAL PART
Modular distribution blocks Stepped distribution blocks
These combine compactness and high connection These exist in a catalogue version, complete and
capacity. They are fixed by clipping onto fully-assembled from 125 to 400 A and in their
TH 35-15 rails. Legrand modular distribution modular version (bars and supports to be ordered
blocks are totally isolated: they are used separately) can be used to create customised
at the supply end of the panel up to 250 A or distribution.
in subgroups of outputs in panels with a higher
power rating.
Distribution block 250 A

(Cat. No. 374 35)
Modular distribution block 160 A 2-pole distribution
Cat. No. 048 87 total isolation block equipped with
of each pole an additional terminal Connection boxes
block Designed to form the interface
between the large cross-section
conductors coming into the panel,
Extra-flat distribution blocks including some in aluminium,
and the internal wiring conductors.
Their shorter dimensions and their permissible
Two models
currents means that the same panel can manage
- 120 mm2/70 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 80)
the power requirements for the supply end (up to
- 300 mm2/185 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 81)
250 A) combined with the compactness of
are available.
modular rows in slim panels.
They can also be used for operating
circuits (outputs) in aluminium or
when the line lengths make large
cross-sections compulsory.
Power, capacity to connect

to cables with large
cross-sections and
compactness are the key
benefits of extra-flat
distribution blocks
155
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 156
3
XL
enclosures
More than just an extensive offer,

XL3 (new system of wall-mounting,
floor-standing enclosures and
distribution equipment), brings
you freedom to create your
assemblies: choose your
distribution equipment,
the finish and how you work.

on page 250
156
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 157
THE XL3 RANGE
TECHNICAL PART
This range offers you total freedom when choosing your solutions.
It consists of “ready to use” wall-mounting and floor-standing
extendable enclosures.
XL3 160 enclosures

XL3 160 enclosures are delivered “ready to use”.
They enable any configuration to be created, with or without
a connection panel. They are easy to connect and are ideal for
all installations (surface mounting and flush mounting solutions).
XL3 160 enclosures, capacity 24 modules, are available
in 3 versions:
› metal
› class II insulated
› flush mounting
XL3 400 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures

These are fully extendable. They provide strong housing
for distribution assemblies, and their ingenious innovations
(functional uprights, 2-position rails) make them easy to install.
XL3 400 enclosures have capacity for 24 modules and are supplied
with side panels, roof, base, and functional uprights, etc
Wall-mounting enclosures are available in 3 versions:
› metal
› class II insulated
› IP 55 metal
Floor-standing enclosures are supplied with a plinth and are available in:
› metal IP 43 and IP 55
XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures

The XL3 800 range provides extendable modular solutions up
to 800 A. It provides strong housing for distribution assemblies.
The modular solution enables partial doors to be fitted.
XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures have:
› capacity for 24 or 36 modules per row
› heights 1050 to 1950 mm which take or are associated
with cable sleeves.
157
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 158
XL3
enclosures
FREEDOM TO DISTRIBUTE HOW YOU WISH FREEDOM TO CHOOSE THE FINISH
The new XL3 range allows you to choose the type Faceplates
of distribution you want: 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle for XL3 160 to
800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures.
“Standard” distribution
This is made up of:
- busbar supports
- distribution blocks
- terminal blocks
- supply busbars
Screw-mounting and hinged faceplates for XL3

XL-Part “optimised” distribution enclosures.
These are made up of:
- a column chassis Doors
- active backplates
Flat doors:
- row distribution blocks
- automatic distribution
All metal Glass
using supply busbars
Curved doors:
All metal Glass
158
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 159
FREEDOM TO CHOOSE HOW YOU WORK Legrand advantages
TECHNICAL PART
The XL3 range is perfectly integrated
The new XL3 range allows you complete freedom
in putting the equipment together, due to its total
1 in the XL PRO2 design software
accessibility.
Choice of solutions up to 800 A:
Removable side panels/draw-out chassis. 2 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures,
distribution, finish
3 The freedom to organise your own assemblies

Other electronic protection units
on request
159
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 160
XL3 160
enclosures
CHARACTERISTICS
XL3 160 enclosures have been Insulated Metal Flush

designed to simplify wiring and enclosure enclosure mounting
connection. They are all equipped class II O class I enclosure
with a removable chassis and Short-circuit resistance Ipk 20 kÂ 35 kÂ
also offer original solutions for without door IP 30
holding and running the wiring, Protection
a large working space and with door IP 40
index
a high-quality finish. with door and seal IP 43
They can take devices up Conformity with standards IEC 60439-1 and 60439-3
to 160 A.
Fireproof according to IEC 60695-2-1 750°C/5 s
They are supplied complete
with rails, faceplates, and a brass Colour RAL 7035
bar for protective conductors.
XL3 160 insulated enclosure:

- side panels can be removed separately
- frame can be dismantled
- removable chassis
160
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 161
CLASS II INSULATED ENCLOSURES
TECHNICAL PART
Enclosure with dedicated
“Fully modular” enclosures space for DPX 160
1050
900
External
height 750
(mm) 600
450
Cat. No. 200 52 200 53 200 54 200 55 200 56 200 95 200 96
Modular capacity 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 3 rows 4 rows

Modules 48 72 96 120 144 72 96
solid 202 52 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 55 202 56

Curved
door
glass 202 62 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 65 202 66
solid 202 72 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 75 202 76

Flat
door
glass 202 82 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 85 202 86
Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
161
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 162
XL3 160
enclosures (continued)
METAL ENCLOSURES
1050
900
External
height 750
(mm) 600
450
Cat. No. 200 02 200 03 200 04 200 05 200 06
Modular capacity 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows

Modules 48 72 96 120 144
202 52 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56

solid
Curved
door
glass 202 62 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66
202 72 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76

solid
Flat
door
glass 202 82 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86
Metal enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
162
ex25027_148-163.qxd 28/12/05 18:01 Page 163
FLUSH MOUNTING ENCLOSURES
TECHNICAL PART
Enclosure with dedicated
“Fully modular” enclosures
space for DPX 160
1050
External 900
height 750
(mm) 600
Cat. No. 200 13 200 14 200 15 200 16 200 25 200 26
Modular capacity 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 3 rows 4 rows

Modules 72 96 120 144 72 96
solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 75 202 76

Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 85 202 86
Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
163
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 164
XL3 400
enclosures
CHARACTERISTICS
XL3 400 can be used to create customised

enclosures for all your environments.
- IP 30 to IP 55
- IK 04 to IK 08
- Class I and class II
- Fire resistance: 750°C/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for installation
in public buildings
- Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s
- 24 modules per row
- Take devices up to 400 A
- Choice of distribution: standard or optimised
(XL-Part 250 active backplate, row distribution block
250 A, etc)
- Joinable (left and/or right) and extendable cable
sleeves: Lexic, DPX and distribution devices
- Colour: RAL 7035
- Conform to IEC 60439-1
164
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 165
IP 30-40-43 METAL WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING
TECHNICAL PART
Depth: 175 mm - External width: 575 mm
Floor-standing
Wall-mounting enclosures enclosures
1900
1600
1500
External 1200
height 1050
(mm) 900
750
600
Cat. No. 201 03 201 04 201 05 201 06 201 07 201 08 201 18 201 19
Height with 550 700 850 1 000 1 150 1 450 1 450 1 750
faceplate (mm)
solid 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 57 202 58 202 58 202 59

Curved
door
glass 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 67 202 68 202 68 202 69
solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 77 202 78 202 78 202 79

Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 87 202 88 202 88 202 89
201 23 201 24 201 25 201 26 201 27 201 28 201 38 201 39

Cable sleeve
Solid door 201 63 201 64 201 65 201 66 201 67 201 68 201 68 201 69
for cable
sleeve
165
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 166
XL3 400
IP 30-40-43 INSULATED ENCLOSURES

1200
1050
External
height 900
(mm) 750
600
Cat. No. 201 53 201 54 201 55 201 56 201 57

Height with 550 700 850 1 000 1 150
faceplate
(mm)
solid 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 57
Curved
door
glass 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 67
solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 77

Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 87
201 73 201 74 201 75 201 76 201 77

Cable sleeve
Solid door
for cable 201 63 201 64 201 65 201 66 201 67
sleeve
166
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 167
ONE-PIECE IP 55 ENCLOSURES
TECHNICAL PART
1115
External 915
height 715
(mm)
515
Cat. No. 201 82 201 83 201 84 201 85

Height with 400 600 800 1000
faceplate (mm)
Metal floor-standing enclosure Metal wall-mounting

and cable sleeve enclosure
167
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 168
XL3 800
enclosures
CHARACTERISTICS
XL3 800 can be used to create customised

enclosures for all your environments.
- IP 30 to IP 55
- IK 07 to IK 08
- Fire resistance: 750°C/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for
installation in public buildings
- Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s
- Max. short-circuit current Ipk: 50 kÂ
- 24 or 36 modules per row
- Take devices up to 800 A
(630 A for IP 55)
- Choice of distribution: standard or optimised
- Internal or external cable sleeves (joinable on left
and/or right), extendable (DPX and distribution)
- Colour: RAL 7035
- Conform to standard IEC 60439-1
168
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 169
IP 30-40-43 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES
TECHNICAL PART
Wall-mounting enclosures Floor-standing enclosures
1950
1550
External
height
(mm) 1250
1050
Cat. No. 204 01 204 06 204 02 204 07 204 03 204 08 204 04 204 09
Total width (mm) 660 910 660 910 660 910 660 910
Capacity per
row (modules)
24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24 36(1)
Height with faceplate (mm) 1000 1000 1200 1200 1400 1400 1800 1800
metal 212 51 212 56 212 52 212 57 212 53 212 58 212 54 212 59

Curved
doors
glass 212 61 212 66 212 62 212 67 212 63 212 68 212 64 212 69
Internal cable sleeve kit 204 26 204 27 204 28 204 29
Faceplate for internal cable sleeve 204 46 204 47 204 48 204 49

External cable sleeve 204 23 204 23 204 24 204 24
Door for external cable sleeve 204 33 204 33 204 34 204 34
Faceplate for external cable sleeve 204 43 204 43 204 44 204 44

IP 43 kit 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30
Partitioning divider 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91
(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve
169
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 170
XL3 800
IP 55 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES
Wall-mounting enclosures Floor-standing enclosures
1995
1595
External
height
1295
(mm)
1095
Cat. No. 204 51 204 56 204 52 204 57 204 53 204 58 204 54 204 59
Total width (mm) 700 950 700 950 700 950 700 950
Capacity per row (modules) 24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24(1) 36(1) 24 36(1)
Height with faceplate 1000 1000 1200 1200 1400 1400 1800 1800
metal 212 71 212 76 212 72 212 77 212 73 212 78 212 74 212 79

Flat
doors
glass 212 81 212 86 212 82 212 87 212 83 212 88 212 84 212 89
Internal cable sleeve kit 204 76 204 77 204 78 204 79

External cable sleeve 204 73 204 73 204 74 204 74
Door for external cable sleeve 204 83 204 83 204 84 204 84

Partitioning divider 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91
Side panels 204 66 204 66 204 67 204 67 204 68 204 68 204 69 204 69
(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve
170
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 171
MODULAR ENCLOSURES (24 MODULES)
TECHNICAL PART
Complete enclosure = Backpiece + roof + + Side panel + +
width 660 mm base + plinth assembly Side panels Curved doors
support
External height (mm)
Heights with faceplate (mm)
204 15 Metal 212 49

600
Glass 212 39
1550
800
204 13 204 19 204 16 Metal 212 50

Glass 212 60
204 15 Metal 212 49

600
Glass 212 39
1950
204 14 204 19 204 18 Metal 212 52

1200
Glass 212 62
800
204 16 Metal 212 50

1950
Glass 212 60
1000
204 14 204 19 204 17 Metal 212 51

Glass 212 61
600
Metal 3 x 212 49
1950
600
204 14 2 x 204 19 3 x 204 15 Glass 3 x 212 39

600
171
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 172
The
Legrand
offer
172
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 173
TM 2 500 xxxxxxx
DMXexample:
for
xxxxxxxx
800 to 2 500 A air circuit breakers fixed version
267 13
268 13
Dimensions (p. 36) Dimensions (p. 36)

Technical characteristics (p. 34) Technical characteristics (p. 34)
Air circuit breakers equipped with a trip unit The DMX air circuit breakers in the draw-out version are delivered
(MP 17(1) electronic protection unit), with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals and independently
rear terminals and auxiliary contacts (5 NO + 3 NC) lockable upstream/downstream isolation shutters
Pack Cat.Nos DMX 2 500 Pack Cat.Nos DMX 2 500

Breaking capacity Icu 50 kA Breaking capacity Icu 50 kA
(415 V ) ± (415 V ) ±
3P 4P In 3P 4P In
1 267 00 267 10 800 A 1 268 00 268 10 800 A
1 267 01 267 11 1 000 A 1 268 01 268 11 1 000 A
1 267 02 267 12 1 250 A 1 268 02 268 12 1 250 A
1 267 03 267 13 1 600 A 1 268 03 268 13 1 600 A
1 267 04 267 14 2 000 A 1 268 04 268 14 2 000 A
1 267 05 267 15 2 500 A 1 268 05 268 15 2 500 A
DMX-H 2 500 DMX-H 2 500

(415 V ) ± (415 V ) ±
3P 4P In 3P 4P In
1 267 20 267 30 800 A 1 268 20 268 30 800 A
1 267 21 267 31 1 000 A 1 268 21 268 31 1 000 A
1 267 22 267 32 1 250 A 1 268 22 268 32 1 250 A
1 267 23 267 33 1 600 A 1 268 23 268 33 1 600 A
1 267 24 267 34 2 000 A 1 268 24 268 34 2 000 A
1 267 25 267 35 2 500 A 1 268 25 268 35 2 500 A
DMX-L 2 500 DMX-L 2 500

(415 V ) ± (415 V ) ±
3P 4P In 3P 4P In
1 267 50 267 60 800 A 1 268 50 268 60 800 A
1 267 51 267 61 1 000 A 1 268 51 268 61 1 000 A
1 267 52 267 62 1 250 A 1 268 52 268 62 1 250 A
1 267 53 267 63 1 600 A 1 268 53 268 63 1 600 A
1 267 54 267 64 2 000 A 1 268 54 268 64 2 000 A
1 267 55 267 65 2 500 A 1 268 55 268 65 2 500 A
A c c e s s o r i e s (p. 177) A c c e s s o r i e s (p. 177)
(1) base protection (1) base protection
173
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 174
TM 4 000 xxxxxxx
DMXexample:
for DMXTM 4 000
3 200 and 4 000 A air circuit breakers
xxxxxxxx 3 200 and 4 000 A air circuit breakers
fixed version draw-out version
267 27
268 17
Dimensions (p. 36) Dimensions (p. 36)

Air circuit breakers equipped with a trip unit Air circuit breakers equipped with a trip unit
(MP 17(1) electronic protection unit), (MP 17(1) electronic protection unit),
rear terminals and auxiliary contacts (5 NO + 3 NC) rear terminals and auxiliary contacts (5 NO + 3 NC)
The DMX air circuit breakers in the draw-out version are delivered
with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals and independently
Pack Cat.Nos DMX 4 000 lockable upstream/downstream isolation shutters
Breaking capacity Icu 50 kA
(415 V ) ± Pack Cat.Nos DMX 4 000
3P 4P In
1 267 06 267 16 3 200 A (415 V ) ±
1 267 07 267 17 4 000 A
3P 4P In
1 268 06 268 16 3 200 A
DMX-H 4 000 1 268 07 268 17 4 000 A
(415 V ) ± DMX-H 4 000
3P 4P In
1 267 26 267 36 3 200 A (415 V ) ±
1 267 27 267 37 4 000 A
3P 4P In
1 268 26 268 36 3 200 A
DMX-L 4 000 1 268 27 268 37 4 000 A
(415 V ) ± DMX-L 4 000
3P 4P In
1 267 56 267 66 3 200 A (415 V ) ±
1 267 57 267 67 4 000 A
3P 4P In
1 268 56 268 66 3 200 A
1 268 57 268 67 4 000 A
Auxiliaries
see p. 176
174
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 175
for example:
DMX, DMX-H,xxxxxxx
DMX-L DMX-I
xxxxxxxx protection unit
electronic trip free switches
MP17 delivered on MP20 only delivered

standard on DMX on request
267 83
Technical curves (p. 23) Dimensions (p. 36)
Non-automatic air-circuit breakers with rear

MP17 electro n i c p ro t e c t i o n u n i t terminals and auxiliary contacts (5 NO + 3 NC)
The DMX 2500 and DMX 4000 are delivered with an MP17
electronic protection unit with Ir, Im and Tm adjustements
on the front face
Pack Cat.Nos DMX-I 2 500
t Ir
F i xe d v e r s i o n
3P 4P In
Tm 1 267 72 267 82 1 250 A
Im
I
1 267 73 267 83 1 600 A
1 267 74 267 84 2 000 A
1 267 75 267 85 2 500 A
Pack Cat.Nos Te s t b ox Draw - o u t vers i o n
Use to verify the correct functioning of the trip unit The DMX trip free switches in the draw-out
and the opening conditions of the poles of DMX version are delivered with a base
1 269 28 Test box MP17 equipped with adjustable rear terminals
and independently lockable
upstream/downstream isolation shutters
MP20 electro n i c p ro t e c t i o n u n i t 3P 4P In
1 268 72 268 82 1 250 A
On request, the DMX can be equipped with an MP20 electronic 1 268 73 268 83 1 600 A
protection unit provided with a liquid crystal display and keyboard for 1 268 74 268 84 2 000 A
adjustement of the operating parameters, and an external memory unit 1 268 75 268 85 2 500 A
(UME) on the draw out versions
Possible setting: Ir, Tr, Imr, Tmr, Im, Tm
Ir DMX-I 4 000
t(s)
Tr F i xe d v e r s i o n
Imr
Tmr
3P 4P In
Im
Tm
1 267 76 267 86 3 200 A
1 267 77 267 87 4 000 A
I(A)
1 267 74 267 84 2 000 A
1 267 75 267 85 2 500 A
In addition to the conventional functions, other functions can be added Draw - o u t vers i o n
as options: The DMX trip free switches in the draw-out
- display of line currents version are delivered with a base
- counting of electrical operations performed equipped with adjustable rear terminals
- signalling of actions performed by the control unit and independently lockable
- load control and load shedding upstream/downstream isolation shutters
- prior warning of tripping in the absence of priority loads
- centralised communication and supervision functions 3P 4P In
1 268 76 268 86 3 250 A
1 268 77 268 87 4 000 A
Please consult your Legrand office
Choice of facepla tes
(see Legrand General Catalogue)
175
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 176
DMX,
for example:
DMX-H,xxxxxxx
DMX-L, DMX-I DMX, DMX-H, DMX-L, DMX-I
control
xxxxxxxxand signalling auxiliaries control and signalling auxiliaries, locking
269 74 269 60
269 54
Pack Cat.Nos C o n t ro l a n d s i g n a l l i n g a u x i l i a r i e s Pack Cat.Nos C o n t ro l a n d s i g n a l l i n g a u x i l i a r i e s

Shunt trip Closing coils
When energised the circuit breaker will be tripped Enables remote closing of the circuit breaker if the
1 269 64 24 V == closing spring is charged
= =A
1 269 65 48 V 1 269 60 24/30 V
1 269 66 A ==
110/130 V or 1 269 61 48 V
1 269 67 A
220/250 V or 1 269 62 110/130 V and ==
1 269 68 A =
380/440 V or 1 269 63 A
220/250 V and
U n d e r v o l t a g e releases Signalling contacts
When the coil is de-energised, the circuit breaker 1 269 52 1 NO fault signal contact
will be tripped 1 269 50 6 NO + 6 NC position contact (in/test/out)
1 269 73 24 V == for draw-out version
1 269 69 48 V
1 269 70 110/130 V=A C o n t ro l a n d s i g n a l l i n g a u x i l i a r i e s
1 269 71 220/250 V
1 269 72 380/440 V A Key l o c k i n g i n “ o p e n ” p o s i t i o n
Dela y e d u n d e r v o l t a g e r e l e a s e s Mounting of the lock on the ACBs
1 269 31 Ronis™ lock (lock and key included)
Improves immunity to nuisance tripping 1 269 32 Profalux lock (lock and key not included)
1 269 74 48 V = = Key l o c k i n g i n t h e w i t h d raw n p o s i t i o n
1 269 75 110/130 V
A
A ==
1 269 76 220/250 V or Mounting of the lock on the base
1 269 77 380/440 V or 1 269 41 Ronis™ lock (lock and key included)
M o t o r o p e rat o rs 1 269 42 Profalux lock (lock and key not included)
To motorise a DMX, it is necessary to attach, to the Door locking
motor operators, a release coil (undervoltage or trip Prevents opening of the door with the circuit breaker
on energising) and a closing coil closed
The motor operator is delivered with a spring charge 1 269 88 Left-hand side mounting (hinges on the right)
contact 1 269 87 Right-hand side mounting (hinges on the left)
= =A
1 269 54 24/30 V
1 269 55 48 V
1 269 56 110/130 V
1 269 57 110/130 V=A
1 269 58 220/250 V
176
ex25027_164-177.qxd 28/12/05 18:03 Page 177
for example:
DMX, DMX-H,xxxxxxx
DMX-L, DMX-I for example: xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
accessories xxxxxxxx
269 97
267 15
DMX 2500, mounted on base cat no. 269 03
Pack Cat.Nos Accessories Pack Cat.Nos C o nv ers i o n o f a f i xed dev i c e i n t o

Ra t i n g m i s - i n s e r t i o n d ev i c e a draw - o u t d ev i c e
Prevents the insertion of a draw-out circuit Converting a fixed device requires a base,
breaker in an incompatible base a set of cluster contacts and
1 269 86 Base/circuit breaker insertion lock a mounting tool
Ra t i n g m i s - i n s e r t i o n d ev i c e B a s e s fo r d raw - o u t d ev i c e
Counts total number of operation cycles
of the device Accept ACBs equipped with cluster
1 269 89 Operations counter 3P 4P contacts
1 269 00 269 03 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and
DMX-I 2 500
E q u i p m e n t f o r s u p p l y i nv e r t o r s 1 269 01 269 04 For DMX 4 000, DMX-H 4 000,
DMX-L 2 500/4 000 and DMX-I 4 000
The mechanical interlocking of devices
which are placed above one another or In 3 200 A
installed side by side requires an 1 269 02 269 05 For DMX 4 000, DMX-H 4 000,
interlocking unit for each device and DMX-L 2 500/4 000 and DMX-I 4 000
a cable set In = 4 000 A
Interlocking units Sets of c l u s t e r c o n t a c t s
For installation on the side of circuit For use on the rear terminals of the fixed
breakers DMX, DMX-H, DMX-L and DMX-I devices using the mounting tool
1 269 78 269 82 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and
3P 4P Fixed version DMX-I 2 500
1 269 95 269 96 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and In ≤ 1 600 A
DMX-I 2 500
1 269 97 269 98 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and 1 269 79 269 83 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and
DMX-I 4 000 DMX-I 2 500
In = 2 000 A and 2 500 A
Draw-out version
1 269 91 269 92 For DMX 2 500, DMX-H 2 500 and 1 269 80 269 84 For DMX 4 000, DMX-H 4 000,
DMX-I 2 500 DMX-L 2 500/4 000 and DMX-I 4 000
1 269 93 269 94 For DMX 4 000, DMX-H 4 000, In ≤ 3 200 A
DMX-L 2 500/4 000 and DMX-I 4 000 1 269 81 269 85 For DMX 4 000, DMX-H 4 000,
Ca b l e s fo r i n t e r l o c k i n g a s s e m b l i e s DMX-L 2 500/4 000 and DMX-I 4 000
In = 4 000 A
1 269 99 Set of cables for 2 devices (l = 2m)
Cluster mounting tool
Necessary for mounting the clusters on the
rear terminals of the device
1 269 08 Cluster mounting tool
D o o r p ro t e c t i o n
1 269 07 Door protection IP 54 for draw-out device
177
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 178
Products and systems

]DPX
MCCBs: DPX
[
DPX are MCCBs and trip-free switches, known as "moulded case" units,
for controlling and protecting circuits up to 1 600 A
The DPX system from 16 to 1 600 A

Simple, set criteria for selecting a DPX
Type of release
[thermal magnetic or electronic]
and breaking capacity [16, 25, 36, 50,
70 and 100 kA]
Size of unit:
125, 160, 250 ER, 250, 630, 1 250, 1600
Version: fixed, plug-in
or draw-out [from 250 A]
A perfect fit: in the new
3
XL cabinets and enclosures
Auxiliaries that are common
to the whole range
DPX can also be used with earth

leakage modules
Legrand advantages
1 1 device = 1 catalogue number
Single installation principle

2 irrespective of the device rating
or version
Mounted under faceplate

3 in standard or optimised
distribution solutions
178
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 179
Installation principle
1 Mounting
DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER are mounted on 3 rail. DPX 250, 630, 1 250 and 1600 can only
They can also be installed on special plates be mounted on special plates
2 Connection (2 options)
Via front terminals Via rear terminals
Connect directly on plate (bar or cable with lug) Connect bars or cables with lugs to the rear terminals
or via cage terminal (cables) or on a base mounted directly on the devices (fixed version)
(for plug-in or draw-out versions) or on bases (for plug-in or draw-out versions)
Connection via cables Connection via bars Connection via bars

Consult the E-Catalogue:
product guides, technical data sheets, etc.
179
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 180
DPXTM 125 DPXTM 125

MCCBs from 16 to 125 A electronic earth leakage modules
thermal magnetic motor operators
250 18 250 59
Dimensions (p. 64 and p. 65) 250 45 + 260 13

Electrical characteristics (p. 42 and p. 43)
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Pack Cat.Nos E l e c t ro n i c e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
electrical lines
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 125
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 230 V - 500 V ±
current relays (p. 195) Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Supplied complete with: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
- cage terminals Adjustable, sealable tripping:
- terminal shields 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Equipped with:
Fixed version • test push-button
Thermal release adjustable from 0.7 to 1 In • reset push-button
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Remote earth fault signalling contact
Thermal adjustement sealable Switch for mechanical tests on operation
and insulation of the device (installation
insulation test)
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-E 125 Mounted side by side
3P 4P In
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (230 V
1 260 02 260 03 63 A
1P In
1 260 12 260 13 125 A
1 250 00 16 A
1 250 01 20 A M o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h
1 250 02 25 A 1 260 04 63 A
1 250 03 32 A 1 260 14 125 A
1 250 04 40 A
1 250 05 50 A
1 250 06 63 A
1 250 07 80 A M o t o r o p e rat o rs
1 250 08 100 A
1 250 09 125 A For remote making and breaking of a DPX
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (400 V circuit and reset in the even of tripping
3P 4P In on a fault
A lock prevents operation when working
1 250 16 250 24 16 A on the line
1 250 17 250 25 25 A 1 261 00 Front operated 24 V =± =
1 250 18 250 26 40 A 1 261 03 Front operated 230 V /
1 250 19 250 27 63 A
1 250 20 250 28 100 A
1 250 21 250 29 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 23 125 A
DPX 125
±)
3P 4P In
1 250 36 250 44 16 A
1 250 37 250 45 25 A
1 250 38 250 46 40 A
1 250 39 250 47 63 A
1 250 40 250 48 100 A
1 250 41 250 49 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 43 125 A
±)
3P 4P In
1 250 50 250 58 16 A
1 250 51 250 59 25 A
1 250 52 250 60 40 A
1 250 53 250 61 63 A
1 250 54 250 62 100 A
1 250 55 250 63 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 57 125 A
180
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 181
DPXTM 125 DPXTM 125

rotary handles
mounting and connection accessories
■ Mounting
M o u n t i n g o n ra i l 4 w i t h p l a te
Spacer
262 99
262 01 263 01
Pack Cat.Nos M o u n t i n g o n ra i l 4
Fo r f i x i n g o n u p r i g h t
Comprising one Plate 262 08
aluminium mounting
rail and 2 fixing
brackets
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800
24 modules/row
D i n - ra i l f i x i n g p l a te ■ Connection
1 262 08 For mounting DPX 125
with or without earth leakage DPX fro n t t e r m i n a l s
module on rail 4 With cables With bars
Fo r f i x i n g o n p l a te
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical max. 12
max. Ø 12
position
1 202 14 Device or device + earth leakage module,
horizontal position
Spacer fo r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s
1 262 99 Fits on a rail 4 ; can be used to mount on
the same row DX and DPX 125 on plate
Cat.No 262 08
6 Nm 6 Nm
Ro t a r y h a n d l e s
D i rect on DPX
1 262 01 Standard (grey)
1 262 03 For emergency use (red/yellow)
Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e
■ M o t o r o p e rat o rs
Including:
- connection rod
- bracket
- self adhesive drilling template
- mounting accessories
- door lock mechanism
Connection accessories
Insulated shields
Used to isolate the connection between
each pole
1 262 07 Set of 3
3P 4P Seala b l e t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
1 262 05 262 06 Set of 2
Pa d l o c k
1 262 00 For locking in "OFF" position
3P 4P Rear ter m i n a l s
1 263 00 263 01 Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version with rear
terminals
Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or
outgoing
181
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 182
DPXTM 160 DPXTM 160

thermal magnetic motor operators, supply invertor type
251 25 251 72 261 95
251 33 + 260 21
Dimensions (p. 66 and p. 67)
Electrical characteristics (p. 42 to p. 43)
Pack Cat.Nos E l e c t ro n i c e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 160
electrical lines 230 V - 500 V ±
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
current relays (p. 195) Adjustable, sealable tripping:
Supplied complete with: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
- connection plates for bars Equipped with:
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width • test push-button
max. 20 mm) • reset push-button
- terminal shields Remote earth fault signalling contact
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Switch for mechanical tests on operation
Fixed version and insulation of the device (installation
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In insulation test)
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Mounted side by side
Thermal adjustement sealable 3P 4P In
1 260 20 260 21 160 A
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 160 M o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V 1 260 22 160 A
3P 4P In
1 251 23 251 31 63 A M o t o r o p e rat o rs
1 251 24 251 32 100 A
For remote making and breaking of a DPX
1 251 25 251 33 160 A circuit and reset in the even of tripping
3 P + N/2 In on a fault
1 251 27 160 A A lock prevents operation when working
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V on the line
3P 4P In 1 261 10 Front operated 24 V =
1 251 49 251 57 63 A 1 261 13 Front operated 230V / ±=
1 251 50 251 58 100 A
1 251 51 251 59 160 A
S u p p l y i nv e r t o r t y p e
3 P + N/2 In
1 251 53 160 A M o u n t i n g p l a te
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V 1 264 01 For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
3P 4P In same size for use in normal or automatic
modes
1 251 62 251 70 40 A Mounting plate for mechanical interlock
1 251 63 251 71 63 A
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l b ox
1 251 64 251 72 100 A For detecting the absence of voltage or a
1 251 65 251 73 160 A drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a
3 P + N/2 In power supply source
1 251 67 160 A 1 261 95 24 V =
1 261 96 230 V ±
NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote
controls and 2 auxiliary contacts
182
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 183
DPXTM 160 DPXTM 160

rotary handles
■ Mounting
Spacer
262 99
262 11 263 10
Pack Cat.Nos M o u n t i n g o n ra i l 4
Fo r f i x i n g o n u p r i g h t Plate 262 09
Comprising one aluminium mounting rail

and 2 fixing brackets
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row
D i n - ra i l f i x i n g p l a te
1 262 09 For mounting DPX 160 with or without earth
leakage module on rail 4 ■ Connection
Fo r f i x i n g o n p l a te DPX fro n t t e r m i n a l s
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position With cables With bars
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical
position
max. 18
1 202 14 Device or device + earth leakage module,
horizontal position Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
1 262 99 Fits on a rail 4 ; can be used
to mount on the same row DX
max. 10
and DPX 160 on plate

Cat.No 262 09
D i rect on DPX 10 Nm 10 Nm
Including: connecting rod, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories, door locking mechanism
1 262 12 Standard (grey) ■ M o t o r o p e rat o rs
Insulated shields
each pole
1 262 07 Set of 3
1 262 15 262 16 Set of 2
Pa d l o c k
Ca ge ter m i n a l s
For connecting bare cables without lugs
1 262 18 Set of 4 terminals for cable 95 mm2 max.
(or 70 mm2 flexible)
1 262 19 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable
120 mm2 max. (or 95 mm2 flexible)
A d a p t o r fo r l u g
For connecting bare cables with wide lug
1 262 17 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields
1 263 10 263 11 Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals
outgoing
183
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 184
DPXTM 250 ER DPXTM 250 ER

thermal magnetic plug-in version
252 55 265 13
252 56 + 260 36
Pack Cat.Nos E l e c t ro n i c e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250 ER
electrical lines 230-500 V ±
Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
current relays (p. 195) Adjustable, sealable tripping:
Supplied complete with: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
- connection plates for bars Equipped with:
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width • test push-button
max. 20 mm) • reset push-button
- terminal shields Remote earth fault signalling contact
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Switch for mechanical tests on operation
Fixed version and insulation of the device (installation
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In insulation test)
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Mounted side by side
Thermal adjustement sealable 4P In
1 260 31 160 A
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 ER 1 260 36 250 A
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V ) M o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h
3P 4P In 1 260 33 160 A
1 252 04 252 14 100 A 1 260 38 250 A
1 252 05 252 15 160 A
1 252 06 252 16 250 A
P l u g - i n ve r s i o n
3 P + N/2 In
1 252 09 250 A A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) mounted on a base
3P 4P In 3P 4P Tu l i p c o n t a c t s
1 252 24 252 34 100 A 1 265 12 265 13 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an
1 252 25 252 35 160 A incoming/outgoing protective cover
1 252 26 252 36 250 A Bases
3 P + N/2 In Can accept DPX and DPX-I fitted with tulip
contacts
1 252 29 250 A
1 265 14 265 15 Front terminal mounting base
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V )
1 265 16 265 17 Rear terminal mounting base
3P 4P In
1 252 44 252 54 100 A C o n n e c t o rs
1 252 45 252 55 160 A For connecting the auxiliaries included
1 252 46 252 56 250 A 4P in the DPX
3 P + N/2 In 1 263 99 1 set of connectors (8-pin)
1 252 49 250 A
S u p p l y i nv e r t o r t y p e
M o u n t i n g p l a te
1 264 02 For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
same size for use in normal or automatic
modes
Mounting plate for mechanical interlock
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l b ox
For detecting the absence of voltage or a
drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a
power supply source
1 261 95 24 V =
1 261 96 230 V ±
NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote
controls and 2 auxiliary contacts
184
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 185
DPXTM 250 ER DPXTM 250 ER

rotary handles
■ Mounting
Spacer
262 99
262 99 262 11 262 07
Pack Cat.Nos M o u n t i n g o n ra i l 4 Plate 262 09

Fo r f i x i n g o n u p r i g h t
Comprising one aluminium mounting rail
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row
D i n - ra i l f i x i n g p l a te
1 262 09 For mounting DPX 250 ER with or without ■ Connection
earth leakage module on rail 4 DPX fro n t t e r m i n a l s
Fo r f i x i n g o n p l a te
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position With cables With bars
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical
position
1 202 16 Device or device + earth leakage module, max. 18
horizontal position Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
1 262 99 Fits on a rail 4 ; can be used to mount on
the same row DX and DPX 250 ER on plate
max. 10
Cat.No 262 09
D i rect on DPX
1 262 11 Standard (grey) 10 Nm 10 Nm
Including:
- connecting rod
- bracket
- self-adhesive drilling template DPX r e a r t e r m i n a l s P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
- mounting accessories
- door lock mechanism max. 20
17 mm
Insulated shields
Used to isolate the connection
between each pole 10 Nm
1 262 07 Set of 3
1 262 85 262 86 Set of 2
Pa d l o c k
Connection ter minals
1 262 88 Set of 4 terminals for cables without lugs
185 mm2 max. (rigid) or 150 mm2 max.
(flexible)
S p readers
For increasing the distance between each
3P 4P pole to be connected
1 262 90 262 91 Set of incoming or outgoing spreaders
Rear ter m i n a l s
Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version
with rear terminals
1 265 10 265 11 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals,
incoming or outgoing
185
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 186
DPXTM 250
MCCBs from 40 to 250 A
thermal magnetic and electronic release
253 49 254 23 260 55

MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 195)
Supplied complete with:
- connection plates for bars
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width max. 20 mm)
- terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-2 - Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 ther m a l m a g n e t i c Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 electr o n i c r elease
( c o n t i nu e d )
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In
Magnetic adjustable from 3.5 to 10 In DPX-H 250 70 kA
Adjustment (p. 44) Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
DPX 250 36 kA 3P 4 P(2) In
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V )± 1 254 13 254 19 40 A
3P 4P In 1 254 15 254 21 100 A
1 253 28 253 45 40 A 1 254 16 254 22 160 A
1 253 29 253 46 63 A 1 254 17 254 23 250 A
1 253 30 253 47 100 A DPX-L 250 100 kA
1 253 31 253 48 160 A Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) ±
1 253 32 253 49 250 A 3P 4 P(2) In
3 P + N/2 In 1 254 25 254 31 40 A
1 253 41 160 A 1 254 27 254 33 100 A
1 253 42 250 A 1 254 28 254 34 160 A
DPX-H 250 70 kA 1 254 29 254 35 250 A
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V )±
3P 4P In
E l e c t ro n i c e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
1 253 52 253 69 40 A
1 253 53 253 70 63 A Fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250
1 253 54 253 71 100 A Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
1 253 55 253 72 160 A 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
1 253 56 253 73 250 A Adjustable, sealable time delay:
0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
3 P + N/2 In Equipped with: test and reset push-buttons,
1 253 66 250 A remote earth fault signalling contact
DPX-L 250 100 kA Switch for mechanical tests on operation
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V )± insulation test)
3P 4P In Mounted underneath
1 253 80 253 89 100 A
S t a n d a rd
1 253 81 253 90 160 A
3P 4P In
1 253 82 253 91 250 A
1 260 51 160 A
3 P + N/2 In 1 260 54 260 55 250 A
1 253 88 250 A
L E D ve r s i o n
Monitors the isolation state of the
DPX 250 electr o n i c r elease installation via a series of LEDs
4P In
Adjustment of Ir, Im (p. 44) 1 260 53 160 A
Indicator lamp(1) 1 260 57 250 A
Connector for test unit
Instantaneous protection If = 4 kA
DPX 250 36 kA
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ±)
3P 4 P(2) In
1 254 01 254 07 40 A
1 254 03 254 09 100 A
1 254 04 254 10 160 A
1 254 05 254 11 250 A
(1) Minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % of In)
green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir
(2) Adjustment of neutral on front panel
186
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 187
DPXTM 250
equipment
accessories
265 32 265 46 261 30 262 22
Pack Cat.Nos P l u g - i n ve r s i o n Pack Cat.Nos Ro t a r y h a n d l e s

A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts D i rect on DPX
mounted on a base 1 262 22 Standard (grey)
3P 4P Tu l i p c o n t a c t s 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 29 265 30 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an fitted on Cat.No 262 22)
incoming/outgoing protective cover Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e
Bases Including: connection rod, bracket,
Can accept fitted with tulip contacts self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
• For DPX only accessories and door lock mechanism
1 265 31 265 32 Front terminal mounting base 1 262 23 Standard (grey)
1 265 33 265 34 Rear terminal mounting base with 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
threaded rod fitted on Cat.No 262 23)
1 265 35 265 36 Flat rear terminal mounting base 1 262 25 Locking accessor y
• For DPX with earth leakage module
1 265 37 Front terminal mounting base
1 265 38 Rear terminal mounting base with Mounting accessories
threaded rod
1 265 39 Flat rear terminal mounting base Insulated shields
Accessories Used to isolate the connection between
1 263 99 1 set of connectors (8-pin) each pole
1 098 19 1 set of connectors (6-pin) 1 262 30 Set of 3 insulated shields
1 263 43 Extractor handle 3P 4P Seala b l e t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
1 262 26 262 27 Set of 2 long terminal shields
1 262 28 262 29 Set of 2 short terminal shields
Draw - o u t vers i o n Pa d l o c k
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX 1 262 21 For locking in "OFF" position
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping
it on its base Connection accessories
3P 4P " D e b ro - l i f t " d ev i c e Ca ge ter m i n a l s
1 265 45 265 46 For DPX only For connecting bare cables without lugs
1 265 47 For DPX with earth leakage module 1 262 35 Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max.
A c c e s s o r i e s fo r l i f t i n g d ev i c e (or 150 mm2 flexible)
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out A d a p t o r fo r l u g
1 265 75 Operating handle For connecting bare cables with wide lug
1 265 76 Ronis locking device 1 262 31 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields
1 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised
draw-out E x t e n d e d f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
1 262 32 For connections
S u p p l y i nv e r t o r t y p e S p readers
For increasing the distance between
M o u n t i n g p l a te 3P 4P each pole to be connected
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the 1 262 33 262 34 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
same size for use in manual or automatic outgoing
modes Rear ter m i n a l s
1 264 08 Mounting plate for fixed version Used to convert the fixed version with front
1 264 03 Mounting plate for plug-in type and terminals to the fixed version with rear
draw-out version terminals
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l b ox 1 263 31 263 32 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming
For detecting the absence of voltage or outgoing
or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening 1 265 27 265 28 Set of 6 (or 8) flat rear terminals, incoming
of a power supply source or outgoing
1 261 95 24 V =±
1 261 96 230 V
M o t o r o p e rat o rs
Fr o n t o p e rat e d
1 261 30 24 V ±±
1 261 34 230 V
Accessory
1 261 59 Ronis locking accessory
187
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 188
DPXTM 630
MCCBs from 250 to 630 A
thermal magnetic and electronic release
Green indicator lamp (only S1): normal operation

minimum current for indicator lamp operation
(30 % of In)
Fixed red indicator lamp: ≥ 0.9 Ir

Flushing red indicator lamp: I ≥ 1.05 Ir
connector for test unit
255 40 255 53 256 07(1)
Dimensions ((p. 72 and p. 73)

MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines
Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current relays (p. 195)
Supplied complete with:
- connection plates for bars
- terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-2
Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 630 ther m a l m a g n e t i c Pack Cat.Nos DPX 630 electr o n i c r elease
Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (p. 189)
Magnetic adjustable from 5 to 10 In Instantaneous protection: 5 kA
Adjustment (p. 44) DPX 630 36 kA
DPX 630 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) ±
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V )± S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
3P 4P In 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 21 255 36 250 A 1 256 01 256 05 250 A
1 255 22 255 37 320 A 1 256 02 256 06 400 A
1 255 23 255 38 400 A 1 256 03 256 07 630 A
1 255 25 255 39 500 A
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 24 255 40 630 A 1 256 26 256 30 250 A
3 P + N/2 In 1 256 27 256 31 400 A
1 255 32 320 A 1 256 28 256 32 630 A
1 255 33 400 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 255 35 500 A 1 256 51 256 55 250 A
1 255 34 630 A 1 256 52 256 56 400 A
DPX-H 630 70 kA 1 256 53 256 57 630 A
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V )± DPX-H 630 70 kA
3P 4P In Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
1 255 42 255 57 320 A
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
1 255 43 255 58 400 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 45 255 59 500 A 1 256 10 256 14 400 A
1 255 44 255 60 630 A 1 256 11 256 15 630 A
3 P + N/2 In S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 52 320 A 1 256 35 256 39 400 A
1 255 53 400 A 1 256 36 256 40 630 A
1 255 54 630 A 1 256 60 256 64 400 A
DPX-L 630 100 kA 1 256 61 256 65 630 A
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) DPX-L 630 100 kA
3P 4P In Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
1 255 62 255 77 320 A
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
1 255 63 255 78 400 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 65 255 79 500 A 1 256 18 256 22 400 A
1 255 64 255 80 630 A 1 256 19 256 23 630 A
3 P + N/2 In S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 73 400 A 1 256 43 256 47 400 A
1 255 75 500 A 1 256 44 256 48 630 A
1 256 68 256 72 400 A
1 256 69 256 73 630 A
(1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel

(2) Green indicator lamp
188
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 189
DPXTM 630 DPXTM 630

earth leakage modules
■ Pe r fo r mance da ta
S 1 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Im
t Ir
Im
If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold

based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 s (fixed at 6 tr)
• Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
260 63 Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.05 s (fixed)
•Instantaneous protection
if with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
Pack Cat.Nos Ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 630
230-500 V ±
Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: S 2 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
Adjustable, sealable time delay:
0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s t Ir
Equipped with: Tr
• test push-button Im
• reset push-button Tm
Remote earth fault signalling contact If
Switch for mechanical tests on operation I
insulation test) • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
Mounted underneath based on the rms value of the current:
S t a n d a rd Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
3P 4P In Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps)
1 260 60 260 61 400 A • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
1 260 64 260 65 630 A Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
L E D ve r s i o n Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
Monitors the isolation state of the • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
installation via a series of LEDs with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
4P In
1 260 63 400 A
1 260 67 630 A
S g - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
t Ir
Tr
Ig Im
Tg Tm
If
I

Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at Ir) (4 steps)
• Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
• Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
• Earth fault measurement:
Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)
189
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 190
DPXTM 630
equipment
accessories
265 57 265 67 262 50 262 51 262 48
Pack Cat.Nos P l u g - i n ve r s i o n Pack Cat.Nos Ro t a r y h a n d l e s

A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts D i rect on DPX
mounted on a base 1 262 41 Standard (grey)
3P 4P Tu l i p c o n t a c t s 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 50 265 51 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an fitted on Cat.No 262 41)
incoming/outgoing protective cover Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e
Bases Including: connection rod, bracket,
Can accept fitted with tulip contacts self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories and door lock mechanism
• For DPX only 1 262 42 Standard (grey)
1 265 52 265 53 Front terminal mounting base 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 54 265 55 Rear terminal mounting base with fitted on Cat.No 262 42)
threaded rod
1 265 56 265 57 Flat rear terminal mounting base 1 262 25 Locking accessor y
• For DPX with earth leakage module
1 265 58 Front terminal mounting base
1 265 59 Rear terminal mounting base with Mounting accessories
threaded rod Insulated shields
1 265 60 Flat rear terminal mounting base
Accessory each pole
1 263 68 Extractor handle 1 262 30 Set of 3
Draw - o u t vers i o n 1 262 44 262 45 Set of 2
Pa d l o c k
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can 1 262 40 For locking in "OFF" position
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping
it on its base Connection accessories
3P 4P " D e b ro - l i f t " d ev i c e
1 265 66 265 67 For DPX mounting bases only Ca ge ter m i n a l s
1 265 68 For DPX mounting bases with earth For connecting bare cables without lugs
leakage module 1 262 50 Set of 4 terminals for cable 300 mm2 max.
(or 240 mm2 flexible)
A c c e s s o r i e s fo r l i f t i n g d ev i c e 1 262 51 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible)
1 265 75 Operating handle
1 265 76 Ronis locking device A d a p t o r fo r l u g
1 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised For connecting bare cables with wide lugs
draw-out 1 262 46 Set of 4 adaptors + insulated shields
E x t e n d e d f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
S u p p l y i nv e r t o r t y p e 1 262 47 For connections
S p readers
Factory assembled
For increasing the distance between
M o u n t i n g p l a te 3P 4P each pole to be connected
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the 1 262 48 262 49 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
same size for use in normal or automatic outgoing
modes Rear ter m i n a l s
1 264 09 Mounting plate for fixed version
1 264 04 Mounting plate for plug-in type and Used to convert the fixed version with front
draw-out version terminals to the fixed version with rear
terminals
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l b ox Set of 3 (or 4)
For detecting the absence of voltage 1 263 50 263 51 Swivel terminals
or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening 1 263 52 265 53 Flat terminals
of a power supply source
1 261 95 24 V =±
1 261 96 230 V
M o t o r o p e rat o rs
Fr o n t o p e rat e d
1 261 40 24 V ±
1 261 44 230 V ±
Accessory
190
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 191
DPXTM 1 250 DPXTM 1 600

MCCBs from 800 to 1250 A MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A
thermal magnetic electronic release
258 04 257 08

Dimensions (p. 74 and p. 75) Electrical characteristics (p. 42 and p. 43)
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and
protection of low voltage electrical lines
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal blocks)
protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal relays (p. 195)
blocks) Supplied complete with:
Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current - connection plates for bars
relays (p. 195) - terminal shields
Supplied complete with: Conform to IEC 60947-2
- connection plates for bars Fixed version
- terminal shields Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (see p. 44)
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Instantaneous protection If = 20 kA
Fixed version Connector for test unit
Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In (see p. 44) Indicator lamp: minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % In):
Magnetic adjustable 5 to 10 < 1 000 A ≤ 3 to 6 In (see p. 44) green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 1600

Pack Cat.Nos DPX 1 250
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ±) Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ) ±
3P 4 P(1) In S 1 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Im
1 258 02 258 09 800 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 03 258 10 1 000 A 1 257 02 257 06 800 A
1 257 03 257 07 1 250 A
1 258 04 258 11 1 250 A 1 257 04 257 08 1 600 A
S 2 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, lm, Tm
In
DPX-H 1 250 1 257 26 257 30 800 A
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V±) 1 257 27 257 31 1 250 A
3P 4 P(1) In 1 257 28 257 32 1 600 A
1 258 16 258 23 800 A S g - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 258 17 258 24 1 000 A In
1 258 18 258 25 1 250 A 1 257 51 257 55 800 A
1 257 52 257 56 1 250 A
1 257 53 257 57 1 600 A
DPX-L 1 250
DPX-H 1600
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ±) Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 30 258 39 800 A S 1 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Im
1 258 31 258 40 1 000 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 32 258 41 1 250 A 1 257 10 257 14 800 A
1 257 11 257 15 1 250 A
1 257 12 257 16 1 600 A
S 2 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, lm, Tm
In
1 257 34 257 38 800 A
1 257 35 257 39 1 250 A
1 257 36 257 40 1 600 A
S g - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg
In
1 257 59 257 63 800 A
1 257 60 257 64 1 250 A
1 257 61 257 65 1 600 A
(1) Neutral without protection (1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel
191
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 192
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600 DPXTM 1 600

equipment MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A
electronic release
■ Pe r fo r mance da ta
S 1 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Im
t Ir
Im
If
I

Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 -0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps) - Fixed
• Short delay protection against short-circuits
with an adjustable Im threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.1 s (fixed)
• Instantaneous protection with fixed theshold: If = 15 ≤ 1 250 < 20
S 2 - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
265 84
t Ir
Tr
Im
Pack Cat.Nos Draw - o u t vers i o n Tm
If
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX I
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
it on its base based on the rms value of the current:
Draw - o u t k i t Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps)
The draw-out kit includes a base, a • Short delay protection against short-circuits
3P 4P "Debro-lift" device and brackets with an adjustable Im threshold:
1 265 82 265 83 Front terminals Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
1 265 84 265 85 Rear terminals Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
A c c e s s o r i e s fo r l i f t i n g d ev i c e • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA
1 265 75 Operating handle
1 265 76 Ronis locking device, 1 key breaker only
1 265 80 Ronis locking device, 2 keys for motorised S g - A d j u s t m e n t o f Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
breaker or with rotary handle
t Ir
Tr
Ig
S u p p l y i nv e r t o r t y p e Im
Tg Tm
M o u n t i n g p l a te If
I
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
same size for use in normal or automatic
modes • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
Factory-assembled based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In
1 264 10 Mounting plate for fixed version (8 steps)
1 264 05 Mounting plate for plug-in and draw-out Tr = 5 - 10- 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps)
version • Short delay protection against short-circuits
E l e c t r o n i c c o n t r o l b ox with an adjustable Im threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
For detecting the absence of voltage or Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
a power supply source • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
1 261 95 24 V = with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA
• Earth fault measurement:
1 261 96 230 V ± Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)
192
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 193
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600

rotary handles
accessories
262 61 262 60 262 70 262 67 + 262 68
Pack Cat.Nos M o t o r o p e rat o rs Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories

For remote making and breaking of a DPX Ca ge ter m i n a l s
circuit and reset in the event of tripping on
a fault For connecting bare cables without lugs
A lock prevents operation when working on 1 262 69 Set of 1 terminal
the line 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or
Factory assembled 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible)
1 261 54 Front operated 230 V ± 1 262 70 Set of 1 high-capacity terminal
4 x 240 mm2 for rigid cable
4 x 185 mm2 for flexible cable
Rear ter m i n a l s
Used to convert the fixed version with front
Ro t a r y h a n d l e s terminals
1 262 61 Direct on DPX outgoing
3P 4P
1 262 62 Vari-depth handle 1 263 80 263 82 Short terminals
Including: connection rod, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting 1 263 81 263 83 Long terminals
accessories and door lock mechanism E x t e n d e d f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
1 262 25 Locking accessory 1 262 67 Short terminals
1 262 68 Long terminals
S p readers
Mounting accessories 3P 4P pole to be connected
Insulated shields 1 262 73 262 74 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
outgoing
Used to isolate the connections between
each pole
1 262 66 Set of 3 insulated shields
1 262 64 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields
Pa d l o c k
193
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 194
DPXTM DPXTM
control and signalling auxiliaries common auxiliaries from 16 to 1 600 A
electronic test unit for DPX, DPX-IS, DPX-I
261 60 261 85 261 98 Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t o r

fault signal
A singly Cat.No 261 60
Pack Cat.Nos Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t o r f a u l t s i g n a l auxiliary contact or fault
signal
For signalling the state of the contacts or
opening of the MCCB on a fault
For DPX/DPX-I/DPX-IS from
16 A to 1 600 A
1 261 60 Changeover switch 3 A - 240 V
Releases
Allow remote tripping of a DPX
S h u n t releases
For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A U n d e r v o l t a g e releases
Shunt inrush power 300 VA
1 261 64 Coil voltage 24 V and ± =
For DPX 125, For DPX 160 U n d e r v o l t a g e releases
DPX-IS 250/ to 1600,
630 DPX-IS 1 600, For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A
DPX-I Undervoltage power consumption 5 VA
1 261 70 261 80 Coil voltage 24 V =
1 261 71 261 81 Coil voltage 24 V ± S h u n t releases
1 261 72 261 82 Coil voltage 48 V =
1 261 76 261 86 Coil voltage 110 V ±
1 261 73 261 83 Coil voltage 230 V ±
1 261 74 261 84 Coil voltage 400 V ±
Time-la g ( m s ) u n d e r v o l t a g e releases
Allow remote tripping of a DPX
Prevent false tripping in the event of AC
supply microbreaks
Require a time-lag module
connected to the undervoltage
releases below Time-la g u n d e r v o l t a g e releases
Number of
Time-lag modules modules
1 261 90 230 V ± 3
1 261 91 400 V ± 3 Max. nu m b e r o f contacts per DPX-IS dev i c e
Undervoltage releases
Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t S h u n t release
1 261 75 For DPX-IS, DPX 125 and DPX 160 Dev i c e
AC E BA C FS o r u n d e r v o l t a g e release
1 261 85 For DPX 250 ER to 1600
Without
r elease DPX-IS 250 1 2 – –
E l e c t ro n i c t e s t u n i t
With DPX-IS 250 1 1 1 1
r elease
1 261 98 For checking the operating characteristics
of an electronic MCCB via 2 n electronic
unit PALM III C AC = auxiliary contact
• identification of the undervoltage release EBAC = "early" auxiliary contact
• checking correct operation of the FS = break on trip contact
undervoltage release
• monitoring of trip curves Max. nu m b e r o f contacts per DPX dev i c e
• memorisation of causes of last trip:
overload, short-circuit (instantaneous or Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t S h u n t release
short delay), earth fault and phase affected Dev i c e
o r u n d e r v o l t a g e release
AC FS
• memorisation of number of occasions the
device has tripped on a fault since DPX 125 1 1 1
installation DPX 160 1 1 1
• measurement of current values for each
phase DPX 250 ER 1 1 1
• measurement of internal temperatures of DPX 250 2 1 1
the device
DPX 630 2 2 1
DPX 1 600 3 1 1
194
ex25027_178-195.qxd 28/12/05 18:05 Page 195
residual current relay and separate coils residual current relay and separate coils
for DPX and DPX-I
Re s i d u a l c u r r e n t relay Ca t.No 260 88

60
35 6 44
19 18 17 4 5 6
Delay
(s)
88
90
45
35
Trip On
60
40
20
Reset Test
20 21 1 2 3
C o i l s C a t.Nos 260 92/93/94/95/96 C o i l C a t.No 260 97

260 88 260 93 coil for use with relay
22
6
L
L
C
A
M
D
D
5
E B 45 34
5.5 E 79
H
23
260 98
H
B
Add residual current protection to trip-free DPX MCCBs and switches
equipped with shunt trip or undervoltage release
Ca t . N o s A B C D E H L M
Pack Cat.Nos Re s i d u a l c u r r e n t relay 260 92 35 75 85 42 92 36 43 56
Detects fault currents, and, when used with a shunt 260 93 80 108 132 67 125 36 65 56
trip or an undervoltage release, it gives the trip 260 94 110 148 170 86 165 36 84 56
command to on MCCB or a switch 260 95 140 177 206 104 200 36 102 56
• Comprises: 260 96 210 270 295 150 290 44 145 64
- a tinged, sealable window 260 97 150 225 259 133 245 275 95 113
- an auxiliary contact
- a green Led indicating energisation
- 3 yellow Leds indicating respectively the max.
phase earth insulation current: 20, 40 and 60 %
- a red Led indicating
Fixed: exceeding of the insulation fault current value Ca t.No 260 98
Flashing: breaking of one of the connections
between coils and relays
7
• For use with coils:

21
- Ø 35 and 80 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.15,
0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A
- Ø 110 to 210 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5,
5
7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A

- Ø 150 mm
58
Adjustable sensitivity: 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5,

10, 15, 20, 30 A
- Ø 300 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15,
20, 30 A
• Adjustable trip: 0, 0.15, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 seconds
2 modules • Supply voltage: 230/240 V - 50/60 Hz
310 30
1 260 88 Residual current relay to clip on rail
368
400
Coils
For use with residual current relay Cat.No 260 88
(above) 1 coil per DPX
1 260 92 Coil Ø 35 mm
1 260 93 Coil Ø 80 mm
1 260 94 Coil Ø 110 mm
1 260 95 Coil Ø 140 mm
1 260 96 Coil Ø 210 mm
1 260 97 Coil Ø 150 mm - open
1 260 98 Coil Ø 300 mm - open
195
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 196
DPXTM 125
■ Dimensions F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
u n d e r nea t h
97
97 101 10 74 8 50.8
101 74 8
75.6
12 12 37.8 8 32
45
210
193
120
193
120
101
101
45
45
32.25
45
25.4 25.4 M4
25.4 Ø 4.3 or M4
75.6 101 97
74 8
F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
u n d e r nea t h
97
101
101 74 8
120
101
45
45
25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4

45
210
M8
191
81
10
39
M4
45
32.25
25.4 25.4 25.4
M8
81
M4
39
10
A
D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX
75.5 60
25.4 8 74 48
20
A
DPX 125 170
11.2

103
260
80
80
mounted side by side

40.2
12.7 M4
20
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
s i d e b y s i d e(1)
202 97
101 101 Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
74
37.8 25.4 10
35
75.5
25.4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
120
103
45
11.25
62.75
103
80
8
12.7
113.7
12.7 M4
modules
196
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 197
DPXTM 160
■ Dimensions F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
u n d e r nea t h
120 8 97
97 30
120 74 8
9
90
45 8 23
150
45
150
150
247
265
45
45
M4
45
115
30 18 max. 30 23
14 30 30 M4 23
45 74 8
90 120 97
F i xe d v e r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
u n d e r nea t h
150
Y
45
30 30 30 30 30 74 8
150
45
45
X
55
247
265
241
95
55.5
48
161
158
45
115
30 30 30
74 8
120
97
45
M10
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d
s i d e b y s i d e(1)
95
48
M4
Y
240 97
8
120 120 74 8
30 M4 8
==
=
95
86
132
150
45
X
=
D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX
60
45 30
15 135 60
30 M4 8 74 48
Y
35
11.25
115
80
38.5
1.5 max.
15
75.5
A
Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
A 35
DPX 160 278 30 M4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
11.25
115
80
38.5
15
modules 75.5
197
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 198
DPXTM 250 ER
■ Dimensions F i xe d v e r s i o n w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d u n d e r n e a t h
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s Front terminals Rear terminals
8 18 Ø max. 120 8 18 Ø 18 max.

120
10 max.
90 18 30 30 30
10 max.
30 30 30
M4
M4
M4
91.5
176
145
115
45
45
45
38.5
53.5
237
267
298
62.7
62.7
107.7
69
1.6
45
45
30 30 30 18
20 max. 11.5
52.8
74
67.8
45
83.3
97
1.6
10 max.
30 30 30 18 74 11.5
8
74 11.5 97
20 max. 45
97
F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e
mounted side by side
160 A
Y
240
120 120
30 97
== 74
95
176
X
76.5
115
A
60
45 30
15 135
A
M4
Y
DPX 250 ER 296
DPX 250 ER + ear t h l e a k a g e
module 418
250 A
270
150
D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
30 30 30 15
30 30 30
282 max.
72 min.
60 35
30 M4 8 74 48 2/4
35
215.5
145
176
115
11.25
38.5
53.5
115
69
80
38.5
20 max.
1.5 max.
30 30 30 15
30 30 75.5
45
198
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 199
DPXTM 250
■ Dimensions Draw - o u t vers i o n , f ro n t t e r m i n a l s

187 140 (4 P)
34 45.5 105 (3 P)
105 20 52.35
5
140 105 32.5
100 70 17 •
36 34
35 17.5 4 min.
34
192.75
11
144.75
124.5
173.5
200
170
99.5
66.5
94
155
90
M5 X
10
94
449.5
353.5
313
25 52.5 27
35 35 35 35 35 138.5
24.75
F i xed vers i o n w i t h e a r th leaka g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d u n d e r nea t h(1) Ø9

138.5
105 138.5
140 34
11 36 105 4 min. 35 35 35
24 52.5
Y
10
100 Rear terminal with threaded rod

187 35 35
34 34 45.5
94
47.5
M12
278
93.5
281.5
308
108.75
99.5
66.5
155
173.5
35 35 35
90
10
94
24.75
93.5 M12
47.5
35 17.5
70 M5 27
Flat rear terminal

187 35 35
34 34 45.5 19
105 140 186.5
20 32.5 Ø9 10
81
26
108.75
99.5
37
4 4 min.
33
66.5
155
173.5
90
94
35 35 35
24.75
19 Ø9
66.5
341.5
26 10
245.5
200
90
94
81
37
Ø9
35 35 35 35 35 153
A
A
DPX 250 330
P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
105 186.5 mounted side by side 438
100 140 153
35 4 min. D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
265 max. 71.5
93 min.
100 40 58
66.5
173.5
173.5
200
90
2.5 max.
94
50 2/4
25
52.5 153
94
35 35 35 35 35
modules
199
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 200
DPXTM 630
■ Dimensions Draw - o u t vers i o n , f ro n t t e r m i n a l s

F i xe d v e r s i o n , f r o n t t e r m i n a l s 130 183 34 45.5 34
29
5
144
140 183 105 4 min. 34
32 70 32 70 17 50
265
398
100
302
265
130
100
155
94
X
15 max.
260
220
94
15 max.
94
24.7
14
43.5 43.5 43.5 187

43.5 87 M5 Y
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 27

F i xe d v e r s i o n w i t h e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e m o u n t e d u n d e r n e a t h
45.5 34
183 144 34
70 105 4 min. 144
21.75 17 50 43.5 43.5 43.5
32 105 4 min.
M 16
103
130
220
155
94
100
58
94
24.7
372
412
372
187
Flat rear terminal

45.5 34
87 Ø 6 or 34
M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 27
43.5 43.5 8
130
220
155
15
94
29
124
140 183 153

59
32 70 29
24.7
187
100 100
398
302
220
130
94
94
X
A
A
4 min.
DPX 630 390
Ø 14
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 192 DPX 630 + ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e
P l u g - i n ve r s i o n , r e a r t e r m i n a l s
140 183 192 D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX and va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r

70 153
265 max. 71.5
93 min.
100 40 58
100 100 50
220
265
130
94
94
47
X
94
4 min. 2.5 max. 2/4
200
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 201
DPXTM 1 250 - DPXTM 1 600
■ Dimensions
Y
Y 215
210 29
70 70 280
8
25 70 70 70 13 min.
100
169
20
25 max.
158
149
278
280
320
298
X 94 X
M12
M10 M8
70 35
50 5 140
140
Y
Y
280 (4 P) Vertical Horizontal

210 (3 P)
13 32 12.5 163 12.5
105 23 140 98 140
12
40
90
169
145.5
100
145.5
M8
68
56
273
273
118
94
320
94
X X
40
6 6
14 3 2.5 max. 3 2.5 max.
Y 238 188 238
13 32
Draw - o u t vers i o n , rear ter m i n a l s Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s

299 364
256 325 34.5
325
360
480
70 70 70 70 70
218.5
253
D i re c t ro t a t iv e handle on DPX Va r i - d e p t h h a n d l e o n d o o r
125
49 67.5 125
62.5 265 max. 81
62.5
93 min.
66.5
66.5
125
125
2.5 max. 2/4
201
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 202

[ DPX-I, DPX-IS, VISTOP, DX-IS ]
Main isolating switches,

isolating switches for rows,
circuits or groups of circuits
Isolating switches perform the isolation function by electrically
separating all or part of an installation to ensure the safety
of those working on it
The range:
The range of isolating switches comprises three main families:
Isolating switches with visible contact indication

The actual position of the contacts is clearly visible (for example, through a window)
DPX-IS VISTOP
• Isolation with visible contact • Isolation with visible contact
indication from 63 to 1600 A indication from 32 to 160 A
• Fixing on 2 rail or • Fixing on 2
on plate up to 250 A. rail or on plate
Above 250 A, fix on plate • External reversible
• Tripping version side handle or front handle
(common DPX auxiliaries)
NB: When the DPX-IS is equipped with a trip it becomes a trip-free isolating switch
Isolating switches with positive

contact indication Key facts
The position of the contacts and that of the handle
are linked (for example, when the handle
is in position O, the contacts are in open position) • Positive contact indication:
The position of the handle indicates
the position of the contacts
DX-IS
• Isolation with positive contact indication • Trip-free:
from 16 to 125 A This is obtained by the use
• Tripping version (common DX auxiliaries) of auxiliaries
• Red handle: main device
• Faulty contact indicator
• Fixing on rail2
202
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 203
Trip-free isolating switches

These enable remote opening of circuits
DMX-EI DPX-I
• Isolation • Isolation from 125 to 1600 A
from 630 to 4 000 A • Fixing on 2 rail or plate
• Fixed or draw-out up to 250 A.
version Above 250 A, fix on plate
How to select your isolating switch

4 criteria must be taken into consideration
when choosing your isolating switch:
In what type of distribution board

is it to be installed?
Main LV, secondary, control unit
What is its rating?

Directly dependent on the main power FOR MORE INFORMATION
Use of auxiliaries, remote control?
Information feedback See the online catalogue:
instructions, technical
What size? data sheets, etc.
For optimisation of the size of the enclosures
203
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 204
isolating switches
selection chart
VISTO P v i s i b l e l o a d b reak p. 206-207

Black handle
Ra t i n g ( A ) Fr o n t h a n d l e Side handle
3P 4P 3P 4P
32 224 98(1)/225 00 225 02 225 03(1)/05 225 07
63 225 12 225 15 225 16 225 18
100 225 20 225 22 225 25 225 27
125 225 34 225 39 225 44 225 46
160 225 51 225 53 225 54 225 56
(1) 2 P
D P X - I S v i s i b l e l o a d b reak p. 208-213
W i t h release W i t h o u t release
Right-hand Left-hand Right-hand Left-hand
Ra t i n g ( A ) Fr o n t h a n d l e Fr o n t h a n d l e
side handle side handle side handle side handle
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
63 266 30 266 34 266 40 266 44 266 50 266 54
100 266 31 266 35 266 41 266 45 266 51 266 55
160 266 32 266 36 266 42 266 46 266 52 266 56 266 02 266 06 266 12 266 16 266 22 266 26
250 266 33 266 37 266 43 266 47 266 53 266 57 266 03 266 07 266 13 266 17 266 23 266 27
400 266 72 266 74 266 76 266 78 266 80 266 82 266 60 266 62 266 64 266 66 266 68 266 70
630 266 73 266 75 266 77 266 79 266 81 266 83 266 61 266 63 266 65 266 67 266 69 266 71
800 265 91 265 95
1 000 265 92 265 96
1 250 265 93 265 97
1 600 265 94 265 98
DX-IS v i s i b l e l o a d b reak p. 225

W i t h release W i t h o u t release
Ra t i n g ( A )
2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 4P
16 043 01 043 21
20 043 02 043 22 043 42 043 62
32 043 05 043 25 043 45 043 65
40 023 56 023 76 043 07 043 27 043 47 043 67
63 023 57 023 77 043 10 043 30 043 50 043 70
100 023 58 023 78 043 14 043 34 043 54 043 74
125 023 59 023 79 043 38 043 58 043 78
DPX-I v i s i b l e l o a d b reak p. 214

Ra t i n g ( A ) Dev i c e s 3P 4P
125 DPX-I 125 250 98 250 99
160 DPX-I 160 251 98 251 99
250 DPX-I 250 ER 252 98 252 99
250 DPX-I 250 253 98 253 99
400 DPX-I 630 255 86 255 87
630 DPX-I 630 255 88 255 89
800 DPX-I 1 600 257 94 257 95
1 250 DPX-I 1 600 257 96 257 97
1 600 DPX-I 1 600 257 98 257 99
204
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 205
VistopTM 32 A VistopTM 32 A
full load break isolating switches full load break isolating switches
Conform to standards IEC NF EN 60947-3, BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660

NBN EN 60947-3 Veritas approved
Red handle/yellow frontplate conform to VDE 0113, IEC 60 204-1,
EN 60 204
Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960 °C
(NF C 20-455)
Handle can be locked in "OFF" position with 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm
Accept the following NC + NO auxiliary contacts Cat.Nos 227 03/08:
- 1 or 2 contacts (on handle side)
■ E l e c t r i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s
Ther m a l rat i n g ( I t h )(1) 32 A
Ter m i n a l s cages
225 05 225 02
Connection Cu 6 to 16 mm2
I n s u l a t i o n vo l t a g e ( U i ) 690 V ±
Safety switch for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation I m p u l s e r e s i s t a n t c u r r e n t vo l t a g e ( U i m p ) 8 kV
of the contacts
"Double break" type load switching with self-cleaning contacts by rapid 400 V 32 A (17 kW)
AC 22 A (2)
make and break movements 500 V 32 A (20 kW)
400 V 32 A (17 kW)
2 ve r s i o n s
AC 23 A(2) 500 V 20 A (14 kW)
• With handle on side of the unit for flange mounting: supplied complete
with gasket, screws and 30 to 170 mm extension shaft (supplied with 690 V -
the unit) Peak cur r ent (kA) 5
• With handle on front of the unit which can be used for a door interlock 1 s re s i s t a n t c u r r e n t
facility to prevent the opening of an enclosure whilst circuits are ( k A r ms) (Icw) 0.5
energized (Cat.No 227 34 below to be ordered separately) Icc with fuse (kA rating) 100
Max. rat i n g o f f u s e s 32 A (gG)

20 A (aM)
Pack Cat.Nos Black handle
S h o r t - c i rc u i t c a p a c i t y
Front Side No of 17.5 mm modules ( k A p ro s p e c t iv e peak) (Icm) 0.75
Connection
handle handle Side handle removed
Mec h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e ( N o o f o p e r a t i o n s ) > 10 000
1 224 98 225 03 2P 4 3.5
16 mm2 IP 2x (16 mm2)
1 225 00 225 05 3P cage terminals 4 3.5 Index o f p ro t e c t i o n IP 3x
under front plate
1 225 02 225 07 4P 5 4.5
AC: alternating current AC 22 A: Resistive motor breaking
A = use with frequent operations AC 23 A: Inductive motor breaking
■ Dimensions
Accessories Fr o n t h a n d l e
L e f t - h a n d s i d e c o n t ro l Cat.Nos 224 98 - 225 00/02
Kit comprising: angle linking plate, fixing 2 P. 3 P : 70 max. : 191 mm 63
screws, front cover and technical sheet 4 P : 83 min. : 53 mm 44
Ø5
1 227 30 For black handle
Fr o n t ex t e r n a l c o n t ro l
Kit comprising: connecting rod, racket,
drilling template and mounting accessories
51
92
82
53
45
1 227 34 Door distance 46 to 91 mm

A u x i l i a r y sw i t c h f o r o n / o f f s i g n a l l i n g
5 A - 250 V ± Connection
55
1 227 03 N/C +N/O 2 P.3 P : 26 88
lug 2.58 4 P : 39 92
1 227 08 2 set of N/C + N/O
2P 3P 4P
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.240 0.290
Side handle
Cat.Nos 225 03/05/07
2 P. 3 P : 9 8 . 5 69.5
4 P : 111 . 5 44
Ø 5
51
92
82
53
45
2 P.3 P : 2 6 28
65
4 P : 39 62
2P 3P 4P
Weight (kg) 0.300 0.320 0.370
Mounting on rail 4 or with 4 x M5 screws

(1) Continuity of service 8 h - IEC 60947-1
(2) Test conditions in accordance with IEC 60947-3
205
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 206
VistopTM 63 to 160 A
visible load break isolating switches, screws or 4 rail fixing
din-rail mounting
225 15 225 18 225 53 227 22
227 98 227 32
Technical information and dimensions (p. 207)
Safety isolating switches with visible breaking of load and positive action of the contacts
Double breaking of the phases by self-cleaning snap open/close action contacts
Label holders for identification of the circuits
Connection via cage terminals tightened by Allen key (except 63 A ; by PZ 2 screws)
Screw-fixing or on EN 50022 4 rail (only on rail for 63 A Vistop)
Two versions for mounting on faceplate:
• With left or right external side handle with seal to maintain the IP protection (up to IP 55), mounting accessories, self-adhesive drilling template,
adjustable extension rod (30 to 170 mm)
• With direct or external front handle with Cat.No 227 32 to be ordered separately
Possibility of attaching a 2-pole - 16 A auxiliary isolating switch Cat.No 227 22, or one or two N/C + N/O auxiliary Cat.No 227 04/07
Pack Cat.Nos Black handle Pack Cat.Nos Au x i l i a r y isola t i n g sw i t ch 2-pole - 16 A - 400 V

Front Side 63 A No of 17.5 mm For creating 3 or 4-pole assemblies for simultaneous
handle handle modules breaking of 2-pole auxiliary power supply
1 225 12 225 16 3-pole 7 (PLC, remote control), 16 A maximum
1 225 15 225 18 4-pole 7 Mounts on the left side of Vistop 100 to 160 A
No of 17.5 mm
100 A Connection modules
1 225 20 225 25 3-pole 7.5 1 227 22 2 P Cage terminals 1.5
1 225 22 225 27 4-pole 9
125 A
1 225 34 225 44 3-pole 7.5 Seala b l e t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
1 225 39 225 46 4-pole 9 1 227 98 Set of 2 separate, sealable terminal shields
160 A Clip on upstream and/or downstream of
1 225 51 225 54 3-pole 7.5 Vistop 100 to 160 A
1 225 53 225 56 4-pole 9
F u l l l o a d i s o l a t i n g sw i t c h u n i t s u p t o 1 6 0 A
(p. 217)
Fr o n t ex t e r n a l h a n d l e
Kit comprising: connecting rods, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories (including a seal for
maintaining the IP protection of
the enclosure up to IP 55) and locking
mechanism preventing the door being
opened when the circuit is closed
For Vistop fixing on rail4 Door distance
or using screws (mm)
1 227 32 63, 100, 125 et 160 A 35 to 470
A u x i l i a r y sw i t c h e s f o r o n - o f f
signalling IP 2x - 5A - 250V
N/O + N/C contact
For incorporation in one-piece enclosure
1 227 04 Main contact
1 227 07 Additional N/C + N/O Door distance
auxiliary contact for (mm)
2 N/C + 2 N/O mounting lug 2.58
206
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 207
VistopTM 63 to 160 A
visible load break isolating switches
Conform to standards NF C 63-130, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3, ■ Dimensions

BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660, NBN EN 60947-3,
CNOMO E03 - 15-611 R, Veritas approved Accept auxiliary contacts N/C + N/O (Cat.No 227 04/07) 1 or 2
Version with red handle/yellow front plate conforms to standards NF C (side handle) (p. 206)
79-130, VDE 0113, IEC 60204-I, EN 60204 Fr o n t h a n d l e
Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960°C
(IEC NF EN 60695-2-1) 98
Handle can be padlocked in open position using 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm 74
C1
60
78
C2
83
63
45
Isola t i n g
Ther m a l s w i t ch
r at i n g ( I t h ) 63 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 16 A (4) 22
6 44
Ter m i n a l s cage cage cage cage cage
C min. 114 - max. 523
C o n n e c - Cu (flex i b l e ) 4 to 352 4 to 50 mm2 62
tion Cu (rigid) 4 to 502 4 to 70 mm2 62
Insulating voltage
Side handle
(Ui)
690 V ± 800 V ± 800 V ± 800 V ± 400 V ±
C1 8 32
I m p u l s e re s i s t a n t
8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV -
24
v o l t a ge (U imp)
400 V 63 A (35 kW) 100 A (55 kW) 125 A (70 kW) 160 A (88 kW) 16 A
AC 22 A
C2
83
66
63
45
500 V 63 A (44 kW) 100 A (69 kW) 125 A (87 kW) 160 A (110 kW) -
AC 23 A (1)
690 V 40 A (38 kW) 100 A (96 kW) 125 A (120 kW) 125 A (120 kW)
22.5
DC 22 A/250 V(1) (2) * 100 125 125 16 A 22

C1 C1 C1 16
44 6
DC 23 A/250 V(1) (2) * 100 125 125 10 A 60 C 50
15 15 15 15 2
(Icu) (kA peak)
1 s re s i s t a n t c u r r e n t Fr o n t h a n d l e Exter nal side handle
2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 1
( k A r ms) (Icw)
63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A 63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A
Icc 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P
with fuses 100 100 100 80 100 C 125 133 160 125 133 160
(kA r ms)
C1 17.7 26.7 17.7 26.7
F u s e r u p t u re 100 A (gG) 125 A (gG) 160 A (gG) C2 90 91 90 91
63 A -
ca p a c i t y 63 A (aM)(3) 125 A (aM)(3) 125 A (aM)
S h o r t c i rc u i t c a p a c i t y
( k A p r o s p e c t i v e peak) 7 12 12 12 1
(Icm)
Mec h a n i c a l ■ E x a m p l e o f m o u n t i n g w i t h Vistop 100 to 160 A

e n d u ra n c e > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000
Front external handle
( N o o f o p e rat i o n s )
Cat.No 227 32
IP 2x B
(IP 3x C under
Index o f p ro t e c t i o n IP 2x B (IP 3x C under front plate) from 10 mm2
front plates)
from 6 mm2
Isolating
switch Vistop Sealable terminal
shields
Auxiliary Cat.No 227 98 Padlock
Cat.No 227 22 Cat.No 227 97
(1) Test conditions accordance with IEC 60947-3

AC = alternating current. DC = direct current. A = for frequent switching
AC 22 A/DC 22 A: resistive motor breaking
AC 23 A/DC 23 A: inductive motor breaking
(2) N° of breaking contacts: 2
(3) 100 A (aM) with blade type cartridge fuses
(4) Values correspond to the device mounted on Vistop 100 - 125 - 160 A
207
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 208
DPX-IS 250 isolating switches

63 to 250 A
266 37 266 47
Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts
Connection with cage terminals
Padlock integrated in the handle
Supplied with terminal shields
Category of use AC 23 A
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (see p. 209)
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Mounting accessories

Supplied without shunt trip Emergency handle
Can be associated with a residual current For replacement of standard handles
relay with separate coils (p. 195)
1 266 89 Front and right side emergency handle
3P 4P Fr o n t h a n d l e 1 266 90 Left side emergency handle
1 266 30 266 34 63 A
M o u n t i n g k i t fo r r e m o t e h a n d l e I P 5 5
1 266 31 266 35 100 A
Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets,
1 266 32 266 36 160 A drilling template, mounting accessories
1 266 33 266 37 250 A (including a seal for maintaining the IP up
to 55) and locking mechanism preventing
Right-hand side handle the door being opened when the circuit is
1 266 40 266 44 63 A closed
1 266 41 266 45 100 A 1 266 86 For remote front and side handle
1 266 42 266 46 160 A 1 266 87 For remote front and side emergency handle(1)
1 266 43 266 47 250 A Fixing accessories
Left-hand side handle 1 262 39 Plate for mounting on rail
1 266 50 266 54 63 A 1 262 99 Spacer for modules device
1 266 51 266 55 100 A Fits on rail 4 so that they can combined
1 266 52 266 56 160 A with the DPX-IS 250 on the same row
1 266 53 266 57 250 A Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
1 262 87 Set of 2
Locking accessories
D P X - I S w i t h o u t release 1 266 92 Ronis key lock
3P 4P Fr o n t h a n d l e Interlock
1 266 02 266 06 160 A 1 266 94 Interlock module (one for each DPX-IS)
1 266 03 266 07 250 A Provides the closing of 2 devices at the
same time
Right-hand side handle
1 266 12 266 16 160 A
1 266 13 266 17 250 A
Left-hand side handle Ca ge ter m i n a l s
1 266 22 266 26 160 A 1 262 88 Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max.
(rigid) or 150 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 266 23 266 27 250 A
S p readers
1 273 22 Set of upstream and downstream
spreaders
1 265 10 265 11 Set of upstream and downstream
spreaders
Common auxiliaries to DPX
see p. 194
(1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90
208
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 209
■ E l e c t r i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s M o u n t e d o n ra i l 4
72.5 105
Ra t i n g 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 70
Cu flex i b l e 150 mm2 35 74
Connection
Cu rigid / Alu 185 mm2 40.5 8.5
Copper bar Width max. 28 mm
N o m i n a l rat i n g ( U e ) 690 V ± - 250 V=
138
27
35
45
42
Ra t e d i n s u l a t i o n vo l t a ge (Ui) 800 V±
Ra t e d i m p u l s e w i t h s t a n d 11.5
8 kV±
vo l t a ge (Uimp)
400 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 1
75
A C 23 A
690 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 160 A 195 76.5
A C 22 A 690 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A

S h o r t - c i rc u i t m a k i n g c a p a c i t y
(kA ef f i c i e n t ) 40 kA With ter minal shields
(Icm)
I admissible ls (Icw) 12 kA efficient 105 72.5 85.5
I admissible with fuse (Icc) 100 kA efficient 70
gG 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 35 74
Max. rat i n g o f f u s e
aM 63 A 100 A 160 A 160 A
m e ch a n i c a l 25 000 operations
60
E n d u ra n c e
electrical
2 500 operations
±
129
(AC 23 - 400 V ) 11.5
Index o f p ro t e c t i o n IP 20 front panel
258
138
42
45
40.5
■ Dimensions
Fr o n t h a n d l e
90 Ø 18 max. 8 74 50 min. 32
18 140 55
10 max.
17.5 35 35 35 300 max.

8 195
11.5
M4
M4
10 max.
138
45
77
42
45
77
1.5 ■ Mounting
28
max. 1-6 11.5 M o u n t e d o n ra i l w i t h p l a te (XL3 400 p. 209, XL3 800 p. 224)
35 35 35 18
160 74 40.4 Spacer
195 262 99
R i g h t l a t e ra l h a n d l e
90 Ø 18 max.
18
10 max.
17.5 35 35 35
8
M4
10 max.
138
45
77
Plate 262 39
28
1-6 11.5
max. 18
35 35 35
195 74 40.4
L e f t l a t e ra l h a n d l e
Distribution terminal
90° 048 68
35 35 35 17.5
138
77
28
max.
35 35 35
195
209
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 210

400 to 630 A
266 62 266 70 262 50 262 51
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 194)
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories

Supplied without shunt trip Ca ge ter m i n a l s
Can be associated with a residual current
relay with separate coil (p. 195) 1 262 50 Set of 4 terminals for cables 300 mm2 max.
(rigid) or 240 mm2 max. (flexible)
3P 4P Fr o n t h a n d l e
1 262 51 Set of 4 terminals for cables 2 x 240 mm2
1 266 72 266 74 400 A max. (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 266 73 266 75 630 A 3P 4P S p readers
Right-hand side handle 1 262 48 262 49 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders
1 266 76 266 78 400 A Rear ter m i n a l s
1 266 77 266 79 630 A 1 263 50 263 51 Set of upstream and downstream swivel
Left-hand side handle rear terminals
1 266 80 266 82 400 A 1 263 52 263 53 Set of upstream and downstream flat rear
1 266 81 266 83 630 A terminals
D P X - I S w i t h o u t release
3P 4P Fr o n t h a n d l e
1 266 60 266 62 400 A
1 266 61 266 63 630 A
Right-hand side handle
1 266 64 266 66 400 A
1 266 65 266 67 630 A
Left-hand side handle
1 266 68 266 70 400 A
1 266 69 266 71 630 A
Mounting accessories
Emergency handle
For replacement of standard handles
1 266 89 Front and right side emergency handle
1 266 90 Left side emergency handle
M o u n t i n g k i t fo r r e m o t e h a n d l e I P 5 5
Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets,
drilling template, mounting accessories
(including a seal for maintaining the IP up
to 55) and locking mechanism preventing
the door being opened when the circuit is
closed
1 266 86 For remote front and side handle
1 266 87 For remote front and side emergency handle(1)
1 262 45 Set of 2
Locking accessor y
1 266 97 Ronis key lock
Common auxiliaries to DPX
see p. 194
(1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90
210
ex25027_196-211.qxd 28/12/05 18:08 Page 211
■ E l e c t r i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s L e f t l a t e ra l h a n d l e
327.5
Ra t i n g 400 A 630 A
Cu flex i b l e 1 x 240 or 2 x 185 mm2 265
Connection 43.5 43.5 48
Cu rigid/Alu 1 x 300 or 2 x 240 mm2 17
90
132
Copper bar width max. 32 mm
˚
N o m i n a l rat i n g ( U e ) 690 V A - 250 V=
M5
Ra t e d i n s u l a t i o n vo l t a ge (Ui) A
800 V
200
138
160
42
94
Ra t e d i m p u l s e w i t h s t a n d
8 kVA
vo l t a ge (Uimp)
400 VA 400 A 630 A
A C 23 A 500 VA 400 A 630 A 43.5 43.5 43.5 26 105

690 VA 400 A 630 A 181
A C 22 A 690 VA 400 A 630 A
DC 23 A 250 V= 400 A 630 A

S h o r t - c i rc u i t Fr o n t h a n d l e w i t h t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
making capacity (kA ef ficient) 40 kA
(Icm) 130.5 108.2
I admissible ls (Icw) 20 kA efficient 87
43.5
I admissible with fuse
100 kA
(kA ef ficient) (Icc)
65.3
gG 400 A 630 A
Max. rat i n g o f f u s e
aM 400 A 630 A
165.3
Mec h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e 15 000 operations
E l e c t r i c a l e n d u ra n c e
A 1 500 operations
(AC 23 - 400 V )
330.6
200
42
94
11
38.7
■ Dimensions
183.2 81.8 105
Fr o n t h a n d l e
265 116
48.1 43.5 43.5 105 38.2
32 max. 28 6
˚
90 17
200
138
42
15 max.
6
M5
Ø 25 max. 28 11
26.4 43.5 43.5 43.5
265
R i g h t l a t e ra l h a n d l e
327.5
265
48 43.5 43.5
17
˚
90
132
M5
200
160
138
42
94
105 26 43.5 43.5 43.5

181
211
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 212
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches

800 to 1 600 A
accessories
265 98 262 65
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 194)
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories

Supplied without shunt release Ca ge ter m i n a l s
Can be associated with a residual current
relay with separate coil (p. 195) 1 262 69 Set of 1 terminal for cables
2 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid)
3P 4P Fr o n t h a n d l e or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 265 91 265 95 800 A 1 262 70 Set of terminal for cables
1 265 92 265 96 1 000 A 4 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid)
1 265 93 265 97 1 250 A or 4 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 265 94 265 98 1 600 A S p readers
3P 4P pole to be connected
Mounting accessories 1 262 73 262 74 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders
3P Seala b l e t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
4P Rear ter m i n a l s
1 262 64 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, upstream or
downstream
Insulation shields 1 263 80 263 82 Short terminals
Used to isolate the connections between
each pole 1 263 81 263 83 Long terminals
1 262 66 Set of 3 insulation shields E x t e n d e d f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
1 262 67 Short terminals
1 262 68 Long terminals
Control and Residual

signalling current relay
auxiliaries and coils
see p. 194 see p. 195
212
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 213
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches
■ E l e c t r i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s ■ Dimensions
Ra t i n g 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Fr o n t h a n d l e w i t h t e r m i n a l s h i e l d s
Cu flexible 2 x 185 mm2 or 4 x 185 mm2
280 204
C o n n ex i o n Cu rigide 2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2 70 70 70 64
Alu 2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2
Copper bar 50 mm or 80 mm
205
±
169
N o m i n a l rat i n g ( U e ) 690 V
158
149
100
Ra t e d i n s u l a t i o n vo l t a ge (Ui) 690 V±
280
320
298
278
Ra t e d i m p u l s e
42
94
w i t h s t a n d vo l t a g e ( U i m p ) 8 kV ±
24 max.
400 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
A C 23 A 500 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
690 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A

35 M12
5 140
DC 23 A 250 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 25 140 M10
50 210
I a d m i s s i b l e i s fo r 1 s ( I c w ) 20 kA efficient
I admissible with fuse (Icc) 100 kA efficient
Max. rat i n g o f f u s e 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s

S h o r t - c i rc u i t m a k i n g c a p a c i t y
(kA peak) (Icm) 40 kA
Mec h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e 10 000
E l e c t r i c a l e n d u ra n c e
3 000 3 000 2 000 2 000
(AC 23 A - 400 V ) ±
320
213
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 214
DPX-ITM 125 to 1 600 A DPX - ITM 125 to 1 600 A

trip-free switches technical characteristics
DPX-I 125 DPX-I 160 DPX-I 250 ER DPX-I 250 DPX-I 630 DPX-I 1 600
Ra t e d 50/60 Hz 500 500 500 690 690 690
o p e rat i n g
vo l t a ge d i re c t
Ue (V) 250 250 250 250 250 250
Ra t e d
insulat i o n 500 500 500 690 690 690
v o l t a ge Ui (V ) ±
Ra t e d i m p u l s e
w i t h s t a n d vo l t a g e 6 6 6 8 8 8
Uimp (kV)
Ra t e d cl o s i n g
ca p a c i t y
on 400 V 3 3.6 4.3 4.3 13 40
s h o r t - c i rc u i t
Icm (kA)
250 99 253 99 Shor t-time
r e s i s t iv e
c u r rent t=1s 1.7 2.1 3 3 7.6 20
Icw (kA)
Dimensions (p. 64 to p. 75) E n d u ra n c e
(o. c c yc le)
m e ch a n i c a l 8 500 7 000 7 000 7 000 4 000 2 500
Conform to IEC 60947-3 electrical 1 500 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 500
Category of use AC 23 A Conve n t i o n a l
t h e r m a l c u r r ent (A) 125 160 250 250 630
1 600
Trip-free switches for on-load circuit breaking and isolation of low voltage
electrical circuits A C 23 A (690 V ±) 125 160 250 250 630 1 600
Can be associated to earth leakage modules or to corresponding DPX (500 V) (500 V) (500 V)
residual current relays
Mount on rail 2 up to DPX 250 ER
Connection identical to corresponding DPX
■ Dimensions
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-I 125 Dimensions of DPX-I identical to corresponding DPX
3P 4P In
1 250 98 250 99 125 A DPX-I Dimensions
DPX-I 125 DPX 125 (see p. 64-65)
DPX-I 160 DPX 160 (see p. 66-67)
DPX-I 160
DPX-I 250 ER DPX 250 ER (see p. 68-69)
3P 4P In DPX-I 250 DPX 250 (see p. 70-71)
1 251 98 251 99 160 A
DPX-I 630 DPX 630 (see p. 72-73)
DPX-I 1 600 DPX 1 600 (see p. 74-75)
DPX-I 250 ER
3P 4P In
1 252 98 252 99 250 A
DPX-I 250
3P 4P In
1 253 98 253 99 250 A
DPX-I 630
3P 4P In
1 255 86 255 87 400 A
1 255 88 255 89 630 A
DPX-I 1 600
3P 4P In
1 257 94 257 95 800 A
1 257 96 257 97 1 250 A
1 257 98 257 99 1 600 A
C o m m o n a u x i l i a r i e s t o D P X (p. 194)
214
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 215
20 A isolating switch 20 A isolating switch

full load break isolating switch full load break isolating switch
Conform to standard IEC NF EN 60947-3
T h e r m a l rat i n g 20 A
Rigid 102
Copper connection Flexible 0.75 to 62
with ferrules
I n s u l a t i o n vo l t a g e 690 V
AC 22 A 500 V 20 A
400 V 16 A
AC 23 A
690 V 10 A
1 s re s i s t a n t c u r r e n t ( k A e f f i c i e n t ) 0.35
I c c w i t h f u s e ( k A ) rat i n g 20
Max. rat i n g o f f u s e s 25
224 90 + 227 33 224 94 S h o r t c i rc u i t m a k i n g c a p a c i t y ( I c m ) 1 kA
Mec h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e
( N o o f o p e rat i o n s ) 100 000
Index o f p ro t e c t i o n IP 2x (wired)
Safety switch for on load circuit breaking by visible isolation

of the contacts
"Double break" type load switching with self
cleaning contacts by rapid make and break movements ■ Dimensions
Cat.No 224 90
Pack Cat.Nos Fr o n t c o n t ro l , re d h a n d l e 44 18.5
1 224 90 3 P
A d d i t i o n a l n e u t ra l p o l e
45
75
1 224 94 For making 3 P + N

27
Off (O)
Accessories
1 227 00 N/C + N/O auxiliary contact 55
2 independent electrical contacts
Rating: 4 A, 440 V (AC - 15 A)
1 227 33 Kit for front control with padlocking of door
66
66 33
Cat.No 224 94
17.5 12
33.5
75.5
48.5
■ M o u n t i n g o f k i t C a t.No 227 33
Usa b l e d e p t h ( x )
min. max.
Without
kit axis 85 mm 100 mm
With
kit axis 125 mm 255 mm
215
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 216
full load switch units full load switch units

12 and 25 A - IP 65 technical characteristics
proximity switching
■ Tech n i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s
Conform to IEC 60947-3, VDE 0113, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60204-1
NF EN 60204-1
Ithe (thermal current in enclosure) = 12 A for 12 A - 25 A for 25 A
IP 65 according to IEC 60529 and NF C 20-070
Insulating voltage UI = 690 V - Self-extinguishing at 960°
Duty ca te g o r i e s
226 60/62 226 00/04
AC 21 12 A (8.5 kW) 25 A (17 kW)
AC 3
3 x 400 V 7 A (5.5 kW) 13.5 A (7.5 kW)
3 x 690 V 3.5 A (3 kW) 8 A (7.5 kW)
226 60 226 02
Connection
For on-load circuit breaking, isolation and locking equipment located 12 A: Max. 4 mm2 (fixed) - 2.5 mm2 (flexible)
remotely from a control cabinet 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 19 mm PG 11 (Ø cable 10 mm max.)
Applications: 25 A: Max. 6 mm2 (fixed) - 6 mm2 (flexible with lugs)
Motors, fixed or mobile machines, air conditioners 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 23 mm PG 16 (Ø cable 14 mm max.)
Can also be used as a:
• general switch
• emergency breaker
• emergency stop
Totally isolated enclosure - IP 65 ■ Dimensions
Black base 12 A 25 A
Red front-mounted rotary knob on yellow background for immediate visual
identification from a distance (position 0: open, position I: closed) Cat.Nos 226 60/62 Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04
The rotary knob can take up to 4 padlocks (Ø 6 mm)
in position 0
76
120
109
Pack Cat.Nos 12 A - IK 08
76 58
Fo r b re a k i n g / i s o l a t i n g a s i n g l e s p e e d m o t o r 97
Supplied complete with 2 x 6 mm2 relay terminal 96 ø 4.5 77
109
1 226 60 3-pole
1 226 62 3-pole + N
N can be used as a contact for report of position F i x i n g c e n t res
12 A 25 A
Cat.Nos 226 60/62 Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04
25 A - IK 07
65
Supplied complete with 2 anti-fraud locking screws

109
and 1 relay terminal for continuity of neutral or earth

50
(2 x 10 mm2)
Fo r b re a k i n g / i s o l a t i n g a s i n g l e s p e e d m o t o r Ø 4.5 (for screw M4)
Ø 4.5 (for screw M4)
1 226 00 3-pole
Can incorporate a contact for remote control
1 226 02 3-pole + N
N can be used as a contact for report of position
Fo r b re a k i n g / i s o l a t i n g a t wo - s p e e d m o t o r
1 226 04 6-pole
216
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 217
full load isolating switch units full load isolating switch units
32 to 160 A - IP 65 technical characteristics
I d e n t i c a l t o c o r r e s p o n d i n g V i s t o p i s o l a t i n g sw i t c h
S w i t ch u n i t s Ca t . N o s C h a ra c t e r i s t i c s
32 A 226 05/07 Vistop 32 A p. 205
63 A 226 15/17 Vistop 63 A p. 206
100 A 226 25/27 Vistop 100 A p. 206
125 A 226 33/34 Vistop 125 A p. 206
160 A 226 35/37 Vistop 160 A p. 206
■ Dimensions 32 to 160 A
C E
226 37
B D
Units Ca t . N o s A B C D E
226 17 supplied 226 05/07 32 A 200 160 218 93 93
with 2
cable glands 226 15/17 63 A 290 190 263 95 102
226 25/27/33/34 100/125 A 332 262 316 132 132
226 07 226 35/37 160 A 382 292 346 132 132
Vistop with side red handle, yellow front plate version mounted in a IP 65
plastic boxes with transparent hinged cover
Fitted with an auxiliary N/C + N/O contact for position signal
Vistop padlockable in open position
For agricultural machinery, textile industry machines, printing presses,
wood-working or plastic industries, lifting bridges, industrial process
rotating electrical machines
Pack Cat.Nos S w i t ch u n i t s w i t h f u l l l o a d b re a k i s o l a t i n g
s w i t ches Vistop - IK 07
32 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 21 P - ISO 25
Earth terminal
Connection nominal capacity
1 226 05 3 P
16 mm2 cage terminals 10 mm2
1 226 07 4 P
63 A
1 226 15 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2
1 226 17 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
100 A
1 226 27 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
125 A
1 226 34 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
160 A
1 226 37 4 P 2
50 mm flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
217
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 218
[ P R OT E CT I O N ]
LR residual current circuit

breakers and switches
The new LR range provides a simple solution for the protection
requirements of people and property on the domestic market. It is
easy to incorporate in Ekinoxe NX distribution cabinets: an efficient,
high-performance system
The range
40 A
TYPE AC
20 mA
I - ON
RCDs O- OFF
• Ratings 25 to 63 A
• Sensitivity 30, 100 and 300 mA Socket
• 2 P and 4 P circuits
• Surface mounted cylindrical
test button
C16 C16 C16 C20 C20
I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON
O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF
EKINOXE NX
16 A 16 A 16 A 20 A 20 A
• A range from 4 to 36 modules
flush or surface mounting 2.52 2.52 2.52 2.52 2.52
• White and transparent plastic
door or white metal door
Legrand advantages
1 Complete, short range

N Neutral
2 Special marking on front panel

L Phase
3 Clamps at the bottom for fixing on rail Earth
218
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 219
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
• Ratings 2 to 63 A
Lighting Specialised Heating • 1 P, 2 P, 3 P, 4 P
circuits circuits circuits • B and C curves
• Breaking capacity:
±
10 000 A on 127/220 V mains supply
±
6 000 A on 230/400 V mains supply
C10 C20 C32 C16 C16
I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON
O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF
10 A 20 A 32 A 16 A 16 A
1.52 2.52 62 1.52 1.52

instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
219
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 220
NEW
LRTM 6 000
thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 A to 63 A
B and C curves
6048 96 6048 50
Dimensions (p. 239)
Conform to IEC 60898

Breaking capacity:
6 000 - IEC 60898 - 230/400 V ±±
6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 230/400 V
10 000 - IEC 60898 - 127/220 V
10 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 127/220 V
±±
Do not accept auxiliaries
Pack Cat.Nos Single pole - 230/400 V ± Pack Cat.Nos 3-pole - 400 V ±

B curve C curve In Number of modules B curve C curve In Number of modules
10 6049 02 6048 02 6A 1 1 6049 32 6048 32 6A 3
10 6049 03 6048 03 10 A 1 1 6049 33 6048 33 10 A 3
10 6049 04 6048 04 13 A 1 1 6048 34 13 A 3
10 6049 05 6048 05 16 A 1 1 6049 35 6048 35 16 A 3
10 6049 06 6048 06 20 A 1 1 6049 36 6048 36 20 A 3
10 6049 07 6048 07 25 A 1 1 6049 37 6048 37 25 A 3
10 6049 08 6048 08 32 A 1 1 6049 38 6048 38 32 A 3
10 6049 09 6048 09 40 A 1 1 6049 39 6048 39 40 A 3
10 6049 10 6048 10 50 A 1 1 6049 40 6048 40 50 A 3
10 6049 11 6048 11 63 A 1 1 6049 41 6048 41 63 A 3
S i n g l e p o l e + n e u t ral(1) - 230 V ± 3-pole + neutral(1) - 400 V ±

C curve In Number of modules C curve In Number of modules
5 6048 90 6A 2 1 6047 96 6A 4
5 6048 91 10 A 2 1 6048 94 10 A 4
5 6048 92 13 A 2 1 6048 95 13 A 4
5 6048 93 16 A 2 1 6048 96 16 A 4
5 6047 90 20 A 2 1 6048 97 20 A 4
5 6047 91 25 A 2 1 6048 98 25 A 4
5 6047 92 32 A 2 1 6048 99 32 A 4
5 6047 97 40 A 4
2-pole - 400 V ± 1 6047 98 50 A 4
1 6047 99 63 A 4
B curve C curve In Number of modules
5 6049 17 6048 17 6A 2
5
5
6049 18
6049 19
6048 18
6048 19
10 A
13 A
2
2
4-pole - 400 V ±
C curve In Number of modules
5 6049 20 6048 20 16 A 2 1 6048 47 6A 4
5 6049 21 6048 21 20 A 2 1 6048 48 10 A 4
5 6049 22 6048 22 25 A 2 1 6048 50 16 A 4
5 6049 23 6048 23 32 A 2 1 6048 51 20 A 4
5 6049 24 6048 24 40 A 2 1 6048 52 25 A 4
5 6049 25 6048 25 50 A 2 1 6048 53 32 A 4
5 6049 26 6048 26 63 A 2 1 6048 54 40 A 4
1 6048 55 50 A 4
1 6048 56 63 A 4
(1) Neutral on right-hand side
Red catalogue numbers: New products
220
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 221
NEW
LRTM RCD LRTM
AC and A types technical characteristics
■ MCBs
Tech n i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s
• Maximun AC voltage : 230 - 400 V ±
=
• Maximun DC voltage : 80 V per pole
±
• Insulation voltage : 500 V
• Dielectric : 2 500 V±
• Curves : B and C
• Rating : 6 to 63 A
• Pole : 1 P, 1 P + N, 2 P, 3 P, 3 P + N, 4 P
• Conform to IEC 60898
6021 93 6021 53 Mec h a n i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s
Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation
10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9
Dimensions (p. 239) Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables
352 rigid cables
Applied connection torque : 2.5 Nm
Conform to IEC 61008-1 A g re m e n t s
VDE, ANCE
Pack Cat.Nos 2-pole - 230 V ±
AC type A type 30 mA
Nominal rating Number ■ RCD
(A) of modules
1 6021 36 25 2 Tech n i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s
1 6021 37 6021 93 40 2 • Type : AC and A
1 6021 38 63 2 • Sensitivity : 30 mA, 100 mA, 300 mA
• Pole : 2 P and 4 P
100 mA • Rating : 25, 40, 63 A
1 6021 39 25 2 • conform to IEC/EN 61008-1
1 6021 40 40 2 Mec h a n i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s
Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation
300 mA 10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9
1 6021 42 25 2 2 000 via test
1 6021 43 40 2 2 000 by fault current
Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables
1 6021 44 63 2 352 rigid cables
4-pole(1) - 400 V ±
AC type A type 30 mA
Nominal rating Number
(A) of modules
1 6021 46 25 4
1 6021 47 6021 94 40 4
1 6021 95 63 4
100 mA
1 6021 49 25 4
1 6021 50 40 4
300 mA
1 6021 52 25 4
1 6021 53 40 4
(1) Neutral on right-hand side
221
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 222

]
Modular
LEXIC
din-rail equipement
[
Lexic, Legrand's modular wiring accessories for rails 2, give you

the freedom to organise your distribution board as you please,
and give you a complete and innovative choice of functions
Choice
isolating add-on signalling

MCB switch RCD RCBO module auxiliary
command voltage surge push-button,

auxiliary motor MCB protector fuse carrier control switch indicators
pulse operated time-lag time delay light sensitive programmable

latching relay contactor switch relay switch time switch
buzzer, dimmer,
transformer bell socket outlet thermostat power supply remote dimmer
analogue energy digital energy measuring

Imocad metering device metering device central unit
222
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 223
LEXIC FREEDOM LEXIC SIMPLICITY LEXIC

OF INSTALLATION OF INSTALLATION OPERATIONAL SAFETY
• Standardized information
marking
Nominal
Rating
Cat.No
Breaking
Curve capacity
Class
• The auxiliaries common
• Busbar attachment to MCBS, isolating switches
• Distribution via busbar and RCDs, are mounted • Labelling using integrated
to the left of the devices label-holder on the device
• Add-on modules are mounted
to the right of MCBS
• Each device can be removed
independently, without
unscrewing
• Organization of rows
• Alignment quality of rows
• IP 2x screw terminals

Come and be trained Consult the E-Catalogue:
at Innoval Instructions, technical
data sheets, etc.
223
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 224
LEXIC
DX-E 6 000 - 6 kA
thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 to 63 A
B and C curves DXTM 6 000 , 6 kA >>>
Protection,
identification
032 70 034 33 033 28
and information
Dimensions (p. 239)
Technical characteristics (p. 78 and p. 79)
feedback
Breaking capacity
6 000 - IEC 60898 - 400 V AA
6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V
Pack Cat.Nos Single pole - 230/400 V ±

B C Nominal rating Number
curve curve (A) of modules
10 032 66 033 82 6 1
10 032 68 033 84 10 1
10 032 69 033 85 13 1
10 032 70 033 86 16 1
10 032 71 033 87 20 1
10 032 72 033 88 25 1
10 032 73 033 89 32 1
10 032 74 033 90 40 1
10 032 75 033 91 50 1
10 032 76 033 92 63 1
2-pole - 400 V ±
5 033 08 034 29 6 2
5 033 10 034 31 10 2
5 033 11 034 32 13 2
5 033 12 034 33 16 2
5 033 13 034 34 20 2
5 033 14 034 35 25 2
5 033 15 034 36 32 2
5 033 16 034 37 40 2
5 033 17 034 38 50 2
5 033 18 034 39 63 2
3-pole - 400 V ±
1 033 22 034 47 6 3
1 033 24 034 49 10 3
1 033 25 034 50 13 3
1 033 26 034 51 16 3
1 033 27 034 52 20 3
1
1
033 28
033 29
034 53
034 54
25
32
3
3
> Protection devices in consumer
1 033 30 034 55 40 3 units should always be
1 033 31 034 56 50 3
1 033 32 034 57 63 3 identifiable to allow immediate
intervention.
4-pole - 400 V ±
B
curve
C
curve
Nominal rating
(A)
Number
of modules
> The DXTM 6 000 has a label-holder,
1 033 68 034 89 6 4 ensuring that the protected circuit
1 033 70 034 91 10 4
1
1
033 71
033 72
034 92
034 93
13
16
4
4
is immediately identifiable, and
1 033 73 034 94 20 4 provides information feedback via
1 033 74 034 95 25 4
1 033 75 034 96 32 4 its auxiliairies.
1 033 76 034 97 40 4
1 033 77 034 98 50 4
1 033 78 034 99 63 4
Au x i l i a r i e s a n d a c c e s s o r i e s
f o r M C B s (p. 234)
Re s i d u a l c u r r ent dev i c e s (p. 226)
224
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 225
DXTM - IS
isolating switches
visible load break
073 61 023 58 043 22 043 26 043 74
Dimensions (p. 239)

Mounting on rail 4EN 60715

Breaking capacity AC 22 A according to IEC 60947 - 3
Double break contacts
Pack Cat.Nos Re m o t e t r i p h e a d i s o l a t i n g sw i t ch e s Pack Cat.Nos I s o l a t i n g sw i t c h e s ( c o n t i n u e d )
NEW
Visual indication of the actual state of the contacts: 3 P - 400 V ±
• Closed position or fault (red Led-I) Nominal Number
• Open position (green Led) on handle rating (A) of modules
In the event of a fault on opening, the red position 5 043 42 20 2
indicator signals the faulty pole, the handle in the 5 043 45 32 2
central position 3 043 47 40 3
Red handle (head device) 3 043 50 63 3
Common auxiliaries to DX (p. 234) 3 043 54 100 3
3 043 58 125 3
2 P - 400 V ± 4 P - 400 V ±
Nominal Number
rating (A) of modules 5 043 62 20 2
2 023 56 40 2 5 043 65 32 2
2 023 57 63 2 2 043 67 40 4
2 023 58 100 2 2 043 70 63 4
2 023 59 125 2 2 043 74 100 4
4 P - 400 V ± 2 043 78 125 4
1 023 76 40 4
1 023 77 63 4 Au x i l i a r i e s
1 023 78 100 4
1 023 79 125 4 Command auxiliaries
Mounting on isolating switch
I s o l a t i n g sw i t c h e s with release Number
Shunt releases of modules
1 P - 250 V ± 1 073 60 12 to 45 V / ± ±= 1
Nominal Number 1 073 61 110 to 415 V 1
rating (A) of modules 110 to 125 V =
10 043 01 16 1 Minimum voltage trip adjustable
10 043 02 20 1 from 0 to 300 ms
043 05 32 1 ±
±±==
10 1 073 65 24 V / 1
10 043 07 40 1 1 073 66 48 V / 1
10 043 10 63 1 1 073 68 230 V 1
10 043 14 100 1
Signalling auxiliaries
1 P w i t h i n d i c a tor - 250 V ± Mounting on all isolating
Supplied with lamp switches DX-IS
1 073 50 Auxiliary changeover switch 1
10 043 03 20 1
1 073 54
6 A - 250 V ±
- 3 auxilliaries max.
Auxiliary changeover switch + 1
fault signalling switch
2 P - 400 V ± (6 A - 250 V ) ±
Can be modified to 2 auxiliary
10 043 21 16 1 changeover switches
10 043 22 20 1
10 043 25 32 1
5 043 27 40 2 Accessories
5 043 30 63 2
5 043 34 100 2 2 044 42 Support for Ø 4 mm and Ø 6 mm padlock
5 043 38 125 2
3
1/3 044 43 Padlock Ø 4 mm
2 P w i t h i n d i c a tor - 250 V ±
Supplied with lamp 1 227 97 Padlock Ø 6 mm Screw cover
10 043 23 20 1
10 043 26 32 1 2 044 44 Sealable screw cover (4 separate poles)
6 044 47 Insulating shield
Insulating shield
Fo r t h ree-phase vers i o n , p l e a s e c o n s u l t u s
B o l d p a c k q u a n t i t i e s : Minimum quantities to be ordered

225
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 226
LEXIC
DXTM - RCDs
residual current devices
AC, A and Hpi types
086 95 090 53 090 74 091 47
Dimensions (p. 239)

Conform to IEC 61008 - 1

Pack Cat.Nos AC t y p e Pack Cat.Nos A t y p e ( c o n t i nu e d )
Detect AC component faults 4-pole - 400 V ±
2-pole - 230 V ± Neutral on left-hand side
Sensitivity Nominal rating Number Sensitivity Nominal rating Number
(A) of modules (A) of modules
1 089 06 10 mA 16 2 1 090 98 30 mA 25 4
1 089 09 30 mA 25 2 1 090 99 30 mA 40 4
1 089 10 30 mA 40 2 1 091 00 30 mA 63 4
1 089 11 30 mA 63 2 Neutral on right-hand side
1 089 12 30 mA 80 2 1 091 40 30 mA 25 4
1 089 15 100 mA 25 2 1 091 41 30 mA 40 4
1 089 16 100 mA 40 2 1 091 42 30 mA 63 4
1 089 17 100 mA 63 2 1 091 43 30 mA 80 4
1 089 18 100 mA 80 2 1 091 44(1) 30 mA 100 4
1 089 27 300 mA 25 2 1 091 46 100 mA 25 4
1 089 28 300 mA 40 2 1 091 47 100 mA 40 4
1 089 29 300 mA 63 2 1 091 48 100 mA 63 4
1 089 30 300 mA 80 2 1 091 49 100 mA 80 4
4-pole - 400 V ± 1 091 50(1) 100 mA 100 4
Neutral on left-hand side 1 091 58 300 mA 25 4
1 091 59 300 mA 40 4
1 086 93 30 mA 25 4 1 091 60 300 mA 63 4
1 086 94 30 mA 40 4 1 091 61 300 mA 80 4
1 086 95 30 mA 63 4 1 091 62(1) 300 mA 100 4
Neutral on right-hand side 1 091 65 300 mA (s) 40 4
1 089 93 30 mA 25 4 1 091 66 300 mA (s) 63 4
1 089 94 30 mA 40 4 1 091 71 500 mA 40 4
1 089 95 30 mA 63 4 1 091 72 500 mA 63 4
1 089 96 30 mA 80 4 1 091 73 500 mA 80 4
1 089 99 100 mA 25 4 1 091 74(1) 500 mA 100 4
1 090 00 100 mA 40 4
1 090 01 100 mA 63 4
1 090 02 100 mA 80 4 Hpi type (High immunity)
1 090 11 300 mA 25 4 NEW Enhanced immunity to unwanted tripping in
1 090 12 300 mA 40 4 disturbed environments
1 090 13 300 mA 63 4 Detect AC and DC component faults (A type)
1 090 14 300 mA 80 4
1 090 18 300 mA (s) 40 4 2-pole - 230 V
Sensitivity
±
1 090 19 300 mA (s) 63 4 (A) of modules
1 090 23 500 mA 25 4 1 088 22 30 mA 25 2
1 090 24 500 mA 40 4 1 088 23 30 mA 40 2
1 090 25 500 mA 63 4 1 088 24 30 mA 63 2
1 090 26 500 mA 80 4
4-pole - 400 V ±
Neutral on right-hand side
A type
1 6021 08 30 mA 25 4
Detect AC and DC component faults 1 6021 09 30 mA 40 4
2-pole - 230 V ± 1 6021 10 30 mA 63 4
Sensitivity Nominal rating Number
(A) of modules Au x i l i a r y ch a n g e ov er sw i t ch for 2 pole RCD
1 090 53 10 mA 16 2
1 090 56 30 mA 25 2 Clips on the left-hand side of the residual current
1 090 57 30 mA 40 2 device
1 090 58 30 mA 63 2 Allows insertion of the supply busbar at the top
1 090 59 30 mA 80 2 Indicates the position of the switches
1 090 74 300 mA 25 2 Compulsory if mounting other auxiliaries
1 090 75 300 mA 40 2 Number
1 090 76 300 mA 63 2 of modules
1 090 77 300 mA 80 2 1 073 52 6 A - 250 V ± 0.5
Au x i l i a r i e s a n d a c c e s s o r i e s (p. 234)
226
ex25027_212-227.qxd 28/12/05 18:11 Page 227
DXTM - IS performance of circuit breakers

isolating switches and RCDs
■ DX isolating switches - IS ■ C o n n e c t i o n c ro s s - s e c t i o n i n m m2
Approvals: NF USE, VDE, KEMA, BBJ (in process) Ca b l e
E l e c t r i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s RCDs
rigid f lex i b l e
T h e r m a l rat i n g ( H h ) 16 - 32 A 40 - 63 A 100 - 125 A Connection at top and bottom 35 25
f lex i b l e 1.5 to 25 mm2 6 to 35 mm2
Connection 1.5 to 16 mm2
rigid 1.5 to 35 mm2 4 to 50 mm2
I s o l a t i n g vo l t a g e ( H i ) 250 - 400 V ± 250 - 400 V ± 250 - 400 V ±
Impulse withstand
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV ■ AC t y p e - Standard a p p l i c a t i o n s
vo l t a ge (vimp)
O p e rat i n g c a t e g o r y AC 22 A(1) AC 22 A(1) AC 22 A(1) AC type RCDs detect AC residual currents
In the majority of cases (standard applications), they are used for AC
Per m i s s i b l e n o m i n a l
750 A 1 700 A 2 500 A current detection at 50/60 Hz
c u r r ent (Icw)
1 500 A 3 000 A 3 700 A
i n s h o r t - c i rc u i t ( I c m )
No. of e l e c t r i c a l o p e rat i o n s > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000
IP 2x IP 2x IP 2x
■ A type - Specific a p p l i c a t i o n s : d e d i c a t e d l i n e s
Pro t e c t i o n i n d ex
wired wired (> 25 mm2)
In addition to the characteristics of AC type RCDs, A type RCDs also
(1) test conditions according to IEC 60947-3
AC 22 A: combined motor/resistor breaking detect DC residual currents
They are used whenever fault currents are not sinusoidal
They are particularrly suitable for the following specific applications
O p e r a t i o n o f DX - IS r e m o t e t r i p h e a d i s o l a t i n g s w i t c h e s (dedicated lines) or materials may produce DC fault currents, speed
• DX-IS contacts in open position: drives with frequency inverters, etc.
■ Hpi type - Special a p p l i c a t i o n s

- handle in open position (O-OFF), Type Hpi RCDs are devices which offer additional immunity to
green Led unwanted tripping which significantly exceeds the level required
- no signal from the indicator by the standard
They are also able to detect AC and DC residual currents (A type)
Operation between - 25°C and + 40°C
They are used in special applications where:
• Loss of information is potentially damaging, e.g. power supply lines
• DX-IS contacts in closed position: for computer equipment (banks, equipment on military bases, flight
reservation centres, etc.)
• Loss of operation is potentially damaging (automated machinery,
medical equipment, freezer cable, etc.)
They are also used:
• On sites where there is an increased risk of lightning strikes
(see p. 240)
• On sites where cables are subject to high levels of interference
- handle's contact in closed position (I-ON), (use of fluorescents, etc.)
red Led • On sites where very long cables are used
- red indicator (I-ON)
• DX-IS contacts in open position, with one faulty pole:
- handle in central position

- red position indicator signals the faulty
pole (I-ON)
- immediate identification of the faulty pole
for direct intervention
227
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 228
LEXIC
DXTM 6 000 - 10 kA
thermal magnetic MCBs from 0.5 to 63 A
B and C curves
064 68 064 91 065 66
Dimensions (p. 239)

Breaking capacity
6 000 A - IEC 60898 - 400 V AA
10 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V

B C Nominal rating Number of B C Nominal rating Number of
curve curve (A) modules curve curve (A) modules
1 061 52 063 68 1 1 1 062 77 064 80 1 3
1 061 53 063 69 2 1 1 062 78 064 81 2 3
1 061 54 063 70 3 1 1 062 79 064 82 3 3
1 061 55 063 71 4 1 1 062 80 064 83 4 3
1 061 56 063 72 6 1 1 062 81 064 84 6 3
10 061 58 063 74 10 1 1 062 83 064 86 10 3
10 061 60 063 76 16 1 1 062 85 064 88 16 3
1 061 61 063 77 20 1 1 062 86 064 89 20 3
1 061 62 063 78 25 1 1 062 87 064 90 25 3
10 1 061 63 063 79 32 1 1 062 88 064 91 32 3
1 061 64 063 80 40 1 1 062 89 064 92 40 3
1 061 65 063 81 50 1 1 062 90 064 93 50 3
1 061 66 063 82 63 1 1 062 91 064 94 63 3
S i n g l e p o l e + n e u t r al - 230 V ± 3 - p o l e + n e u t r al - 400 V ±
NEW Neutral on right-hand side NEW Neutral on right-hand side
B C Nominal rating Number of B C Nominal rating Number of
curve curve (A) modules curve curve (A) modules
1 064 01 0.5 1 1 063 31 065 39 6 4
1 061 89 064 03 1 1 1 063 34 065 41 10 4
1 061 95 064 04 2 1 1 063 36 065 43 16 4
1 061 96 064 05 3 1 1 063 37 065 44 20 4
1 061 97 064 06 4 1 1 063 38 065 45 25 4
1 061 98 064 07 6 1 1 063 39 065 46 32 4
10 062 00 064 09 10 1 1 063 40 065 47 40 4
10 062 02 064 12 16 1 1 063 41 065 48 50 4
1 062 03 064 13 20 1 1 063 42 065 49 63 4
1 062 04 064 14 25 1
1 062 05 064 15 32 1
1 062 06 064 16 40 1 4-pole - 400 V ±
C Nominal rating Number of
curve (A) modules
2-pole - 400 V ± 1
1
065 55
065 56
1
2
4
4
B C Nominal rating Number of
curve curve (A) modules 1 065 57 3 4
1 062 57 064 60 1 2 1 065 58 4 4
1 062 58 064 61 2 2 1 065 59 6 4
1 062 59 064 62 3 2 1 065 61 10 4
1 062 60 064 63 4 2 1 065 63 16 4
1 062 61 064 64 6 2 1 065 64 20 4
5 062 63 064 66 10 2 1 065 65 25 4
5 062 65 064 68 16 2 1 065 66 32 4
1 062 66 064 69 20 2 1 065 67 40 4
1 062 67 064 70 25 2 1 065 68 50 4
1 062 68 064 71 32 2 1 065 69 63 4
1 062 69 064 72 40 2
1 062 70 064 73 50 2
1 062 71 064 74 63 2
228
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 229
DXTM 6 000 - 10 kA
RCBO up to 63 A
AC and A types
6064 00 078 86 079 19 079 80
Dimensions (p. 239)

Breaking capacity: - 6 000 A - IEC 61009-1, 10 kA - IEC 60947-2 (except for single pole and single pole + neutral - 6 kA)
C curve
Pack Cat.Nos AC t y p e Pack Cat.Nos AC t y p e ( c o n t i n u e d )

Detect AC component faults 4-pole - 400 V
Sensitivity
±
Single pole - 230 V
Sensitivity
±
(A) of modules
(A) of modules
1 079 62 30 mA 10 4
1 6064 00 30 mA 10 1 1 079 64 30 mA 16 4
1 6064 01 30 mA 16 1 1 079 65 30 mA 20 4
1 6064 02 30 mA 20 1 1 079 66 30 mA 25 4
1 6064 03 30 mA 25 1 1 079 67 30 mA 32 4
1 6064 04 30 mA 32 1 1 080 13 30 mA 40 7
1 6064 05 30 mA 45 1 1 080 14 30 mA 50 7
S i n g l e p o l e + n e u t r al - 230 V ± 1 080 15 30 mA 63 7
Neutral on right-hand side 1 079 75 300 mA 10 4
1 078 79 10 mA 16 2 1 079 77 300 mA 16 4
1 078 81 30 mA 3 2 1 079 78 300 mA 20 4
1 078 83 30 mA 6 2 1 079 79 300 mA 25 4
1 078 84 30 mA 10 2 1 079 80 300 mA 32 4
1 078 86 30 mA 16 2 1 080 31 300 mA 40 7
1 078 87 30 mA 20 2 1 080 32 300 mA 50 7
1 078 88 30 mA 25 2 1 080 33 300 mA 63 7
1 078 89 30 mA 32 2
1 078 90 30 mA 40 2
1 078 94 300 mA 6 2 A type
1 078 95 300 mA 10 2
Detect AC and DC component faults
1 078 97 300 mA 16 2
1 078 98 300 mA 20 2 ±
S i n g l e p o l e + n e u t r al - 230 V
1 078 99 300 mA 25 2 Neutral on right-hand side
1 079 00 300 mA 32 2 Sensitivity (A) of modules
1 079 01 300 mA 40 2 1 085 75 10 mA 3 2
2-pole - 230/400 V ± 1 085 79 30 mA 6 2
1 077 45 10 mA 10 4 1 085 85 30 mA 10 2
1 077 46 10 mA 16 4 1 085 87 30 mA 16 2
1 077 47 10 mA 20 4 1 085 88 30 mA 20 2
1 079 11 30 mA 10 4 1 085 89 30 mA 25 2
1 079 19 30 mA 16 4 1 085 90 30 mA 32 2
1 079 20 30 mA 20 4 1 085 91 30 mA 40 2
1 079 21 30 mA 25 4 4-pole - 400 V ±
1 079 22 30 mA 32 4
1 080 75 30 mA 10 4
1 079 29 30 mA 40 4
1 080 76 30 mA 16 4
1 079 30 30 mA 50 4
1 079 31 30 mA 63 4 1 080 77 30 mA 20 4
1 079 44 300 mA 10 4 1 080 78 30 mA 25 4
1 079 46 300 mA 16 4 1 080 79 30 mA 32 4
1 079 47 300 mA 20 4 1 080 84 300 mA 10 4
1 079 48 300 mA 25 4 1 080 85 300 mA 16 4
1 079 49 300 mA 32 4 1 080 86 300 mA 20 4
1 079 50 300 mA 40 4 1 080 87 300 mA 25 4
1 079 51 300 mA 50 4 1 080 88 300 mA 32 4
1 079 52 300 mA 63 4
229
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 230
LEXIC
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
thermal magnetic MCBs high breaking capacity from 2 to 125 A
B and C curves
068 60 069 20 064 76 067 83 070 00
Dimensions (p. 239)

Conform to IEC 60898

Breaking capacity
10 000 IEC 60898 - 400 V A
25 kA to 12.5 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V A
Nominal Number Breaking capacity (kA) Nominal Number Breaking capacity (kA)
B C rating of IEC 60947-2 B C rating of IEC 60947-2
curve curve (A) modules 230 V/400 V curve curve (A) modules 400 V 230 V
1 066 92 068 53 2 1 25 1 067 73 069 33 2 3 25 50
1 066 93 068 54 3 1 25 1 067 74 069 34 3 3 25 50
1 066 95 068 56 6 1 25 1 067 76 069 36 6 3 25 50
1 066 97 068 58 10 1 25 1 067 78 069 38 10 3 25 50
1 066 98 068 59 13 1 25 1 067 79 069 39 13 3 25 50
1 067 00 068 60 16 1 25 1 067 80 069 40 16 3 25 50
1 067 01 068 61 20 1 25 1 067 81 069 41 20 3 25 50
1 067 02 068 62 25 1 20 1 067 82 069 42 25 3 20 50
1 067 03 068 63 32 1 15 1 067 83 069 43 32 3 15 50
1 067 04 068 64 40 1 12.5 1 067 84 069 44 40 3 15 50
1 067 05 068 65 50 1 12.5 1 067 85 069 45 50 3 12.5 25
1 067 06 068 66 63 1 12.5 1 067 86 069 46 63 3 12.5 25
1 063 83 80 1.5 12.5 1 064 95 80 4.5 12.5 16
1 063 84 100 1.5 12.5 1 064 96 100 4.5 12.5 16
1 063 85 125 1.5 12.5 1 064 97 125 4.5 12.5 16
S i n g l e p o l e + n e u t r al - 230 V ± 3 - p o l e + n e u t r al - 400 V ±
Neutral on right-hand side Neutral on right-hand side
B C rating of IEC 60947-2 B C rating of IEC 60947-2
curve curve (A) modules 230 V curve curve (A) modules 400 V 230 V
1 067 36 068 96 6 2 25 1 068 16 069 76 6 4 25 50
51 067 38 068 98 10 2 25 1 068 18 069 78 10 4 25 50
1 067 39 068 99 13 2 25 1 068 19 069 79 13 4 25 50
51 067 40 069 00 16 2 25 1 068 20 069 80 16 4 25 50
1 067 41 069 01 20 2 25 1 068 21 069 81 20 4 25 50
1 067 42 069 02 25 2 20 1 068 22 069 82 25 4 20 50
1 067 43 069 03 32 2 15 1 068 23 069 83 32 4 15 50
1 067 44 069 04 40 2 15 1 068 24 069 84 40 4 15 50
1 067 45 069 05 50 2 12.5 1 068 25 069 85 50 4 12.5 25
1 067 46 069 06 63 2 12.5 1 068 26 069 86 63 4 12.5 25
2-pole - 400 V ± 4-pole - 400 V ±

Nominal Number Breaking capacity (kA)
C rating of IEC 60947-2 Nominal Number Breaking capacity (kA)
curve (A) modules 400 V 230 V C rating of IEC 60947-2
curve (A) modules 400 V 230 V
1 069 13 2 2 30 50 1 069 93 2 4 25 50
1 069 14 3 2 30 50 1 069 94 3 4 25 50
1 069 16 6 2 30 50 1 069 96 6 4 25 50
1 069 18 10 2 30 50 1 069 98 10 4 25 50
1 069 19 13 2 30 50 1 069 99 13 4 25 50
1 069 20 16 2 30 50 1 070 00 16 4 25 50
1 069 21 20 2 30 50 1 070 01 20 4 25 50
1 069 22 25 2 25 50 1 070 02 25 4 20 50
1 069 23 32 2 20 50 1 070 03 32 4 15 50
1 069 24 40 2 20 50 1 070 04 40 4 15 50
1 069 25 50 2 15 25 1 070 05 50 4 12.5 25
1 069 26 63 2 15 25 1 070 06 63 4 12.5 25
1 064 75 80 3 16 25 1 065 70 80 6 12.5 16
1 064 76 100 3 16 25 1 065 71 100 6 12.5 16
1 064 77 125 3 16 25 1 065 72 125 6 12.5 16
Au x i l i a r i e s a n d a c c e s s o r i e s (p. 234)
Z c u r v e, p l e a s e c o n s u l t u s A d d - o n m o d u l e s (p. 232)
230
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 231
DXTM 6 000 -15 kA

thermal magnetic MCBs from 1 to 125 A
D curve
065 89 066 36 066 62 066 71
Dimensions (p. 239)

Breaking capacity
6 000 - IEC 60898 up to 63 A - 400 V A
10 000 - IEC 60898 80 A to 125 A
15 kA - IEC 60947-2 up to 32 A - 400 V AA
10 kA - IEC 60947-2 40 A to 125 A - 400 V
Magnetic adjusted between 10 and 14 In

D rating of IEC 60947-2 D rating of IEC 60947-2
curve (A) modules 230 - 400 V curve (A) modules 400 V 230 V
1 065 75 1 1 15 1 066 65 1 4 15 25
1 065 76 2 1 15 1 066 66 2 4 15 25
1 065 77 3 1 15 1 066 67 3 4 15 25
1 065 79 6 1 15 1 066 68 4 4 15 25
1 065 81 10 1 15 1 066 69 6 4 15 25
1 065 82 13 1 15 1 066 71 10 4 15 25
1 065 83 16 1 15 1 066 73 16 4 15 25
1 065 84 20 1 15 1 066 74 20 4 15 25
1 065 85 25 1 15 1 066 75 25 4 15 25
1 065 86 32 1 15 1 066 76 32 4 15 25
1 065 87 40 1 10 1 066 77 40 4 10 20
1 065 88 50 1 10 1 066 78 50 4 10 20
1 065 89 63 1 10 1 066 79 63 4 10 20
1 066 80 80 6 10 16
1 066 81 100 6 10 16
2-pole - 400 V ± 1 066 82 125 6 10 16
D rating of IEC 60947-2
1 066 25 1 2 15 25
1 066 26 2 2 15 25
1 066 27 3 2 15 25
1 066 29 6 2 15 25
1 066 31 10 2 15 25
1 066 32 13 2 15 25
1 066 33 16 2 15 25
1 066 34 20 2 15 25
1 066 35 25 2 15 25
1 066 36 32 2 15 25
1 066 37 40 2 10 20
1 066 38 50 2 10 20
1 066 39 63 2 10 20
1 066 40 80 3 10 16
1 066 41 100 3 10 16
1 066 42 125 3 10 16
3-pole - 400 V ±
D rating of IEC 60947-2
1 066 45 1 3 15 25
1 066 46 2 3 15 25
1 066 47 3 3 15 25
1 066 49 6 3 15 25
1 066 51 10 3 15 25
1 066 52 13 3 15 25
1 066 53 16 3 15 25
1 066 54 20 3 15 25
1 066 55 25 3 15 25
1 066 56 32 3 15 25
1 066 57 40 3 10 20
1 066 58 50 3 10 20
1 066 59 63 3 10 20
1 066 60 80 4.5 10 16
1 066 61 100 4.5 10 16
1 066 62 125 4.5 10 16
231
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 232
LEXIC
DXTM add-on modules

for DX, DX-H
AC, A and Hpi types
074 01 074 63 075 64
Dimensions (p. 239)

Conform to 61009-1
Mounted on the right-hand side of the MCBs
For DX, DX-H (except Cat.Nos 032 66 to 034 99 and Cat.Nos 6048 02 to 6049 41 MCB LR 6 000 )
Pack Cat.Nos AC t y p e Pack Cat.Nos A t y p e ( c o n t i nu e d )

Detect AC component faults 4-pole - 400 V
Sensitivity
±
Maximum rating Number
2-pole - 230/400 V
Sensitivity
±
(A) of modules
(A) of modules
1 075 37 30 mA 32 3
1 074 01 30 mA 32 2 1 075 38 30 mA 63 3
1 074 02 30 mA 63 2 1 075 39 30 mA 80 to 125 6
1 074 03 30 mA 80 to 125 4 1 075 43 300 mA 32 3
1 074 07 300 mA 32 2 1 075 44 300 mA 63 3
1 074 08 300 mA 63 2 1 075 45 300 mA 80 to 125 6
1 074 09 300 mA 80 to 125 4 1 075 47 300 mA (s) 63 3
1 074 11 300 mA (s) 63 2
1 074 23 1 A (s) 63 2 Hpi type (High immunity)
3-pole - 400 V ± Enhanced immunity to unwanted tripping in
1 074 28 30 mA 32 3
disturbed environments
1 074 29 30 mA 63 3 Detect AC and DC component faults (A type)
1 074 34 300 mA 32 3
1 074 35 300 mA 63 3 2-pole - 230/400 V
Sensitivity
±
1 074 36 300 mA 80 to 125 6 (A) of modules
1 074 38 300 mA 63 3 1 075 64 30 mA 63 2
4-pole - 400 V ± 3-pole - 400 V ±
1 074 55 30 mA 32 3 1 075 68 30 mA 63 3
1 074 56 30 mA 63 3 1 075 69 30 mA 80 to 125 6
1 074 57 30 mA 80 to 125 6 4-pole - 400 V ±
1 074 61 300 mA 32 3 1 075 74 300 mA (s) 63 3
1 074 62 300 mA 63 3
1 074 63 300 mA 80 to 125 6 A u x i l i a r i e s a n d a c c e s s o r i e s fo r M C B s
1 074 65 300 mA (s) 63 3 (p. 234)
1 074 66 300 mA (s) 80 to 125 6
1 074 77 1 A (s) 63 3 Re s i d u a l c u r r ent dev i c e s (p. 226)
1 074 78 1 A (s) 80 to 125 6
A type
Detect AC and DC component faults
2-pole - 230/400 V
Sensitivity
±
(A) of modules
1 074 83 30 mA 32 2
1 074 84 30 mA 63 2
1 074 85 30 mA 80 to 125 4
1 074 89 300 mA 32 2
1 074 90 300 mA 63 2
1 074 91 300 mA 80 to 125 4
1 074 93 300 mA (s) 63 2
3-pole - 400 V ±
1 075 11 30 mA 32 3
1 075 17 300 mA 63 3
1 075 18 300 mA 80 to 125 6
1 075 20 300 mA (s) 63 3
232
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 233
DX-L 50 kA
thermal magnetic MCBs high breaking capacity from 10 to 63 A
add on modules XL PRO2 >>>
The software
for distribution
panel
designers
071 14 071 44
Dimensions (p. 239)

Breaking capacity Designed as a veritable digital workshop,

50 kA - IEC 60947-2 XL PRO2 software significantly boosts
Pack Cat.Nos 2-pole - 400 V ± distribution panel administration
C rating of IEC 60947-2
1 071 12 10 3 50 70
1 071 14 16 3 50 70
1 071 15 20 3 50 70
1 071 16 25 3 50 70
1 071 17 32 3 50 70
1 071 18 40 3 50 70
1 071 19 50 3 50 70
1 071 20 63 3 50 70
4-pole - 400 V ±
C rating of IEC 60947-2
1 071 42 10 6 50 70
1 071 44 16 6 50 70
1 071 45 20 6 50 70
1 071 46 25 6 50 70
1 071 47 32 6 50 70
1 071 48 40 6 50 70
1 071 49 50 6 50 70
1 071 50 63 6 50 70
A dd on modules Hpi type (High immunity)

Conform to standard IEC 61009-1
Mounted on the right-hand side
of the MCBs DX-L
Enhanced
immunity to unwanted tripping in disturbed > Select the required products
environments
Detect DC component faults (A type) > Calculate the corresponding
2-pole - 230/400 V
Sensitivity
±
Number
types of enclosures
of modules
1 075 76 30 mA 2
1 075 77 300 mA 2
> View the layout of the products
1 075 78 300 mA (s) 2 in the enclosures
1 075 79 1 A (s) 2
4-pole - 400 V ± > Automatically generate the wiring
1 075 84 30 mA 3
1 075 85 300 mA 3 diagram for your installation
1 075 86 300 mA (s) 3
1 075 87 1 A (s) 3 > Work out the cost
233
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 234
LEXIC
DXTM exemple : xxxxxxx

pour
auxiliaries, remote control and accessories
xxxxxxxx
for MCBs, RCDs and RCBOs
073 50 073 54 073 60 073 68 073 73
Pack Cat.Nos Au x i l i a r i e s Pack Cat.Nos Accessories

Clip on the left-hand side (maximum 3)(1) Pa d l o c k i n g
Allow insertion of the supply busbar at the top 2 044 42 Support for Ø 4 mm
Auxiliaries common to: or Ø 6 mm padlock for DX, DX-H, DX-L
- DX, DX-H, DX-L MCBs and 2 P RCDs
- RCD with auxiliary switch Cat.No 073 52
Number of 3
1/3 044 43 Padlock Ø 4 mm
Signalling auxiliaries modules 1 227 97 Padlock Ø 6 mm
1 073 50 Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 0.5± S e a l a b l e s c r e w c ov e r
Indicates the position of the MCB or RCD
1 073 51 Fault signalling changeover switch 0.5 2 044 44 For DX up to 63 A DX-H MCBs,
6 A - 250 V ± RCBOs and RCDs
Indicates tripping of the MCB at a fault (4 separable poles)
1 073 53 Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 0.5
Can be modified to a fault signalling
changeover switch 2 044 48 For MCBs from 80 A to 125 A
1 073 54 Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 1 and DX-L (4 separable poles)
+ fault signalling switch
Can be modified to 2 auxiliary changeover
switches Ter m i n a l s h i e l d s
Command auxiliaries 1 044 39 Single pole for DX MCBs from 80 A to 125 A
Shunt releases and DX-L
Enable the MCB to be tripped from 6 044 47 Insulating shields for DX MCBs
a remote location DX-H and DX-L
1 073 60 12 to 48 V and ± = 1 Spacing unit
1 073 61 110 to 415 V ± 1 5 044 41 1 module
110 to 125 V =
Undervoltage releases
Time delay adjustable from 0 to 300 ms
1 073 65 24 V = 1
1 073 66 48 V = 1
1 073 68 230 V ± 1
Re m o t e c o n t ro l(2)
Clip on the left-hand side of the MCBs
Equipped with:
- Auxiliary changeover switch
- Fault signalling switch 2 A - 230 V
Can be padlocked in open position (Ø 4 mm)
±
M o t o r- d r i v e n c o n t r o l m o d u l e s
Can be used to open and close DX,
DX-H, and DX D curve,
(2, 3 and 4-pole ≤ 63 A) and RCDs, Number of
RCBOs remotely modules
1 073 70 24 V ± 3
1 073 71 48 V ± 3
1 073 73 230 V ± 3
Au t o m a t i c re s e t t i n g
Gives automatically an order of resetting
Can be used to send a reclosing
command automatically
Can be connected to motor-driven
control modules
For use in installations which are not
monitored or staffed (transmission relays,
pump stations etc.) in order to meet
service/operational continuity requirements (1) Two auxiliary signalling devices max., with only one 1/2 module
1 073 83 230 V ± 2 auxiliary
One auxiliary control device can be connected and up to 2 auxiliary
signalling devices max. which are installed between the RCD and the
auxiliary control device with only one 1/2 module auxiliary
(2) Controlled by a volt-free contact or push button (not illuminated)
Not compatible with RCDs with 1.5 modules per pole (DX-H 80 to 125
A, DX-L), single module phase + neutral RCD (DX), 2 modules
phase/neutral RCBOs (DX) and RCDs
234
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 235
performance of MCBs and auxiliaries
■ B re a k i n g c a p a c i t y i n I T n e u t ral ear t h i n g s y s t e m ■ C u r v es fo r B, C, D, Z MCBs

1 - p o l e ( a l o n e ) b r e a k i n g c a p a c i t y o f MCB a t 4 0 0 V a c c o r d i n g • Thermal release for a temperature of 30 °C
to IEC 60947-2 t (time)
DX single pole
1.5 kA
+ n e u t ral(1) B and C c u r v es
DX (2) B and C c u r v e s
Thermal
≤ 63 A 3 kA (low overvoltage:
DX-H B and C c u r v e s slow release)
≤ 20 A 6 kA 1h
DX-L C cur v e
25 A 5 kA
10 to 63 A 6 kA
32 et 40 A 4 kA DX D cur v e
50 et 63 A 3 kA ≤ 32 A 4 kA
80 et 125 A 4 kA 40 to 125 A 3 kA
(1) Subject to meeting the requirements of section 431-2-2 of NFC 15-100, i.e.:
- either the neutral conductor(s) in question are considered to be effectively protected against
short-circuits by a protective device placed upstream
Z B C D
- or the circuit(s) in question are protected by a residual current device Magnetic
In this case, the conductors must be the same cross-section and protected by MCBs (high overvoltage:
with the same rated current and same trip characteristic (type B, C or D) fast release)
(2) Single, double, triple + neutral or four-pole
0.01 s
■ B re a k i n g c a p a c i t y i n t h e ev e n t o f a s h o r t - c i rc u i t t o e a r t h
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 200
a n d i n s u l a t i o n vo l t a g e 1.3
1.45 B C D x In (rating)
Thermal release for an ambient temperature = 30 °C
DX DX DX D cur v e, DX-H DX-L
C u r v es Ma g n e t i c t h re s h o l d s e t t i n g
Single pole B , C and D cur v e s B and C cur v es C cur ve
+ Neutral < 63 A 80 to 125 A Z(1) 2.4 to 3,6 In
B 3 to 5 In
Icn 1 4 500 A 6 kA 10 kA 25 kA
C 5 to 10 In
Ui 250 V 500 V 500 V 500 V
D 10 to 14 In (10 to 20 depending on standard)
Icn 1: Breaking capacity on 1 pole for multi-pole MCBs in the event of a short-circuit to earth
(1) Z curve, please consult us
Ui: rated insulation voltage
■ Tech n i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s o f D X a u x i l i a r i e s
■ C o n n e c t i o n c r o s s - s e c t i o n f o r s c r e w t e r m i n a l s ( i n m m 2)
- Max. connection cross-section: 2.5 mm2
Max. ca b l e
- Operating temperature: - 5 à + 50 °C
rigid f lex i b l e
• DX single pole + N, • C u r r e n t s h u n t releases
16 10
w i t h o r w i t h o u t e a r th leaka g e m o d u l e
Ph C1
• DX, DX D cur v e
e a r t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s ≤ 63 A 35 25
DX-L ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
• DX-H, ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s 8 0 , 1 0 0 , 1 2 5 A ,
12 nominal voltage (Un)
DX-L 70 50
N
U ±± =
- 12 to 48 V and
- 110 to 415 V 110 to 125 V =
• Au x i l i a r i e s 2.5 2.5
Fitted with automatic breaking
C2 contact
Min. and max. voltage: from 0.7 to 1.1 V
Tripping time: < to 20 ms
Power consumption: at 1.1 x 48 V = 121 VA
at 1.1 x 415 V = 127 VA
Impedance : 12 to 48 V = 23 Ω
110 to 415 V = 1 640 Ω
Consumption U min. U max.
12 to 48 V 522 mA 2 610 mA
110 to 415 V 69 mA 259 mA
• U n d e r v o l t a g e releases
Ph/+ D1
U nominal voltage (Un)
N/- D2 24 V
48 V
==
230 V ±
Pull-in voltage: ≥ 0.55 Un
Tripping time: from 100 to 400 ms ± 10% (adjustable)
Power consumption: 24 V 0.1 VA ==
48 V 0.2 VA
230 V 1 VA =
235
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 236
LEXIC
performance of MCBs and auxiliaries (continued)
■ Pro t e c t i o n o f D C c i rc u i t s Example: circuit earthed via the negative polarity / U = 110 V / Icc = =
Lexic DX and DX-H MCBs (1P/2P/3P/4P - In ≤ 63 A) designed for use in 10 kA / In = 32 A
±
230/400 V , supplies, can also be used in DC circuits Protect the positive polarity using an MCB capable of breaking 10 kA
In this case, the following deratings and precautions must be taken into at 110 V (DX-H 2 P 32 A with 2 poles on the positive polarity)
account For isolation, use a DX-H 3P 32 A with 2 poles on the positive polarity
and one pole on the negative polarity
1 - Pr o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t s h o r t - c i r c u i t s
DX-H LEXIC vo l t a ge single-pole 2P 3P 4P
Max. magnetic tripping threshold: multiplied by 1.4
Example: For a C curve MCB for which the AC tripping threshold is Acc. to 48 V 10 kA 10 kA
between 5 and 10 In, the DC tripping threshold will be between IEC 60947.2 I c u 110 V 10 kA 10 kA
7 and 14 In 230 V 15 kA
2 - Pr o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t ov e r l o a d s If isolation required
The time/current thermal tripping curve is the same as for AC + +
3 - O p e r a t i n g vo l t a g e
Max. operating voltage: 80 V per pole (60 V for single-pole + N MCBs)
For voltages higher than this value, several poles must be wired in series
DX-H 32 A DX-H 32 A
Example: for a 110 V voltage, 2P 3P -
use a 2-pole MCB and connect
the 2 poles in series -
• N e t wo r k e a r t h e d v i a a m i d d l e p o i n t :
4 - B re a k i n g c a p a c i t y Place on each polarity the number of poles necessary for max. Isc
breaking at half voltage
4 000 A for a single pole MCB at max. voltage (80 V = per pole) +
At other voltages, the breaking capacities are as follows: (1) U-Isc max.
U/2
U/2-Isc max.
+ + + + U/2
(1)
-
U/2-Isc max.
(1) MCB (U/2-Isc max.)

- - - -
Example: circuit earthed via a middle point / U = 230 V / Icc = 6 kA / =
DX vo l t a ge single-pole 2P 3P 4P In = 10 A
Acc. to 48 V 6 kA 6 kA Protect each polarity using an MCB capable of breaking 6 kA at half
IEC 60947.2 I c u
voltage, i.e. 115 V (DX 4P 10 A with 2 poles on each polarity)
110 V 6 kA 6 kA
230 V 10 kA DX LEXIC vo l t a ge single-pole 2P 3P 4P
48 V 100 % 100 % Acc. to 48 V 6 kA 6 kA
I c s(1) 110 V 100 % 100 % IEC 60947.2 I c u 110 V 6 kA 6 kA
230 V 100 % 230 V 10 kA
+
DX-H vo l t a ge single-pole 2P 3P 4P
Acc. to 48 V 10 kA 10 kA
IEC 60947.2 Icu 110 V 10 kA 10 kA
DX 10 A
230 V 15 kA 4P
-
48 V 100 % 100 %
I c s(1) 110 V 100 % 100 %
230 V 100 % • I s o l a ted ear t h s u p p l y :
Distribute the poles necessary for breaking over the 2 polarities to
5 - D i s t r i bu t i o n o f b re a k i n g p o l e s provide protection in the event of a double earth fault (particularly if
there are a number of circuits in parallel)
To choose the MCB and determine the pole distribution necessary for + (1)
breaking on each of the polarities, it is necessary to know how the
installation is earthed U U-Isc max.
• Supply with one polarity ear thed: -
Place all the poles necessary for breaking on the other polarity If (1)
isolation is required, an additional pole must be added on the earthed

U-Isc max. 1st earth fault : I = O
polarity 2sd earth fault :
U and I ≤ Isc max.
MCB
(U-Isc max.)
+
(1) MCB (U-Isc max.)
U-Isc max Example: isolated earth circuit / U = 48 V / Icc = 4,5 kA / In = 40 A =
U Protect the installation with an MCB capable of breaking 4.5 kA at 48 V
and protect each polarity (DX MCB 2 P 40 A with one pole on each
polarity)
- DX LEXIC vo l t a ge single-pole 2P 3P 4P
(1) U=0
Acc. to 48 V 6 kA 6 kA
(1) Only if isolation required IEC 60947.2 I c u 110 V 6 kA 6 kA
230 V 10 kA
+
DX 40 A
2P
-
(1) As a % of Icu
236
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 237
■ S p e c i f i c c a s e o f c o n t i nu i t y o f s e r v i c e ■ W i t h s t a n d t o s h o r t - c i r c u i t s : M C B s a n d RC D s ( i n k A )
On some unmanned sites which need to be monitored specifically for C a u t i o n : it is advisable to provide overload protection for the RCD
continuity of service, untimely tripping of RCDs will not be permitted
For example: isolated telephone/TV or radio-type relay sites, pump M C B u p s t r eam
stations DX DX-H DX-L DPX
Optimum continuity of service can be achieved by using an Hpi RCCB ( B a n d C c u r v es) (B a n d C c u r v es ) 125
in conjunction with a motor-driven control and an automatic reclosing D o w n s t ream RCD 1P+ 2 P, 3 P
63 A
80 to
≤ 63 A ≤ 125 A
control device (see p. 234) n e u t ral and 4 P 125 A
2P 16 A 6 10 10 6 6 6
230 V
25 A 6 10 10 6 6 6
40 A 6 10 10 6 6 6
N 63 A 6 10 10 6 6 6
L
80 A 6 10 10 6 6 6
L N L1 B1 B2 4P 25 A 1.5(1) 10 20 20 50 25
230/400 V
40 A 1.5(1) 10 15 20 50 25
N L1 L0 L 08 05 63 A 10 12.5 12.5 50 25
80 A 12.5 12.5 25
11 12 14 95 96 98 (1) Icn 1 at 400 V ± on 1 pole in IT earthing system
C S
Motor-driven control Automatic reclosing control ■ W i t h s t a n d t o s h o r t - c i r c u i t s : f u s e c a r t r i d g e s a n d RC D s

Cat.Nos 073 70/71/73 device Cat.No 073 83
(in kA)
S p e c i a l c a s e o f c o n t i nu i t y o f s e r v i c e
C a u t i o n : it is advisable to provide overload protection for the RCD
In certain locations, where there are no personnel, in which particular
care is required to ensure continuity of service, false tripping of D o w n s t r e a m RC D s g G f u s e c a r t r i d g e s u p s t r eam
MCBs is not permissible (isolated telephone/TV/radio relay stations,
pumping stations, etc.) 2P 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 80 A
230 V ± 100 100 30 10 6
The combination of an Hpi type RCBO with motor-driven control 16 to 80 A
and a recloser provides optimum continuity of service (p. 234) 4P
230/400 V ± - 100 100 50 15
25 to 80 A
■ RC D t r i p p i n g c u r v es
• Average RCD operating curves
1 ■ Re s i d u a l c u r r e n t b re a k i n g c a p a c i t y o f DX RCBOs
t(s) IΔm according to EN 61009-1
A d a p t a ble ear th leaka g e m o d u l e s

0.5 - DX 6 000 , DX-H 6 000 A
- DX-L 30 000 A
10mA 30mA 300mA 1A
RCBOs
-P+N 3 000 A
- 2 P (4 modules) 6 000 A
- 4 P 10 to 32 A ( 4 m o d u l e s ) 4 500 A
- 4 P 40 to 63 A ( 7 m o d u l e s ) 6 000 A
0.1
0.05 A, AC or Hpi
type selective (s)
Hpi type
A or AC type
instantaneous
0.01
10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 4
I (mA) 10
Fo r m o re i n fo r ma t i o n o n t h e b a s i c r u l e s o f p ro t e c t i o n ,
c o m e a n d b e t rained a t I n n oval www.legrandelectric.com
237
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 238
LEXIC
motor MCBs motor MCBs

thermal magnetic technical characteristics
■ Tech n i c a l ch a ra c t e r i s t i c s
S e l e c t i o n o f c i r c u i t b r e a ke r d e p e n d i n g o n t h e m o t o r
ln S t a n d a r d m o t o r p o we r fo r 3 p h a s e o p e r a t i o n
Ca t . N o s
(A) 230 V (kW) 400 V (kW)
029 26 1.6 - 0.37
029 27 2.5 0.37 0.75
029 28 4 0.75 1.5
029 29 6.3 1.1 2.2
029 30 10 2.2 4
029 31 14 3 5.5
029 32 18 4 7.5
029 33 23 5.5 9
029 34 25 5.5 11
Use: for local control and protection of three-phase electric motors with
a power rating less than or equal to 11 kW
This device is used instead of an overcurrent release combined with
029 29 + 029 41 029 29 an aM fuse cartridge
Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t s
Provide localised control and protection of 3-phase electrical motors Clip on to left-hand side of the circuit-breaker
Conform to IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 Maximum 2: 1 auxiliary failure contact (Cat.No 029 48 and 1 auxiliary
A
Ultimate breaking capacity at 400/415 V - Icu 15 kA (14 to 25 A) signal contact (Cat.No 029 49), or two auxiliary signal contacts
Compensated thermal adjustment on front panel from - 20 °C to + 60 °C (Cat.No 029 49)
Factory set fixed magnetic between 10 and 12 In The auxiliary failure contact is always attached to the circuit-breaker
Electrical endurance AC3: 100 000 operations
Service category: 25 OC/hour Derating the Ics standard breaking capacity depending on the voltage
Connection (max.):
Vo l t a ge
• flexible/rigids 2 x 6 mm2 230 V ± 400 V ± 690 V ±
• flexible with glands: 2 x 4 mm2 Ra t i n g
Padlockable in "OFF" position (Ø 4 mm padlock) Cat.No 044 43 0.16 to 1.6 unlimited unlimited unlimited
2.5 to 10 A unlimited unlimited 2.25 kA
Pack Cat.Nos Tr i p l e p o l e M C B s 14 to 18 A unlimited 7.5 kA 2.25 kA
23 to 25 A 50 kA 6 kA 2.25 kA
Depth Nominal rating Thermal Number
71 mm (A) adjustment range of modules
1 029 21 0.16 0.10 to 0.16 A 2.5
1 029 22 0.25 0.16 to 0.25 A 2.5
1 029 23 0.40 0.25 to 0.40 A 2.5 ■ Dimensions Single-phase
1 029 24 0.63 0.40 to 0.63 A 2.5 IP 55 box motor connection
1 029 25 1 0.63 to 1 A 2.5 L N
1 029 26 1.6 1 to 1.6 A 2.5
1 029 27 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 A 2.5 1 3 5
1 029 28 4 2.5 to 4 A 2.5
1 029 29 6.3 4 to 6.3 A 2.5
147
130
1 029 30 10 6 to 10 A 2.5
1 029 31 14 9 to 14 A 2.5
1 029 32 18 13 to 18 A 2.5 2 4 6
1 029 33 23 17 to 23 A 2.5
1 029 34 25 20 to 25 A 2.5 4 holes
84 93 U V
Ø 16
M
IP 55 box
1 029 41 For motor MCB with an auxiliary contact
(Cat.No 029 49 or 029 48) and/or a trip
(Cat.No 029 37 or 029 38) ■ Ther mal-ma g n e t i c t r i p p i n g c u r v e
10 000
Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t s
1 000
Fa i l u re c o n t a c t
Average operating time at 20° (seconds)
Number
Contact Capacity of modules
100
1 029 48 N/O 6 A - 230 V ± 0.5
Signal contact 10 3 po
2 contacts max. les
in h
ot s
1 029 49 NC + NO 6 A - 230 V ±± 0.5 1
ta te
2.5 A - 230 V
Under vo l t a g e t r i p 0.1
To be fitted to right of motor MCB
Trip operation:
• Trip between 0.7 and 0.35 x Un 0.01
• Hold between 0.85 and 1.1 x Un
1 029 37 230 V ± 1.4 VA 1 0.001
1 1.5 10 100
1 029 38 400 V ± 1.4 VA 1
Current in multiples of the selting current
Pa d l o c k
3
1/3 044 43 Ø 4 mm
238
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 239
dimensions of LEXIC modular din-rail equipment
■ DX-DX-H, DX-L, R C D s , f u s e c a r r i e r s ■ O t h e r m e ch a n i s m s
Switches, push-buttons, contactors, pulse operated latching relays, Programmable time switches, light sensitive switches, voltmeters,
relays, thermostats, remote control dimmers, bells, timers, socket outlets contactors, transformers, Imocad etc.
A
A and C
E
E
45
G
D
45
D
C
B F B F
A B C D E F G Description A B C D E F
1-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Pro g ra m m a b l e s 037 00 60 17.8 60 83 44 66

+N t i m e sw i t c h e s
Ther mal-ma g n e t i c M C B s 037 30/40/42/43/44 60 17.8 60 86 37.5 66
LR, DX, DX-H 70 17.7 35.6 53.4 71.2 60 83 44 76 94
up to 63 A 037 52/53/55 60 53 60 89 44 66
DX-L , 047 61/63/71 60 35.6 60 90 44 66

DX D cur v e, 70 26.7 53.4 80.1 106.8 60 83 44 76 89
DX-H fro m 80 to 125 A 037 10 60 106.5 60 89 44 66
Motor MCBs 71 44.5 60 89 44 77 89
L i g h t s e n s i t i v e sw i t c h e s C a t . N o 0 3 7 2 1 60 35.6 60 90 44 66
Ear t h l e a k a g e m o d u l e s
up to 63 A 70 35.6 53.4 53.4 60 93 44 76 99 Vo l t m e t e rs - A m m e t e rs 60 70 60 83 44 66
f rom 80 to 125 A 70 71.1 107.2 107.2 60 88 44 76 89
C o n t a c t o rs - 1 module 20 A 62 17.8 60 83 44 67.5
RCBOs 70 17.7 35.6 71.2 124.6 60 83 44 76 94
4 - p o l e RC B O s C o n t a c t o r s 40 and 63 A
with 4 modules 70 71.2 60 83 44 76 94 - 2 modules 60 35.6 61 80 44 67
RCDs (LR, DX) - 3 modules 60 54 61 80 44 67
2-pole 70 35.6 60 83 44 76 94
A u x i l i a r i e s fo r c o n t a c t o r s
4-pole 71.5 71.2 60 83 44 77.5 94 60 9 60 83 44 66
a n d p u l s e o p e r a t e d l a t c h i n g r ela y s
Fuse car r i e r 67 17.7 17.7 35.6 53.4 71.2 60 83 44 73 94
Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t s Tr a n s fo r m e rs
Ca t.Nos 073 50/51/52/53 70 8.7 60 83 44 76 83
042 20/25 60 35.8 60 83.5 44 66
Au x i l i a r y c o n t a c t
Ca t.No 073 54 70 17.7 60 83 44 76 83 042 31/41/51/52 60 71.5 60 83.5 44 66
C o n t ro l a u x i l i a r i e s 70 17.7 60 83 44 76 83
042 53/54 60 89 60 95 44 66
Re m o t e c o n t ro l 80.5 54 80.5 83 44 80.5 89
DX - IS 042 28 60 54 60 83.5 44 66
20 - 32 A 68 17.7 17.7 35.6 53.4 60 83 44 74 94
Imocad
63 - 100 - 125 A 68 17.7 35.6 53.4 71.2 60 83 44 74 94
035 02 64 126 64 90 44 66
C h a n g e ov e r sw i t c h e s
043 82/85/88 68 17.7 60 83 44 74 94 035 06 64 72 64 90 44 66
043 83/86 68 35.6 60 83 44 74 94
035 08/10/24/39 61 18 61 90 44 66
P u s h - bu t t o n s / p u s h - bu t t o n
s w i t ch e s w i t h i n d i c a t o rs 68 17.7 60 83 44 74 94
035 09 61 36 61 90 44 66
P u l s e o p e rat e d l a t ch i n g
r ela y s 63.5 17.8 17.8 35.6 60 83 44 69 94 035 24/30/31/33/36/37/39 64 72 64 90 44 66
T i m e d e l a y r ela y s 70 17.8 60 81 44 76 80 035 34 64 144 64 90 44 66
L i g h t s e n s i t i v e sw i t c h e s
1 function 037 23 60 35.6 60 85 37.5 66 70 035 90/18 60 106 60 90 44 66
4 functions 037 25 60 88 60 84 37.5 66 70 Electrical energy metering
T h e r m o s t a t 038 40 60 35.6 60 85 37.5 66 70 046 73/74 60 72 60 81 44 66
S o c ke t o u t l e t s 60 44.5 60 83 44 66 92 046 81/72 60 35.5 60 89 44 66

B u z zers / b e l l s 60 17.5 60 76 44 66 85 C e n t ra l m e a s u r i n g u n i t
T i m e l a g s w i t c h 047 02 60 17.8 60 94 44 66 94 046 65 64 105 64 89.5 44 69
Re m o t e c o n t ro l d i m m e rs Re s i d u a l c u r r e n t relay
036 64 60 17.8 60 94 44 66 90 260 88 60 35.5 60 89 44 66
036 70 66 72 60 88 44 72 90
Vo l t a g e s u r g e p ro t e c t o rs
039 20 to 23 60 17.7 35.6 53.4 71.2 60 86 44 68 91
039 30 to 38 60 17.7 35.6 53.4 71.2 60 86 44 68 91
039 40/41/43 60 17.7 35.6 71.2 60 86 44 68 91
239
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 240
pour exemple
voltage surge protectors
: xxxxxxx
PROTECTION
OF INSTALLATIONS
>>> class 1, B
xxxxxxxx
class 2, C (H,I,S)
Voltage surge
protector: 039 21 039 33
essential protection Technical characteristics (p. 130)
Lexic voltage surge protectors for distribution boards or consumer units

Conform to standard EN 61643-11, class 1 and class 2 with 4 capacities
The voltage surge protector has become Fitted with built-in thermal protection
Consist of a bracket and a plug-in replacement module with indicator
essential in installations because it behaves Green: surge protector operational
Orange: module needs replacing
like a real short-circuit, shunting most of the Can be fitted with a signalling auxiliary to transfer surge protector status
energy resulting from the impulse voltage ±
For 230/400 V supply
Frequency : 50/60 Hz
(Uimp) generated by the lightning strike
Pack Cat.Nos Modular lighting conductor
H i g h p ro t e c t i o n - H
For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, IT, Uc = 440 V
Class 1: I imp = 10 kA (impulse discharge current
10/350 µs)
Class 2: In = 20 kA; Up = 2 kV (protection level)
I max = 70 kA (impulse discharge capacity
8/20 μs wave)
Associated Number
protection(1) of modules
1 039 20 1-pole 068 64 1
1 039 21 2-pole 069 24 2
1 039 22 3-pole 069 44 3
1 039 23 4-pole 070 04 4
I n c re a s e d p ro t e c t i o n - I
Class 2: In = 15 kA; Up = 1.8 kV
I max = 40 kA ((impulse discharge current
8/20 μs)
Associated Number
1 039 30 1-pole 063 77 1
1 039 31 2-pole 064 69 2
1 039 32 3-pole 064 89 3
1 039 33 4-pole 065 64 4
S t a n d a rd p ro t e c t i o n - S
For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, Uc = 320 V
Class 2: In = 5 kA; Up = 1.2 kV
I max = 15 kA ((impulse discharge current 8/20 μs)
Associated Number
1 039 40 1-pole 063 77 1
> Just as important as an MCB for protecting 1 039 41 2-pole 064 69 2
1 039 43 4-pole 065 64 4
sensitive equipment, the voltage surge protector
forms an integral part of the the installation
L i g h t i n g re s i s t o r
Protection of buildings equipped with a lighting
conductor (LPS system)
Not plugable
Class 1: Imp = 12.5 kA; In = 20 kA; Up = 1.8 kV
Associated Number
1 039 10 1-pole 068 64 2
(1) Minimum protection for Icc max.:10 kA

240
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 241
LEXIC
voltage surge protectors voltage surge protectors

equipment
for telephone lines
039 34 039 58
038 28 038 29
Technical characteristics (p. 130)
For protection of: telephone, fax, modem, etc., connected on the internal
telephone line, against overvoltages of atmospheric origin
Installed in a distribution cabinet, especially the ELV/signal cabinet
Cat.No 011 95 (please consult us), or terminal shield boxes Ekinoxe "S"
039 62 039 63 1 module
Connected in series on the telephone line
Pack Cat.Nos Re p l a c e m e n t m o d u l e s Mechanical indication of operation:
• green: surge protector operational
P l u g - i n re p l a c e m e n t m o d u l e s • orange: surge protector needs replacing
With indicator Conform to standard EN 61643-21
Green: surge protector operational
Orange: module needs replacing Pack Cat.Nos Vo l t a g e s u r g e p ro t e c t o r fo r t e l e p h o n e l i n e s
I imp (kA) I max (kA) UP (kV) For surge protector
5 039 28 10 70 2.0 039 20/21/22/23 1 038 28 Analogue
5 039 34 - 40 1.8 039 30/31/32/33 1 038 29 Digital
5 039 39 - 40 1.4 039 35/36/38
5 039 44 - 15 1.2 039 40/41/43
Signalling auxiliaries
With changeover microswitch
2 A - 250 V ±
Clip onto the base of the surge protector
1 039 55 For 1-pole module
D e c o u p l i n g i n d u c t o rs
For coordination of 2 voltage surge
protectors within less than 2 m distance
in the same installation, espacially when type 1 and
type 2 v.s.p. are installed in the same board
For multipole voltage surge protectors,
each conductor must be equipped Number
with one decoupling inductor of modules
1 039 62 35 A - 500 V ± 2
1 039 63 63 A - 500 V ± 4
241
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 242
isolating supports for busbars in XL3 and Altis cabinets and enclosures
"standard" distribution
373 10 374 14 095 67 373 21 374 19 + 373 11
Pack Cat.Nos U n iv ers a l s u p p o r t s Pack Cat.Nos C o p p e r b a rs

1 b a r p e r p o l e ≤ 280 A Fla t r i g i d
10 373 98 Single pole support for bars Cross Permissible Threaded holes Length
12 x 2 or 14 x 4 mm section (mm) I (A) Ø mm Pitch (mm)
10 373 88 12 x 2 110 M5 18 990 18
10 374 37 Single pole support for bars
15 x 4, 18 x 4 or 25 x 4 mm 10 373 89 12 x 4 160 M5 18 990
5 373 96 Set of 2 four pole supports 10 374 33 15 x 4 200 M6 18 990
for bars 12 x 2 or 12 x 4 mm
1 374 32 Set of 2 four pole supports Cross I (A) Threaded Length
section (mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 holes (mm) 4 18
for bars 15 x 4 or 18 x 4 mm 10 374 34 18 x 4 245 200 M6 990
1 374 36 Set of 2 four pole supports 10 374 38 25 x 4 280 250 M6 990
for bars 25 x 4 mm
5 25
4 374 18 25 x 5 330 270 M6 1 750
S u p p o r t s fo r X L3 4 374 19 32 x 5 450 400 M6 1 750
1 b a r p e r p o l e ≤ 400 A 5 25 25
1 373 15 Support for copper bars 18 x 4, 25 x 5 1 374 40 50 x 5 700 630 - 1 750
and 32 x 5 mm, in flat position 1 374 41 63 x 5 800 700 - 1 750
For mounting in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures 1 374 59 75 x 5 950 850 - 1 750
1 373 10 Support for copper bars 18 x 4, 25 x 4, 25 x 5 1 374 43 80 x 5 1 000 900 - 1 750
and 32 x 5 mm, in sloping position to create 1 374 46 100 x 5 1 250 1 050 - 1 750 12.5
a vertical busbar
For mounting: Flex i b l e
- in XL3 400, in the cable sleeves For connection of devices to busbars, length 2 m
- in XL3 800, in the internal cable sleeves Shaping before drilling and connection
- on plate Cross section I (A)
(mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
1 b a r p e r p o l e ≤ 800 A 1 374 10 13 x 3 200 160
Support for copper bars 25 x 5, 32 x 5, 50 x 5, 1 374 67 20 x 5 400 250
63 x 5 mm in slopping position 1 374 11 24 x 4 400 250
1 373 20 For creating a vertical busbar by direct mounting 1 374 12 32 x 5 630 400
in XL3 800 external cable sleeve 1 374 57 50 x 5 850 630
1 374 58 50 x 10 1 250 1 000
S u p p o r t s fo r A l t i s
Direct mounting in Altis 400, use crosspiece Accessories
Cat.No 095 67 in Altis 600, and crosspiece
Cat.No 095 68 in Altis 800 (except Cat.No 374 54) 1 373 11 Isolating protection for 18 x 4, 25 x 4, 25 x 5
and 32 x 5 mm copper bars
1 b a r p e r p o l e ≤800 A Supplied with fixing clips, length 1 m
1 374 14 For creating a lateral busbars or at the back 10 374 03 Connector with 3 outgoing terminals 200 A
of enclosure (1 x 6 mm2 and 2 x 16 mm2)
Fixed onto rigid plat copper bars
1 b a r p e r p o l e ≤ 1 000 A
5 374 05 Connector with 7 outgoing terminals 400 A
1 373 21 Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, (4 x 6 mm2 and 3 x 16 mm2)
and 80 x 5 mm in ragged position Fixed onto rigid plat copper bars
For creating a lateral busbars
1 o r 2 b a r s p e r p o l e ≤ 1 600 A
1 374 53 Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, Fixing suppor t s
80 x 5, and 100 x 5 mm in aligned position Z i n c p l a t e d s t e e l c ro s s p i e c e s
For creating an horizontal lateral busbars
or at the back of enclosure Set of 2
1 095 67 For depth 600
1 o r 4 b a r s p e r p o l e ≤ 4 000 A 1 095 68 For depth 800
1 374 54 Direct mounting in Altis 600, and Altis 800 Fixing accessories
in lateral or horizontal busbars
Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, 80 x 5, 50 347 48 Clip nuts for M6 screws
100 x 5, 125 x 5, 80 x 10, 100 x 10, 120 x 10 mm, 50 347 49 Clip nuts for M8 screws
in aligned position 50 367 75 M6-10 HF screws with contact washer
242
ex25027_228-243.qxd 28/12/05 18:12 Page 243
pour
selectexemple
your bars
XXXXXXxxxxxx
for busbars supports
xxxxxxxx
≤ 400 A ≤ 800 A
B u s b a rs Cat.No 373 20 (XL3)
Cat.No 373 15 Cat.No 373 10
support s Cat.No 374 14 (Altis)
1 fla t b a r p e r p o l e
Po s i t i o n o f b a rs
Rigid Section I (A) I (A) I (A)

Ca t . N o s
c o p p e r b a rs (mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
374 34 18 x 4 245 200
374 38 25 x 4 - - 280 250
374 18 25 x 5 330 270 330 270 330 270
374 19 32 x 5 450 400 450 400 450 400
374 40 50 x 5 - - - - 700 630
374 41 63 x 5 - - - - 800 700
≤ 1 000 A ≤ 1 600 A
B u s b a rs Cat.No 373 21 (Altis) Cat.No 374 53 (Altis)

support s
1 fla t b a r p e r p o l e 1 or 2 fl a t b a r ( s ) p e r p o l e
Po s i t i o n o f b a rs
Rigid I (A) I (A) I (A)

Section 1 bar/pole 2 bars / p o l e 1 bar/pole 2 bars / p o l e
c o p p e r b a rs Ca t . N o s (mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
374 40 50 x 5 700 630 700 630 1 150 1 000 430 350 650 510
374 41 63 x 5 800 700 800 700 1 350 1 150 500 400 770 590
374 59 75 x 5 950 850 950 850 1 500 1 300 600 475 890 700
374 43 80 x 5 1 050 900 1 000 900 1 650 1 450 630 500 940 740
374 46 100 x 5 1 250 1 050 1 900 1 600 750 580 1 120 900
≤ 4 000 A
B u s b a rs Cat.No 374 54 (Altis)

support s
Po s i t i o n o f b a rs 1 to 4 fl a t bar(s) per pole (th. 5 mm) - 1 to 3 fl a t bar(s) per pole (th. 10 mm)
Rigid
c o p p e r b a rs
1 bar 2 bars 3 bars 4 bars
Section I (A) I (A) I (A) I (A) I (A) I (A) I (A) I (A)

Ca t . N o s
(mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
374 40 50 x 5 700 630 500 420 1 180 1 020 750 630 1 600 1 380 1 000 900 2 020 1 720 1 120 1 000
374 41 63 x 5 800 700 600 500 1 380 1 180 750 630 1 900 1 600 1 100 1 000 2 350 1 950 1 350 1 200
374 59 75 x 5 950 850 700 600 1 600 1 400 1 000 850 2 200 1 900 1 250 1 100 2 700 2 300 1 600 1 400
374 43 80 x 5 1 000 900 750 630 1 700 1 480 1 050 900 2 350 2 000 1 300 1 150 2 850 2 400 1 650 1 450
374 46 100 x 5 1 250 1 050 850 700 2 050 1 800 1 200 1 050 2 900 2 450 1 600 1 400 3 500 2 900 1 900 1 650
125 x 5 1 450 1 270 1 000 800 2 500 2 150 1 450 1 250 3 450 2 900 1 800 1 600 4 150 3 450 2 150 1 950
80 x 10 1 460 1 270 1 150 950 2 500 2 150 1 700 1 500 3 450 2 900 2 500 2 000 - - - -
100 x 10 1 750 1 500 1 350 1 150 3 050 2 550 2 000 1 650 4 150 3 500 2 900 2 400 - - - -
120 x 10 2 000 1 750 1 650 1 450 3 600 2 920 2 500 2 000 4 800 4 000 3 500 3 000 - - - -
243
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 244
selecting busbar supports for Altis

A LTIS ENCLOSURES 400 UP TO 1 600 A
Set of horizontal busbars
374 53
Set of lateral busbars

Set of busbars at back of enclosure
and cable sleeve
374 53
374 14 374 53
+
Width = 600 095 67

400 mm
Width = 800 095 68 374 14
W 400 / 600 / 800 mm
A LTIS ENCLOSURES 600/800 UP TO 1 600 A
374 53 Depth = 600 095 67

Depth = 800 095 68
Set of busbars at back of enclosure

and cable sleeve
374 53
374 14 374 53
374 14
+ +
Width = 600 095 67 600 or Depth = 600 095 67

800 mm
Width = 800 095 68 W 400 / 600 / 800 mm Depth = 800 095 68
A LTIS ENCLOSURES 600/800 UP TO 4 000 A
374 54
600 or
374 54
800 mm
Options for physical mounting subject to heat balance
244
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 245
selecting busbar supports for XL3

DISTRIBUTION CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES XL3 400
IP 43 u p t o 400 A IP 55 u p t o 250 A
Set of busbars at the

back of the cable sleeve Set of busbars at the back
of the enclosure
373 10 373 15
Set of busbars at the

back of enclosure
373 15
175 mm 205 mm
CABLE SLEEVES XL3 800
I n t e r nal ca ble sleev e - 400 A E x t e r nal ca ble sleev e - 800 A
Set of busbars at the Set of busbars at the

back of the cable sleeve back of the cable sleeve
373 10 373 20
230 mm 230 mm
910 660 460
245
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 246
supports and busbars

technical characteristicsxxxx
■ Pe a k c u r r e n t I p k
The distance between the busbar supports depends on the electrodynamic forces generated when there is a short-circuit, these being directly
proportional to the peak value of the short-circuit current (Ipk).
Two methods can be used to determine the peak current value according to data that is generally available:
U s i n g t h e l i m i t i n g c a p a c i t y o f t h e p ro t e c t iv e dev i c e s. Isc
Ra t i n g Isc peak Max.
The limitation curves of the protective devices (DX and DPX) give (A) (kA) peak k
the limited peak current according to the prospective short-circuit current. ea
DPX 125 16-25 11.9 dp
The "Non-limited peak Isc" curve corresponds to no protection. mite
i
DPX 125 40-63 15 n-l
The table opposite gives the limited peak value (Ipk) for a maximum no
prospective short-circuit value equal to the breaking capacity (Icu) of DPX 125 100-125 17 Isc Isc
the device. For lower prospective short-circuit values, reading the curves DPX 160 25 14.3 limited
will provide an optimised value. peak
DPX 160 40 to 160 20
DPX 250 ER 100 to 250 22 Isc RMS.
prospective Isc
DPX 250 All 27
DPX-H 250 All 34
DPX 630 All 34
DPX-H 630 All 42
DPX 1600 All 85
DPX-H 1600 All 110
The peak va l u e i s m u ch h i g h e r i f I s c p r o s p e c t i v e RMS (kA) n

there are no limiting protective devices. This value is calculated by <5 1.5
applying a coefficient of asymmetry (n) to the prospective rms value
5 < I < 10 1.7
shown in the table opposite.
10 < I < 20 2
20 < I < 50 2.1
50 < I 2.2
■ D e t e r m i n i n g t h e d i s t a n c e s b e t we e n t h e s u p p o r t s
F i xe d " E "
Cat.No 373 96 Cat.No 374 32 Cat.No 374 36 Cat.No 373 15
125 125 433
400
40
14
40
83
110 110
9
188 208
70
40
118
148
65 50 50 50 65
Maximum distances "D" (mm)
Suppor ts S u p p o r t 373 15
373 96 374 32 374 36

374 33/34
B a rs 373 88 373 89 (15 x 4) 374 38 374 34 374 18 374 19
(12 x 2) (12 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5)
Isc peak 10 200 400 550 650 1 000 1 200 1 500

(Ipk in kA) 15 150 300 400 500 700 1 000 1 200
20 125 200 300 400 550 750 950
25 100 150 200 350 400 600 750
30 150 200 350 500 650
35 100 150
40 100 250 350 450
50 200 300 400
60 200 250 300
70 150 200 250
80 150 200 250
246
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 247
F i xe d " E " Maximum distances "D" (mm)

EN 60947-1 / IEC 60664-1:
Ui 1 000 V - Uimp: 12 kV degree of pollution: 3
Cat.No 373 10 S u p p o r t 373 10
20
374 34 374 38 374 18 374 19

B a rs (18 x 4) (25 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5)
250
Isc peak 10 550 650 800 900
(Ipk in kA) 15 400 600 700 800
20 300 450 550 700
100
25 250 350 400 500

86
30 200 300 350 400

35 150 250 300 350
40 150 200 300 300
270
45 150 200 200
50 150 175 100
55 100 150 100
60 150
Adjustab l e " E "

EN 60947-1 / IEC 60664-1:
Ui 500 V - Uimp: 8 kV degree of pollution: 3
Cat.No 373 98 Cat.No 374 37
Side for 12 x 2 mm bar Side for 12 x 4 mm bar View from above
6.2 53
Ø9
4
25.5
25.5
12.4 Ø 4.5
2
12.4
8.7
8.7
25.5
75
35
6.2 25
= =
17.5 42
= =
S u p p o r t 373 98 S u p p o r t 374 37
374 33 (15 x 4) or 374 34 (18 x 4)

B a rs 373 88 (12 x 2) or 373 89 (12 x 4)
or 374 38 (25 x 4)
E (mm) 50 75 100 125 50 75 100 125
Isc peak 10 400 600 800 350 600 750
(Ipk in kA) 15 300 450 600 800 250 400 500 700
20 250 350 450 600 150 225 300 375
25 200 250 300 400 125 150 200 250
30 100 125 150 175
35 100 125 150
247
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 248
supports and busbars

technical characteristics (continued)xxxx
F i xe d " E " : 7 5 m m
EN 60947-1 / IEC 60664-1: Cat.No 373 21
Ui: 1 000 V - Uimp: 12 kV - degree of pollution: 3
364
Cat.No 373 20 (XL3) 295 40
Cat.No 374 14 (Altis)
322.3
25
A
C o p p e r b a rs
99.5
( m m ) 50 x 5 63 x 5 75 x 5 80 x 5
A 217 230 242 247
Fixing centre 36.5 fixing centre 325
325
S u p p o r ts 373 20
S u p p o r t 373 21
and 374 14
1 bar per pole 1 bar per pole

B a rs 374 18 374 19 374 40 374 41 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43
(25 x 5) (32 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5)
Isc peak 10 800 900 1 000 1 200 1 200 1 200
(Ipk in kA) 15 600 600 700 800 800 900 1 000 1 000
20 450 500 600 700 650 700 750 750
25 350 400 500 550 500 600 600 600
30 300 350 400 450 400 500 550 550
35 250 300 350 400 350 450 450 450
40 200 250 275 300 300 350 400 400
45 200 200 225 250 300 300 350 350
50 150 150 200 200 250 250 300 300
60 125 125 150 150 200 250 250 250
70 100 100 150 150 150 200 200 200
80 100 100 100 150 200 200
90 100 150 200 200
100 100 150 150 150
110 100 100 150 150
120 100 100 100 100

355
300 40
C o p p e r b a rs
(mm) 50 x 5 63 x 5 75 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5
B
A
A 112 125 137 142 162

B 126 126 171 171 171
Fixing centre 325
S u p p o r t 374 53
1 bar per pole 2 bars p e r p o l e

B a rs 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46
(50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5)
Isc peak 10 1 000 1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 800 900 1 000 1 000 1 200
20 650 700 750 750 900
25 500 600 600 600 700
30 400 500 550 550 600 700 800
35 350 450 450 450 550
40 300 350 400 400 450 550 600 650 650 700
45 300 300 350 350 400
50 250 250 300 300 350 450 500 500 500 550
60 200 250 250 250 300 350 400 400 400 450
70 150 200 250 250 250 250 350 350 350 400
80 100 150 200 200 200 250 300 300 300 300
90 100 150 200 200 200 200 250 300 300 300
100 100 150 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 250
110 100 100 150 150 150 200 150 200 200 200
120 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 200 200 200
248
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 249
F i xe d " E " : 1 1 2 . 5 m m
EN 60947-1/IEC 60664-1: Ui 1 000 V - Uimp 12 kV - degree of pollution 3
min. 550 / max. 750 94

475 T h i c k n e s s o f b a rs 5 to 10 mm
Ca t.No h. 75 h. 80 h. 100 h. 120 h. 125
(mm)
A
374 54 A 145 150 170 190 195
min. 525 / max. 725
M a x i m u m d i s t a n c e s " D " w i t h b a rs t h i c k 5 m m
S u p p o r t 373 54
1 bar per pole 2 bars p e r p o l e 3 bars p e r p o l e 4 bars p e r p o l e

B a rs 75 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 100 x 5 75 x 5
50 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5
80 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5
Isc peak 10 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 - - - - - - - - - -
(Ipk in kA) 15 1 050 1 200 1 350 1 550 1 700 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 - - - - - - - - -
20 800 900 1 000 1 150 1 350 1 200 1 350 1 500 1 700 1 700 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
25 650 750 800 950 1 100 950 1 100 1 200 1 400 1 550 1 250 1 450 1 600 1 700 1 700 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
30 550 600 700 800 900 800 900 1 000 1 150 1 300 1 050 1 200 1 350 1 550 1 700 1 300 1 500 1 700 1 700 1 700
35 450 550 600 650 800 700 800 900 1 000 1 150 900 1 050 1 150 1 300 1 500 1 150 1 250 1 450 1 650 1 700
40 400 450 550 600 700 600 700 800 900 1 000 800 900 1 050 1 150 1 300 1 000 1 100 1 300 1 450 1 650
45 350 400 450 550 600 550 600 700 800 900 700 800 900 1 050 1 200 900 1 000 1 150 1 300 1 450
50 350 350 450 500 550 500 550 650 700 800 650 750 850 950 1 050 800 900 1 050 1 150 1 350
60 300 300 350 400 450 400 450 550 600 700 550 600 700 800 900 650 750 850 1 000 1 100
70 250 250 300 350 400 350 400 450 500 650 450 550 600 700 750 600 650 750 850 950
80 - 250 250 300 350 300 350 400 450 550 400 450 550 600 700 500 600 650 750 850
90 - - 250 250 300 300 300 350 400 500 350 400 500 550 600 450 500 600 650 750
100 - - - 250 300 250 300 300 350 500 350 400 450 500 550 400 450 550 600 700
110 - - - 250 250 250 250 300 350 450 300 350 400 450 500 350 450 500 550 600
120 - - - - 250 - 250 250 300 450 300 300 350 400 450 350 400 450 550 550
130 - - - - 250 - - 250 300 400 250 300 350 350 450 300 350 400 500 550
140 - - - - - - - 250 250 400 250 250 300 350 400 300 350 400 450 500
150 - - - - - - - - 250 350 250 250 300 350 350 300 300 350 400 450
160 - - - - - - - - 250 350 - 250 250 300 350 250 300 350 400 350
170 - - - - - - - - - 350 - 250 250 300 350 250 300 300 350 300
180 - - - - - - - - - 300 - - 250 300 300 250 250 300 350 300
190 - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 250 300 250 250 300 300 250
200 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 300 - 250 250 300 250
210 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 250 - 250 250 250 200
220 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 250 - - 250 250 200
M a x i m u m d i s t a n c e s " D " w i t h b a rs t h i c k 1 0 m m
S u p p o r t 373 54
1 bar per pole 2 bars p e r p o l e 3 bars p e r p o l e

B a rs
80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
Isc peak 20 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
(Ipk in kA) 25 1 600 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
30 1 350 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
35 1 150 1 300 1 450 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
40 1 050 1 150 1 300 1 500 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
45 900 1 050 1 150 1 350 1 550 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
50 850 950 1 050 1 200 1 400 1 550 1 600 1 700 1 700
60 700 800 850 1 000 1 150 1 300 1 350 1 550 1 700
70 600 700 750 900 1 000 1 100 1 150 1 300 1 500
80 550 600 650 750 900 1 000 1 000 1 150 1 300
90 500 550 600 700 800 900 900 1 050 1 100
100 450 500 550 600 700 800 850 900 950
110 400 450 500 550 650 750 750 800 800
120 350 400 450 550 600 650 700 750 750
130 350 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 700
140 300 350 400 450 500 600 600 650 650
150 300 350 350 450 500 550 550 650 600
160 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 500
170 250 300 300 350 450 500 500 500 500
180 250 300 300 350 400 450 500 450 450
190 250 250 300 350 400 450 450 400 400
200 200 250 300 300 350 400 450 400 400
210 200 250 250 300 350 350 400 350 350
220 - 250 250 300 350 300 350 300 300
230 - 200 250 300 300 300 300 300 300
240 - - 200 250 300 250 300 250 250
250 - - 200 250 300 250 250 250 250
249
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 250

]
XL3 160 cabinets

[XL 3
The new XL3 160 cabinets are delivered “ready to use”. They enable
any configuration to be created, with or without connection panel
They are easy to connect and are ideal for all installations (surface
mounting and flush mounting solutions)
The range Freedom to distribute

XL3 160 cabinets, capacity 24 modules
per row, are available in 3 versions: MODULAR DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS
• Monoblock or combinable, for distribution
up to 160 A
Fully modular metal cabinets
• removable side panels
• removable separable top and bottom IP 2x TERMINALS BUSBAR CONNECTIONS
for inserting cable entry plates
• Horizontal or • Enable each function
vertical mounting to be associated
Fully modular insulated cabinets
with support with its protection
(class II box)
• removable side panels and frame
• guide rings for vertical wiring
TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR PROTECTIVE
CONDUCTORS
Both these types of cabinet are supplied complete
with rails, faceplates and adjustable cable entry plate • Supplied ready-assembled
They have:
• 1 removable chassis with rails 3 fitted
• 1 brass bar for protective conductors
Freedom to choose the finish
FACEPLATES
Fully modular flush-mounting cabinets
supplied complete with: • 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle
• Wide area for labelling
• metal flush-mounting box
depth 100 mm min.
• removable chassis with rails 3 fitted
• 1 brass bar for protective conductors DOORS
• finishing frame and plastic faceplates • Flat, metal or transparent
• Curved, metal or transparent
(To be ordered separately)
250
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 251
Freedom to choose how you work

XL3 160 cabinets give you total freedom to work
and wire as you choose, thanks to:
POWER SUPPLY CABLES

HELD IN PLACE
• At the back of the enclosure
with a single clamp
TOTAL ACCESSIBILITY
• Removable chassis
• Removable side panel or frame,
providing access from all sides
CABLE CIRCULATION
• Using guide rings for wiring
• Using Lina 25 ducting
SIMPLIFIED ASSEMBLY
• One tool (screwdriver) for assembling
or dismantling all elements

See the E-Catalogue: instructions, technical
data sheets, etc.
251
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 252
XL3 160
''Ready to use'' metal and insulated distribution cabinets
200 06 200 53 201 50
Dimensions (p. 255)
Fireproof to 750°C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings
Removable chassis with rails 2
fitted
Brass bar for protective conductors fitted:
36 holes 1.5 to 10 mm and 2 x 35 mm2 holes
2
Capacity 24 modules per row. RAL 7035

Supplied complete with rails and faceplates
Doors to be ordered separately
Pack Cat.Nos Fully modular metal cab i n e t s Pack Cat.Nos F u l l y m o d u l a r i n s u l a ted ca b i n e t s

IP 43 - IK 08 with seal and door IP 43 - IK 07 with seal and door
IP 40 - IK 08 with door IP 40 - K 07 with door
IP 30 - IK 07 without door IP 30 - IK 04 without door
Removable side panels Class II cabinets
Removable separable top and bottom for inserting Removable side panels and frame
adjustable cable glands Wire guide rings for vertical wiring
Can take DPX 125 units Can take DPX 125 units
No of No of Height Width Depth No of No of Height Width Depth
rows modules (mm) (mm) (mm) 200 rows modules (mm) (mm) (mm) 200
1 200 02 2 48 450 575 147 200 1 200 52 2 48 450 575 147 200
200 200
1 200 03 3 72 600 575 147 150 1 200 53 3 72 600 575 147 150
200 200
200 200
1 200 04 4 96 750 575 147 150 1 200 54 4 96 750 575 147 150
150 150
200 200
200 200
1 200 05 5 120 900 575 147 150 1 200 55 5 120 900 575 147 150
150 150
150 150
200 200
200 200
150 150
1 200 06 6 144 1 050 575 147 150
1 200 56 6 144 1 050 575 147 150
150 150
150 150
200 200
Ca b l e e n t r y p l a t e s Wa l l m o u n t i n g l u g s
1 200 20 Additional adjustable plate 1 201 50 Set of 4 plastic lugs
Ca b l e f i x i n g s u p p o r t
1 200 35 Holds cable in place on entry to cabinet
Wa l l m o u n t i n g l u g s
1 201 00 Set of 4 metal lugs
252
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 253
XL3 160
doors, equipment, wiring, connection of protective conductor
200 00
203 99
200 93
202 55 202 73
202 65 202 83 373 00
Pack Cat.Nos D o o rs Pack Cat.Nos E q u i p m e n t ( c o n t i nu e d )

Supplied with handle C l i p - o n h o l d e r s f o r a d h e s i v e la b e l s
Interchangeable barrels to be ordered Supplied with sheet of labels for
separately marking rows on faceplate
C u r v ed 10 203 99 24 modules
For cabinet Cabinet/door distance (mm)
Metal Transparent Height (mm) Metal Transparent
Wiring
1 202 52 202 62 450 57 53
1 202 53 202 63 600 57 53 W i re g u i d e
1 202 54 202 64 750 57 53 10 200 94 For horizontal wiring
1 202 55 202 65 900 57 53 Fits directly on the rails that are installed
1 202 56 202 66 1 050 57 53 Takes bars with holes Cat.No 373 00 and 12 x 4
Fla t (1) bars with clamps Cat.No 373 02 (p. 268)
For cabinet height (mm) Cabinet/door distance (mm) 1 200 93 For vertical wiring
Metal Transparent Surface mounting Flush-mounting Metal Transparent Fits directly on cabinet chassis
1 202 72 202 82 450 38 34 Set of 2 d u c t i n g s u p p o r t s
1 202 73 202 83 600 695 38 34 10 200 70 For direct vertical mounting of Lina 25 ducting
1 202 74 202 84 750 845 38 34 Fits directly on cabinet chassis
1 202 75 202 85 900 995 38 34
1 202 76 202 86 1 050 1 145 38 34 Finishing strips
Key bar rels for metal or transparent doors 1 201 60 For DLP/cabinet connection
Supplied with a set of 2 keys
1 202 91 Type 405 C o n n e c t i o n o f p ro t e c t iv e c o n d u c t o rs
1 202 92 Type 455 A d d i t i o n a l b ra s s b a r
1 202 93 Type 1 242 E
1 202 94 Type 2 433 A 1 373 00 Fits directly on the supports integrated in the cabinet
or on rail with wire guide Cat.No 200 94
Seal fo r I P 4 3 p r o t e c t i o n 36 holes Ø 5.3 mm (1.5 to 10 mm2)
1 201 30 Supplied ready to use 2 holes Ø 9 mm (35 mm2)
S e l f - a d h e s i v e d o c u m e n t h o l d e r s fo r p l a n s S u p p o r t fo r I P 2 x t e r m i n a l b l o c k
10 097 99 Flexible plastic - A4 1 200 50 Set of 2 supports
1 365 82 Rigid plastic closed - IP 50 Fit directly at the back of cabinets (horizontal or vertical
324 x 120 x 18 mm position)
Takes 12 x 2 flat bar Cat.No 048 19
10 048 19 Flat bar 12 x 2 length 1 metre
Equipment
U n iv ers a l ra i l
1 200 00 Rail for 2 fixing DPX 160 units in fully
modular insulated cabinets with dedicated
space
Fixing plates
For fixing devices on rail 2
1 262 08 For DPX 125
Rail height spacer
Designed to enable modular equipment
and DPX 125 units to be mounted together
on plate Cat.No 262 08, and DPX 160
mounted on plate Cat.No 262 09
1 262 99 For 20 modules
B l a n k i n g p l a tes RAL 7035
For metal or plastic faceplates
20 200 51 Smooth adjustable strip, 24 modules
10 016 65 18 modules, separable per module
or 1/2 module
(1) Not suitable for Vistop with front handle

Red catalogue numbers : New products
253
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 254
XL3 160 XL3 160

''Ready to use'' flush-mounting distribution cabinets flush-mounting distribution cabinets
Installa t i o n p r i n c i p l e
200 13 + door 202 83 (p. 251) Removable chassis
IP 40 - IK 08 with door
IP 30 - IK 04 without door Fixing cables
Fireproof to 750°C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation and wiring
in public buildings
Supplied complete: metal flush-mounting box, removable chassis with
rails fitted, brass bar for protective conductors fitted: 36 holes 1.5 to
10 mm2, 2 x 35 mm2 holes, finishing frame and plastic faceplates
Flush-mounting depth: 100 mm min.
Capacity: 24 modules per row
RAL 7035
Doors to be ordered separately (p. 253)
Can take DPX 125 units
Pack Cat.Nos Fully modular flush-mounting cabinets

No of No of Front panel Box
rows modules (mm) (mm)
Height Width Height Width 200
1 200 13 3 72 695 670 640 617 150
200
200
150
1 200 14 4 96 845 670 790 617 150
200
200 Vertical wire guide

150 Cat.No 200 93
1 200 15 5 120 995 670 940 617 150
150
200
200
150
Dimensions
150 Without door
1 200 16 6 144 1 145 670 1 090 617 150
150
200
Fixing accessor y
1 200 10 For hollow partition
B
670 100 40
Ca t. Nos A (mm) B (mm)

200 13 640 695
200 14 790 845
200 15 940 995
200 16 1 090 1 145
254
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 255
XL3 160
insulated and metal distribution cabinets
I n s t a l l a t i o n p r i n c i p l e fo r m e t a l c a b i n e t s I n s t a l l a t i o n p r i n c i p l e fo r i n s u l a t e d c a b i n e t s
Side panels can be Removable chassis Removable frame Side panels can be Removable chassis
removed separately removed separately
Fixing cables and

wiring
Cat.No 200 35
Fixing cables
and wiring
Vertical wire guide

Cat.No 200 93
Vertical wire guide
Support for Lina 25

ducting
Cat.No 200 70
D i m e n s i o n s o f metal and insula ted ca b i n e t s
Metal ca b i n e t s I n s u l a ted ca b i n e t s H
Ca t. Nos Ca t. Nos (mm)
H 200 02 200 52 450
200 03 200 53 600
200 04 200 54 750
200 05 200 55 900
200 06 200 56 1 050
575
W i t h fla t d o o r With cur ved door

147
147
170
190
255
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 256

]
XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures

[XL 3
The new XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures are fully extendable
They provide strong housing for distribution assemblies, and their
ingenious innovations (functional uprights, 2-position rails)
make them easy to install
Freedom to choose Freedom to distribute how you wish

the solution you want “Standard” distribution
Performed with:
The XL3 400 range is fully extendable
It can take 24 modules per row DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS
and heights from 600 to 1900 mm
It includes cabinets and enclosures • Available in modular, extra-slim and stepped versions
which can be used with cable sleeves up to 400 A
Metal cabinets and enclosures IP 43

Take devices up to 400 A, and the insulated backplate
Supplied flat with: TERMINAL BLOCKS BUSBAR CONNECTIONS
- Functional uprights fitted on the back
• Universal use • Enable each function
- Adjustable cable entry plate to associated with
• Can distribute up
- Plinth height 100 mm (for enclosures) to 100 A its protection
Insulated cabinets (class II) IP 43

Take devices up to 400 A
Supplied flat with:
- Functional uprights fitted on the back FLAT BUSBARS
- Insulated backplate which takes the C-section • Fit at the back of the cabinet, enclosure and cable
busbar distribution XL-Part 400 system sleeve
One-piece IP 55 metal cabinets

Take devices up to 250 A “Optimised” distribution
Supplied with: Performed with:
- Removable chassis
- Reversible solid door with handle XL-PART 400 ACTIVE BACKPLATE
• C-section busbars for fitting in the insulated active
backplate
XL-PART, 250 A ROW DISTRIBUTION BLOCK

• For power supply and distribution
in rows up to 250 A
• Takes power devices up to DPX 250 ER
• Connects to the XL-Part 400 active backplate
256
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 257
Freedom to choose how you work

XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures give you total freedom
to wire as you choose, thanks to:
FUNCTIONAL UPRIGHTS
• Equipment can be fitted quickly: only 1 tool is needed
SEPARATE SIDE PANELS

• Can be removed individually
• Provide access from all sides
INGENIOUS EQUIPMENT
• Rails3 with 2 indexed positions: upper or lower
• Directly attachable plates
SIMPLIFIED JOINING
• XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures can be joined
together horizontally and vertically, with no need
for any accessory

FACEPLATES
• 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle
FOR MORE INFORMATION DOORS

• Flat, metal or transparent
See the E-Catalogue: • Curved, metal or transparent
instructions, technical data sheets, etc. To be ordered separately
257
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 258
XL3 400
equipment selection
Device Fixing Po s i t i o n Type of device
FIXING ON DIN-RAIL
Lexic < 63 A Cabinet or enclosure vertical

Cable sleeve vertical
Lexic > 63 A Cabinet or enclosure vertical

Vistop 63 to 160 A Cabinet or enclosure vertical
DPX 125 Cabinet or enclosure vertical with modular equipment

DPX 250 ER Cabinet or enclosure vertical with modular equipment
DPX-IS 250 Cabinet or enclosure vertical with modular equipment
FIXING ON PLATE
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 125 vertical
Cabinet or enclosure with e.l.c.bs
(Combination possible
with DPX 160 horizontal with or without e.l.c.bs
and DPX 250 ER) no e.l.c.bs
with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 160 vertical
with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 250 ER vertical
with e.l.c.bs
DPX-IS 250 Cabinet or enclosure vertical device only centred
1 to 2 dev, no e.l.c.bs
device only centred
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure 1 to 2 dev, with e.l.c.bs
DPX 250 with centred e.l.c.bs
horizontal with or without e.l.c.bs
device only
with e.l.c.bs
1 to 2 dev, no e.l.c.bs
device only centred downstream
Cabinet or enclosure vertical
1 to 2 dev, with e.l.c.bs
DPX 630 with centred e.l.c.bs
device only
with e.l.c.bs
DPX-IS 630 Cabinet or enclosure vertical device only
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately, Cat.Nos below:

203 67: adaptor for DPX 125 earth leakage module
203 68: adaptor for DPX 160 earth leakage module
203 69: adaptor for DPX 250 ER earth leakage module
258
EX25027_244-259.qxd 28/12/05 18:14 Page 259
pour exemple : xxxxxxx pour exemple : xxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Fixing Fixing Device faceplate

device p l a te Height (mm) Metal Plastic
202 00 -
202 01 150 203 00 203 50
202 03 - 150 203 03 203 53
202 00 -
202 01 200 203 01 203 51
202 03 - 200 203 04
202 00 -
202 01 200 203 01 203 51
202 00 262 08 200 203 01 203 51

202 00 262 09 300 203 10 203 60
202 00 262 09 300 203 10 203 60
202 00 262 39 300 203 10 203 60
- 202 10 300 203 10 203 60

- 202 12 400 203 12(1) 203 62(1)
- 202 14 200 203 14 203 64(1)
- 202 18 300 203 18 -
- 202 19 400 203 19(1) -
- 202 10 300 203 10 203 60
- 202 12 400 203 12(1) 203 62(1)
- 202 14 200 203 15 203 64(1)
- 202 18 300 203 18 -
- 202 19 400 203 19(1) -
- 202 10 300 203 10 203 60
- 202 12 400 203 12(1) 203 62(1)
- 202 16 200 203 16 203 64(1)
- 202 18 300 203 18 -
- 202 19 400 203 19(1) -
- 202 05 300 203 10 203 60
- 202 20 400 203 20 203 70
- 202 21 400 203 21 203 71
- 202 22 600 203 22 203 72
- 202 23 600 203 23 203 73
- 202 24 200 203 24 203 74
- 202 28 400 203 28 -
- 202 29 800 203 29 -
- 202 20 400 203 20 203 70
- 202 21 400 203 21 203 71
- 202 22 600 203 22 203 72
- 202 23 600 203 23 203 73
- 202 28 400 203 28 -
- 202 29 800 203 29 -
- 202 07 400 203 07 -
259
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 260
NEW
for3example:
XL 400 xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx cabinets, enclosures and cable sleeves
distribution
201 19 201 39 201 57 201 77 201 05 201 25
Dimensions (p. 269)
Take devices up to 400 A

Fireproof to 750°C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60 695-2 for installation in public buildings (up to 100 kVA for class II cabinets)
RAL 7035
Door to be ordered separately
Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical)
Pack Cat.Nos Metal ca b i n e t s Pack Cat.Nos Class II ca b i n e t s

IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door IP 43 - IK 07 with kit and door
IP 40 - IK 08 with door IP 40 - IK 07 with door
IP 30 - IK 07 without door IP 30 - IK 04 without door
Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth Cabinets made of insulating material
(mm) (mm) total usable (mm)
Supplied with active backplate which takes the
1 201 03 600 550 575 515 175 C-section busbar distribution system,
1 201 04 750 700 575 515 175 Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth
1 201 05 900 850 575 515 175
1 201 53 600 550 575 515 175
1 201 06 1 050 1 000 575 515 175
1 201 54 750 700 575 515 175
1 201 07 1 200 1 150 575 515 175
1 201 55 900 850 575 515 175
1 201 08 1 500 1 450 575 515 175
1 201 56 1 050 1 000 575 515 175
1 201 57 1 200 1 150 575 515 175
Ca ble sleev es fo r m e t a l c a b i n e t s
Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth
Ca ble sleev es class II
1 201 23 600 550 310 250 175 Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth
1 201 24 750 700 310 250 175 (mm) (mm) total usable (mm)
1 201 25 900 850 310 250 175 1 201 73 600 550 310 250 175
1 201 26 1 050 1 000 310 250 175 1 201 74 750 700 310 250 175
1 201 27 1 200 1 150 310 250 175 1 201 75 900 850 310 250 175
1 201 28 1 500 1 450 310 250 175 1 201 76 1 050 1 000 310 250 175
1 201 77 1 200 1 150 310 250 175
Metal encl o s u res
Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm D i s t r i bu t i o n e q u i p m e n t
Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth and f ac e pl a t e s (p. 263 to 267)
1 201 18 1 600 1 450 575 515 175
1 201 19 1 900 1 750 575 515 175 W i r i n g a c c e s s o r i e s (p. 268)
Ca ble sleev es fo r m e t a l e n cl o s u res

Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm
Height Faceplate height Width (mm) Depth
1 201 38 1 600 1 450 310 250 175
1 201 39 1 900 1 750 310 250 175
260
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 261
XL3 400
doors and accessories
202 55 202 65
201 95
202 73 202 83 202 59 202 69 201 50
Pack Cat.Nos D o o rs Pack Cat.Nos A c c e s s o r i e s fo r c a b i n e t s,

Supplied with handle e n cl o s u res and sleev es
Interchangeable key barrels to be ordered Seal fo r I P 4 3 p r o t e c t i o n
separately
1 201 30 Supplied ready to use
C u r v ed Ca b l e f i x i n g s u p p o r t s
For cabinet/enclosure Cabinet/door distance
Metal Transparent Height (mm) Metal Transparent For fixing clamps for holding cables
1 202 53 202 63 600 57 53 in place on entry to the cabinet
1 202 54 202 64 750 57 53 1 201 35 For cabinets and enclosures
1 202 55 202 65 900 57 53 1 201 37 For cable sleeves
1 202 56 202 66 1 050 57 53 Plinths
1 202 57 202 67 1 200 57 53 Height 100 mm
1 202 58 202 68 1 500/1 600 57 53 1 201 10 For cabinets and enclosures
1 201 12 For cable sleeves
1 202 59 202 69 1 900 57 53
U n iv ers a l s u p p o r t fo r c a ble sleev es
Fla t
For mounting terminal blocks, earth terminals, etc.
1 202 73 202 83 600 38 34 1 201 95 Set of 3 metal supports
1 202 74 202 84 750 38 34
D i v i d e r fo r h o r i z o n t a l c o m p a r t m e n t a l i s a t i o n
1 202 75 202 85 900 38 34
1 201 90 Metal divider
1 202 76 202 86 1 050 38 34
1 202 77 202 87 1 200 38 34 Ca b l e e n t r y p l a t e s
1 202 78 202 88 1 500/1 600 38 34 1 201 20 Additional adjustable plate
1 202 79 202 89 1 900 38 34 for XL3 400 metal
Metal Ca ble sleev es Wa l l m o u n t i n g l u g s
1 201 63 600 38 1 201 00 Set of 4 metal lugs for XL3 400 metal cabinet
1 201 50 Set of 4 plastic lugs for XL3 400 insulated cabinet
1 201 64 750 38
1 201 65 900 38 H o r i zo n t a l j o i n i n g s t rengthening bar
1 201 66 1 050 38 1 201 51 Set of 2 metal bars for additional strength when
1 201 67 1 200 38 joining 2 XL3 400 insulated cabinets
1 201 68 1 500/1 600 38
1 201 69 1 900 38 D i s t r i bu t i o n e q u i p m e n t
and f ac e pl a t e s (p. 263 to 267)
A c c e s s o r i e s fo r d o o r s
Key b a r r e l s a n d k n o c ko u t fo r m e t a l o r W i re D u c t i n g (p. 268)
t ra n s p a re n t d o o rs
Supplied with a set of 2 keys
1 202 91 Type 405
1 202 92 Type 455
1 202 93 Type 1242E
1 202 94 Type 2433A
1 202 96 Double bar knockout
S e l f - a d h e s i v e d o c u m e n t h o l d e r s fo r p l a n s
10 097 99 Flexible plastic - A4
1 365 82 Rigid plastic closed - IP 50 324 x 120 x 18 mm
Ca t a l o g u e N o s. i n b o l d : Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets

261
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 262
XL3 400 XL3 400

IP 55 distribution cabinets and accessories IP 55 distribution cabinets and accessories
201 82 201 85
IP 55 - IK 08
One-piece metal enclosure
Supplied with reversible solid door fitted with handle,
interchangeable key barrels to be ordered separately (see p. 261)
and wall-mounting lugs
Removable chassis
Fireproof to 750°C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation
in public buildings Dimensions
RAL 7035
Can take devices up to 250 A
Pack Cat.Nos IP 55 ca b i n e t s
Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth
(mm) height (mm) external usable (mm)
1 201 82 515 400 655 515 215
1 201 83 715 600 655 515 215
1 201 84 915 800 655 515 215
H
1 201 85 1 115 1 000 655 515 215
Accessories
Ca b s t o pTM ca b l e e n t r y p l a t e s
1 364 97 Plate 28 entries Ø 5 to 14
2 entries Ø 14 to 24 Ca t. Nos H (mm)
2 spare 100 mm 201 82 515
Ca b l e f i x i n g s u p p o r t 201 83 715
For fixing clamps for holding cables in place on entry 201 84 915
to the cabinet 655 201 85 1115
1 201 35 For IP 55 cabinets
D i v i d e r fo r h o r i z o n t a l c o m p a r t m e n t a l i s a t i o n
1 201 90 For IP 55 cabinets
D i s t r i bu t i o n e q u i p m e n t With flat door

a n d f a c epl a t e s (p. 263 to 267)
655
W i re D u c t i n g (p. 268)
189
215
Ca t a l o g u e N o s. i n b o l d : Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets

262
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 263
XL3 400 XL3 400

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on rail 2 fixing devices on rail 2
DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, DPX 160, DPX 250 ER and Lexic devices
P r i n c i p l e fo r i n s t a l l a t i o n o f a l u m i n i u m r a i l 2
Ca t.No 202 00
Adjustable device: upper position for Lexic device and
202 01 202 00 lower position for DPX
No screws required for installation
DPX
Lexic
203 00 203 50
DPX
Lexic
203 01 203 51
L o we r p o s i t i o n Upper position
Pack Cat.Nos Rail 2f o r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s a n d Vi s t o p

up to 160 A
1 202 01 Comprises a rail 2
Fits onto functional uprights
Takes wire guides Cat.No 200 94
DPX only DPX For Lexic
+ spacer for Lexic devices
A l u m i n i u m ra i l 2
f o r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s, devices
Vistop up to 160 A, DPX -IS 250, DPX 125,
DPX 160 and 250 ER
1 202 00 Comprises an aluminium profile rail, 1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e f a c e p l a t e s
and 2 x 2-position fixing brackets
For mounting DPX using the plates below
Takes XL-Part 100 and 125 row distribution blocks
Pla t e s fo r m o u n t i n g D P X 1/4
For mounting DPX on aluminium profile rail
Cat.No 202 00
2
1 262 08 For DPX 125
1 262 09 For DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
1 262 39 For DPX-IS 250
Rail height spacer
1 262 99 Designed to enable modular equipment
and DPX 125, DPX 160, DPX 250 ER and DPX-IS 250
to be mounted together on device Cat.No 202 00
using the above plates
For 20 modules
1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e f a c e p l a t e s
150
Fo r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s
1 203 00 Metal
1 203 50 Plastic
For Vistop 160 A and DPX 125
200
1 203 01 Metal
1 203 51 Plastic
For 1 to 3 DPX 125, 160 or 250 ER,
1 to 3 DPX -IS 250, and Vistop 160
300
1 203 10 Metal
1 203 60 Plastic
263
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 264
XL3 400 XL3 400

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate, fixing devices on plate
DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
Installa tion principle

Pla t e s a t t a c h e d a n d f i t t e d d i r e c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
202 10 202 14
1/4
203 10 203 14
Device only
Pack Cat.Nos Pla te fo r f i xed vers i o n d ev i c e s w i t h

f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
An additional rail 2
Fit onto functional uprights
can be installed
Dev i c e s i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
For mounting and combining 1 to 3 devices
1 202 05 For 1 DPX-IS 250
1 202 10 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER 300
1 202 12 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER
with downstream earth leakage module
Dev i c e s i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
1 202 14 For 1 DPX 125 or DPX 160 with or without
downstream earth leakage module
1 202 16 For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without downstream
earth leakage module
1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e
facepla tes
Metal Plastic Dev i c e s i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
300
1 203 10 203 60 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, 160 or

250 ER or 1 DPX-IS 250
1 203 12(1) 203 62(1) For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 Window ada ptor
or DPX 250 ER with
400
downstream earth leakage

module
Dev i c e s o n p l a te
Metal Plastic i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
1 203 14 203 64(1) For DPX 125 with or without
earth leakage module,
200
height 200 mm Cat.No 203 67 for DPX 125

Cat.No 203 68 for DPX 160
1 203 15 203 64(1) For DPX 160 with or without Cat.No 203 69 for DPX 250 ER
200
height 200 mm
1 203 16 203 64(1) For DPX 250 ER with or without
200
height 200 mm
W i n d o w a d a p t o rs
1 203 67 For DPX 125 with downstream earth
leakage module
1 203 68 For DPX 160 with downstream earth
leakage module
1 203 69 For DPX 250 ER with downstream earth
leakage module
U n iv ers a l p l a t e s (p. 267)
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately
264
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 265
XL3 400 XL3 400

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate, mounting devices in horizontal position
DPX-IS 630(1), DPX 250 and DPX 630(1)
Pla t e s a t t a c h e d a n d f i t t e d d i r e c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
202 20 202 24
1/4
203 20 203 24
Pack Cat.Nos Pla te fo r f i xed vers i o n d ev i c e s

w i t h f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
An additional rail can be installed 2 Dev i c e w i t h e a r th leaka ge module
1 202 07 For 1 DPX-IS 630(1)
1 202 20 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630(1)
and 1 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630 or 1 DPX 250
with 1 distribution block Cat.No. 374 00
(which takes up the space of one device)
1 202 21 For 1 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630(1) fixed version
in central position 200
1 202 22 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 earth leakage modules
or 1 DPX 630(1) earth leakage module
and 1 DPX 250 earth leakage module or
1 DPX 630(1) earth leakage module or
1 DPX 250 earth leakage module with
1 distribution block Cat.No 374 00
(which takes up the space of one device)
1 202 23 For 1 DPX 250 or DPX 630(1) with earth
leakage module in central position
Dev i c e i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
1 202 24 For 1 DPX 250 with or without earth
leakage module
1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e
facepla tes
Metal Plastic Dev i c e s i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
1 203 20 203 70 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 630(1)
400
Dev i c e w i t h d i s t r i bu t i o n b l o c k
1 203 21 203 71 For 1 DPX 250 or 630(1)
in central position
400
1 203 22 203 72 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 630(1)

with earth leakage module
600
1 203 23 203 73 For 1 DPX 250 or 630(1) with

earth leakage module, 300
600
device centred
1 203 07 For DPX-IS 630(1)

300
1 203 24 203 74 For DPX 250 with or without
200

height 200 mm
(1) Limited to 400 A

265
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 266
XL3 400 XL3 400

distribution equipment and faceplates mounting devices in cable sleeves
for devices in cable sleeves
I n s t a l l a t i o n d ev i c e
F i x i n g o n ra i l 2 (Cat.No 202 03)
202 03 203 03
200
202 18 203 18
Pack Cat.Nos Rail 2

Fo r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s a n d Vi s t o p u p t o 1 6 0 A Pla t e s a t t a c h e d a n d f i t t e d d i r e c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
1 202 03 Comprises a rail 2 and 2 fixing brackets
Takes wire guides Cat.No 200 94
Capacity: 9 modules
f o r d ev i c e s o n r a i l2
150
Fo r m o d u l a r d evices
1 203 03 Metal
1 203 53 Plastic
For modular devices and Vistop up to 160 A 1/4

200
1 203 04 Metal
Pla te fo r f i xed vers i o n d ev i c e s w i t h

f ro n t t e r m i n a l s
Fit onto functional uprights M o u n t i n g o n p l a te (Ca t . N o 2 0 2 2 8 )
1 202 18 For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER
1 202 19 For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER, with downstream
1 202 28 For DPX 250 or DPX 630(1)
1 202 29 Plate for DPX 250 or DPX 630(1), with downstream
f o r d ev i c e s o n m e t a l p l a te
300
1 203 18 For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER

400
400
1 203 19(2) For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER

400
1 203 28 For DPX 250 and 630
1 203 29 For DPX 250 and 630

with earth leakage module
800
1 203 67 For DPX 125 with downstream earth leakage module
1 203 68 For DPX 160 with downstream earth leakage module
1 203 69 For DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage
module
(1) Limited to 400 A
(2) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately
266
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 267
XL3 400
accessories and solid faceplates
202 41 201 60
200 92 203 91 203 99 201 45 201 48
Pack Cat.Nos Pe r fo rat e d u n iv ers a l p l a t e s Pack Cat.Nos 1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e

f a c e p l a t e s fo r c a b i n e t s a n d
Fit directly onto functional uprights e n cl o s u res
1 202 41 Height 200 mm for cabinets and enclosures
1 202 42 Height 300 mm for cabinets and enclosures S o l i d f a c e p l a tes
1 202 43 Height 300 mm for cable sleeves Metal Plastic Height (mm)
1 203 40 203 90 50
C l i p s n u t s fo r p e r fo r a t e d p l a tes
1 203 41 203 91 100
100 364 40 For M4 screws
100 364 41 For M5 screws 1 203 42 203 92 150
1 203 43 203 93 200
Finishing strip
1 203 44 203 94 300
1 201 60 For a perfect finish at the join between
DLP trunking and XL3 400 cabinets or enclosures
RAL 7035 1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e
f a c e p l a t e s fo r c a ble sleev es
U n iv ers a l r a i l 2 Metal Plastic
S o l i d f a c e p l a tes
Height (mm)
1 202 04 Fits onto functional uprights
Width 515 mm 1 201 41 50
1 201 42 100
U n iv ers a l a d j u s t a b l e f i x i n g d ev i c e 1 201 40 200
1 201 97 300
Comprising a rail
fixing brackets
2
and 2 adjustable
1 201 98 400
Fits onto functional uprights 1 201 43 201 99 550
1 202 02 For XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures 1 201 44 700
1 201 45 850
1 201 46 1 000
Accessories 1 201 47 1 150
Insulat i n g f i x i n g s u p p o r t 1 201 48 1 450
1 200 90 Set of 2 supports, fits directly on functional uprights 1 201 49 1 750
in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures
For creating an insulated earth with 12 x 4 mm Accessories
copper bar (Cat.No 373 49) or flat bar
12 x 2 mm (Cat.No 048 19) and IP 2x terminal block B l a n k i n g p l a tes
Also takes universal rail Cat.No 202 04 RAL 7035
For metal or plastic faceplates
C l i p nu t s 20 200 51 24 modules, smooth adjustable strip
1/4 fastening on front panel on functional uprights 10 016 65 18 modules, separable into modules or 1/2
20 200 92 Bag of 20 clip nuts for M6 screw modules
50 200 91 Bag of 50 x M6 screws C l i p - o n h o l d e r f o r a d h e s i v e la b e l s
A e ro s o l p a i n t s p ray 10 203 99 Supplied with sheet of labels for marking
6 200 98 RAL 7035 rows on faceplate
Catalogue Nos. in bold: Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets
267
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 268
XL3example:
for 400 xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
wiring and connection accessories
201 70 201 93 2 x 393 99 + 1 x 373 01 mounted
Pack Cat.Nos W i re D u c t i n g Pack Cat.Nos C o n n e c t i o n o f p ro t e c t iv e

c o n d u c t o rs ( c o n t i nu e d )
Lina 25TM d u c t i n g m o u n t i n g s u p p o r t
For mounting and adjusting the height of Lina 25 Equipotential link conductor
ducting 20 373 85 Cross-section 6 mm2, ensures equipotential
- vertical: 40 x 60 or 40 x 80 continuity when fitting auxiliaries on door
- horizontal: 40 x 60 (Signis signalling devices > 50 V)
Supplied with plastic rivets
N o n - p e r fo r a t e d c o p p e r b a r
2 201 70 Set of 2 supports. Fits directly onto functional Cross-section (mm) Permis. I (A) Length (mm)
uprights integrated in XL3 400 cabinets and
enclosures 10 373 49 12 x 4 160 990
Lina 25TM d u c t i n g C o n n e c t o r s fo r b a r 1 2 x 4 w i t h o u t h o l e s
Length: 2 m 100 373 60 1.5 mm2
W x H (mm) 10 373 61 6 to 16 mm2
48 362 07 40 x 60 10 373 62 10 to 35 mm2 (supplied with M6 screws 5 mm)
40 362 08 40 x 80 Copper bar with ta pped holes
Cross-sec. Permis. I Tapped holes Length
P l a s t i c r i v et (mm) (A) Ø (mm) Pitch (mm)
100 366 46 For fixing ducting on support Cat.No 201 70 10 373 89 12 x 4 160 M5 18 990
W i re guide
C o n n e c t o r s fo r 1 2 x 4 m m b a r s w i t h
10 200 94 For horizontal wiring. ta p p e d h o l e s
Fits on rail 2 Cat.No. 202 01
100 373 65 1 or 2 conductors from 1.5 to 10 mm2
Takes bars with holes Cat.No 373 00 (p.199) or 373 01
and bar 12 x 4 with clamps Cat.No 373 02 (supplied with Ø 5 screws)
10 201 93 For vertical wiring S u p p o r t end stop
Fits directly onto functional uprights in XL3 400 10 393 99 For rail 2 EN 60715
cabinets and enclosures and symmetrical rail 2
depth 15 mm
C o n n e c t i o n o f p ro t e c t iv e c o n d u c t o rs Takes bars with holes
Cat.No 373 00 (p. 199) or
Fla t bar 12 x 2 fo r X L3 400 Cat.No 373 01,
ca b i n e t s a n d e n cl o s u res copper bar with clamps
10 048 19 Length 1 metre. Takes IP 2x terminal blocks Cat.No 373 02,
Fits onto functional uprights in XL3 400 copper bars 12 x 4 Cat.Nos 373 49 or 373 89,
cabinets and enclosures, or on isolating supports flat bar 12 x 2 Cat.No 048 19
Cat.No 200 90
B a r w i t h h o l e s fo r p r o t e c t i v e c o n d u c t o r s
1 373 01 Length 456 mm (24 modules)
• 36 holes Ø 5.3 mm (1.5 to 10 mm2)
• 2 holes Ø 9 mm (35 mm2)
• 4 holes Ø 6.5 mm (2.5 to 16 mm2)
in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures,
or on rail 2 with wire guides Cat.No 200 94
Fla t copper bar 12 x 4 with cl a m p s
1 373 02 Supplied with clamp connectors
(40 x 1.5 to 4 mm2, 4 x 6 to 16 mm2,
1 x 35 mm2)
in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures or on rail with
268
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 269
XL3 400 insulated, metal

technical characteristics
Installa tion principle Dimensions

S i d e p a n e l s c a n b e r e m ov e d i n d i v i d u a l l y
Metal
H
Ca b i n e t s Sleev es
H Ca t. Nos Ca t. Nos H (mm)
201 03 201 23 600
201 04 201 24 750
201 05 201 25 900
201 06 201 26 1050
201 07 201 27 1200
575
310 201 08 201 28 1500
To t a l a c c e s s i b i l i t y
H
H
Encl o s u res Sleev es

Ca t. Nos Ca t. Nos H (mm)
201 18 201 38 1600
575 310 201 19 201 39 1900
W i t h fla t d o o r
H o r i z o n t a l j o i n i n g w i t h n o a c c e s s o r y r e q u i r ed
175
198
310 (sleeves)
575 (cabinet or enclosure)
W i t h c u r v ed door
175
218
Possibility to add 575

fixing strenghtening bar
for mounting lugs
269
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 270

]
XL3 800 cabinets and enclosures

[XL 3
The new XL3 800 range provides extendable modular solutions up to 800 A
It provides strong housing for distribution assemblies. The modular solution
enables partial doors to be fitted
Freedom to choose the solution Freedom to distribute how you wish

you want
XL3 800 cabinets and enclosures are extendable “Standard” distribution
They have: This is performed using busbar connections,
- A capacity of 24 or 36 modules per row terminal blocks, distribution blocks and flat busbars
- Height ranging from 1050 to 1950 mm
which can house or be combined with cable sleeves
“Optimised” distribution
Performed with:
IP 43 metal cabinets and enclosures
• Take devices up to 800 A
• 2 widths - 660 mm with 24 modules per row
- 910 mm with 36 or 24 modules XL-PART, 250 A ROW
(if internal cable sleeve)
• Supplied flat with functional uprights DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
and cable entry plates • For power supply and distribution in rows up to 250 A
• Takes power devices up to DPX 250 ER
• Connects to the XL-Part 800 column chassis
IP 55 metal cabinets and enclosures
• Take devices up to 630 A
• 2 widths - 700 mm with 24 modules per row
- 950 mm with 36 or 24 modules
(if internal cable sleeve)
• Supplied with functional uprights
and without side panels
• Can be joined horizontally
FACEPLATES
• 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle
• Screw fastening
DOORS
• Metal or transparent
To be ordered separately
270
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 271
Freedom to choose
The cabinets and enclosures give you total freedom
to wire as you choose, thanks to:
FUNCTIONAL UPRIGHTS
• Equipment can be fitted quickly: only 1 tool is needed
SEPARATE SIDE PANELS

• Can be removed individually
• Provide access from all sides
SIMPLIFIED JOINING
• XL3 800 extendable enclosures are supplied
with their joining accessories

instructions and technical data sheets, etc.
271
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 272
XL3 800
equipment selection
Device Fixing Position Type of device
FIXING ON DIN-RAIL
FIXING ON PLATE
DPX 125 no e.l.c.bs
vertical
(Combination possible with Cabinet or enclosure with e.l.c.bs
DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER)
horizontal with or without elcbs
DPX 160 no e.l.c.bs
vertical
DPX 125 and DPX 250 ER)
DPX 250 ER no e.l.c.bs
vertical
DPX 125 and DPX 160)
centred device only
DPX-IS 250 Cabinet or enclosure vertical
1 or 2 devices
no e.l.c.bs
vertical
DPX 250 horizontal with or without e.l.c.bs
device only
with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
vertical
DPX 630 horizontal with or without e.l.c.bs
device only
with e.l.c.bs
vertical device only
DPX 1600 Cabinet or enclosure
horizontal device only
FIXING ON MODULAR RAIL

FIXING ON PLATE
DPX 125 no e.l.c.bs
(Combination possible with Cabinet or enclosure vertical with e.l.c.bs
DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER) with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 160 Cabinet or enclosure vertical
with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 250 ER Cabinet or enclosure vertical
with e.l.c.bs
DPX-IS 250 Cabinet or enclosure vertical 1 or 2 devices
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 250 with e.l.c.bs
device only
with e.l.c.bs
no e.l.c.bs
with e.l.c.bs
DPX 630
device only
with e.l.c.bs
vertical device only
DPX 1600 Cabinet or enclosure
horizontal device only
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately, Cat.No : 203 67: adaptor for DPX 125 earth leakage module 203 68: adaptor for DPX 160 earth leakage module 203 69: adaptor for DPX 250 ER
earth leakage module - (2) Device for external cable sleeve - (3) Device for internal cable sleeve
272
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 273
Device faceplate
Fixing Fixing
device p l a te Height (mm) 1/4 tur n Screw
XL3 800 - 24 modules
206 00 - 150 208 00 209 00

206 00 - 200 208 01 209 01
206 00 - 200 208 01 209 01
206 00 262 08 200 208 01 209 01
206 00 262 09 300 208 10 209 10
206 00 262 09 300 208 10 209 10
206 00 262 39 300 208 10 209 10
- 206 10 300 208 10 209 10

- 206 12 400 208 12(1) 209 12(1)
- 206 14 200 208 14 209 14(1)
- 206 10 300 208 10 209 10
- 206 12 400 208 12(1) 209 12(1)
- 206 14 200 208 15 209 15(1)
- 206 10 300 208 10 209 10
- 206 12 400 208 12(1) 209 12(1)
- 206 16 200 208 16 209 16(1)
- 206 05 300 208 10 209 10
- 206 05 300 208 06 209 06
- 206 20 400 208 20 209 20
- 206 22 600 208 22 209 22
- 206 24 200 208 24 209 24
- 206 28(2) - - -
- 206 29(2) - - -
- 206 20 400 208 20 209 20
- 206 22 600 208 22 209 22
- 206 25 300 208 25 209 25
- 206 28(2) - - -
- 206 29(2) - - -
- 206 07 300 208 07 209 07
- 206 30 400 208 30 209 30
- 206 30 400 208 34 209 34
XL3 800 - 36 modules
206 50 - 150 - 209 50

206 50 - 200 - 209 51
206 50 - 200 - 209 51
206 50 262 08 200 - 209 51
206 50 262 09 300 - 209 60
206 50 262 09 300 - 209 60
206 50 262 39 300 - 209 60
- 206 60 300 - 209 60

- 206 62 400 - 209 62(1)
- 206 60 300 - 209 60
- 206 62 400 - 209 62(1)
- 206 60 300 - 209 60
- 206 62 400 - 209 62(1)
- 206 55 300 - 209 60
- 206 70 400 - 209 70
- 206 72 600 - 209 72
- 206 78(3) - - -
- 206 79(3) - - -
- 206 70 400 - 209 70
- 206 72 600 - 209 72
- 206 78(3) - - -
- 206 79(3) - - -
- 206 57 400 - 209 57
- 206 80 400 - 209 80
- 206 80 400 - 209 84
273
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 274
XL3 800
distribution cabinets and cable sleeves, doors
204 01 204 06 212 51 212 61
Dimensions (p. 283)
IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door

IP 30 - IK 07 without door
Metal enclosures
Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings
Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row
RAL 7035
Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical)
Pack Cat.Nos Ca b i n e t s Pack Cat. Nos D o o r s fo r c a b i n e t s

Width 660 mm Supplied with handle
24 modules per row Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered
Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth separately (p. 282)
Metal Transparent Width 660 mm
1 204 01 1 050 1 000 660 600 230 1 212 51 212 61 For cabinet height 1 050 mm
Width 910 mm Width 910 mm
Can incorporate a cable sleeve 1 212 56 212 66 For cabinet height 1 050 mm
36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve) 1 212 57 212 67 For cabinet height 1 250 mm
1 204 06 1 050 1 000 910 850 230
1 204 07 1 250 1 200 910 850 230 IP 43 kit
1 201 30 For cabinets width 660 and 910 mm
I n t e r nal ca ble sleev es
K i t s fo r 9 1 0 m m w i d e c a b i n e t s Plinths
Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories 1 204 10 For cabinets width 660 mm
For creating a cable sleeve 1 204 11 For cabinets width 910 mm
with a usable width of 250 mm, on the right
or left-hand side inside 910 mm wide cabinets
1 204 26 For cabinet height 1 050 mm, Cat.No 204 06 Div i d e s p i t ch 50 mm
1 204 27 For cabinet height 1 250 mm, Cat.No 204 07 For horizontal compartmentalisation
1 204 90 For cabinets, usable width 600 mm
Solid facepla tes with hinges and locks 1 204 91 For cabinets, usable width 850 mm
1 204 46 For cable sleeves height 1 050 mm
1 204 47 For cable sleeves height 1 250 mm
Accessories
Wa l l m o u n t i n g l u g s
1 201 00 Set of 4 metal lugs
Ca b l e e n t r y p l a t e s
1 204 20 Additional adjustable plate
274
ex25027_260-275.qxd 28/12/05 18:17 Page 275
XL3 800
distribution enclosures, cable sleeves, doors
204 04 204 09 204 09 + 204 29 204 29 204 24
Dimensions (p. 283) Pack Cat.Nos D o o r s fo r e n c l o s u r e s

Supplied with handle. Interchangeable key
barrels, to be ordered separately (p. 282)
IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door
IP 40 - IK 08 with door Metal Transparent Width 660 mm
IP 30 - IK 07 without door 1 212 53 212 63 For enclosure height 1 550 mm
1 212 54 212 64 For enclosure height 1 950 mm
Metal enclosures RAL 7035
Can take devices up to 800 A Width 910 mm
Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation 1 212 58 212 68 For enclosure height 1 550 mm
in public buildings 1 212 59 212 69 For enclosure height 1 950 mm
Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable
entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical) E x t e r nal ca ble sleev es
Side ca ble sleev es
Pack Cat.Nos E n cl o s u res Can be attached on the right or left
Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm Supplied with a plinth height 100 mm
and joining accessories
Width 660 mm Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth
24 modules per row (mm) height (mm) external usable (mm)
Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth 1 204 23 1 550 1 400 460 400 230
1 204 24 1 950 1 800 460 400 230
1 204 03 1 550 1 400 660 600 230
1 204 04 1 950 1 800 660 600 230 F i x i n g d ev i c e s
1 206 28 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical
1 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation
1 206 29 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth
Width 910 mm leakage module
Can incorporate a cable sleeve Facepla t e s w i t h h i n g e s a n d l o c k s
36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve)
With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or
1 204 08 1 550 1 400 910 850 230 without earth leakage module
1 204 09 1 950 1 800 910 850 230 1 204 43 Height 1 400 mm
1 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation 1 204 44 Height 1 800 mm
D o o rs
1 204 33 For cable sleeve height 1 550 mm
I n t e r nal ca ble sleev es 1 204 34 For cable sleeve height 1 950 mm
K i t s fo r 9 1 0 m m w i d e e n c l o s u r e s
Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories IP 43 kit
For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of
250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 910 mm 1 201 30 For enclosures and cable sleeves
wide enclosures
1 204 28 For enclosure height 1 550 mm, Cat.No 204 08 Plinths
1 204 29 For enclosure height 1 950 mm, Cat.No 204 09 1 204 10 For enclosures width 660 mm
F i x i n g d ev i c e s 1 204 11 For enclosures width 910 mm
1 206 78 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical 1 204 12 For enclosures cable sleeve, width: 660 mm
1 206 79 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage
module Accessories
Facepla t e s w i t h h i n g e s a n d l o c k s Wa l l m o u n t i n g l u g s
With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without 1 201 00 Set of 4 metal lugs
Ca b l e e n t r y p l a t e s
1 204 48 Height 1 400 mm
1 204 20 Additional adjustable plate, width 660 mm
1 204 49 Height 1 800 mm
275
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 276
XL3example:
for 800 xxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
IP 55 distribution cabinets, doors and accessories
204 51 212 72 204 56 212 76
Dimensions (p. 283)
Metal enclosures
Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings
RAL 7035
Can be joined horizontally
Pack Cat.Nos Ca b i n e t s Pack Cat.Nos D o o r s fo r c a b i n e t s

Supplied without side panels Supplied with handle
Width 700 mm Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered
separately (p. 282)
24 modules per row
Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth Metal Transparent Width 700 mm
(mm) height (mm) external usable (mm) 1 212 71 212 81 For cabinet height 1 050 mm
1 204 52 1 295 1 200 700 600 225 Width 950 mm
1 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation 1 212 76 212 86 For cabinet height 1 050 mm
Width 950 mm 1 212 77 212 87 For cabinet height 1 250 mm
Can incorporate a cable sleeve
36 or 24 modules (if integrated cable sleeve) Plinths
1 204 56 1 095 1 000 950 850 225
1 204 60 For cabinets width 700 mm
1 204 57 1 295 1 200 950 850 225 1 204 61 For cabinets width 950 mm
1 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation
Side panels
Set of 2 side panels Accessories
1 204 66 For cabinet height 1 050 mm 1 205 85 Sealing kit for use when joining cabinets
1 204 67 For cabinet height 1 250 mm together
1 204 86 Joining kit
1 204 82 Lifting rings
I n t e r nal ca ble sleev es Set of 2
K i t s fo r 9 5 0 m m w i d e c a b i n e t s
Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories D i s t r i bu t i o n e q u i p m e n t
For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of and f ac e p l a t e s (p. 278 to 281)
250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 950 mm
wide cabinets
1 204 26 For cabinet height 1 050 mm, Cat.No 204 56
1 204 27 For cabinet height 1 250 mm, Cat.No 204 57
Facepla t e s w i t h h i n g e s a n d l o c k s
1 204 46 Height 1 050 mm
1 204 47 Height 1 250 mm
276
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 277
XL3 800
IP 55 distribution enclosures, doors, cable sleeves and accessories
204 54 204 59 204 74
Dimensions (p. 283)
IP 55 - IK 0 8 w i t h d o o r
Metal enclosures Pack Cat.Nos D o o r s fo r e n c l o s u r e s
Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation Supplied with handle
in public buildings Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered
Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row separately (p. 282)
RAL 7035 Metal Transparent Width 700 mm
Can be joined horizontally 1 212 73 212 83 For enclosure height 1 550 mm
Pack Cat.Nos E n cl o s u res Width 950 mm
Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm 1 212 79 212 89 For enclosure height 1 950 mm
Supplied without side panels
Width 700 mm
Exter nal cable sleeves
24 modules per row
Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth Side ca ble sleev es
Can be attached on the right or left
1 204 53 1 595 1 400 700 600 225 Supplied with a plinth height 100 mm
1 204 54 1 995 1 800 700 600 225 and joining accessories
1 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Height Faceplate Width (mm) Depth
Width 950 mm
Can incorporate a cable sleeve 1 204 73 1 550 1 400 500 400 225
36 or 24 modules (if integrated cable sleeve) 1 204 74 1 950 1 800 500 400 225
1 204 58 1 550 1 400 950 850 225 F i x i n g d ev i c e s
1 204 59 1 950 1 800 950 850 225 1 206 28 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical
1 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation 1 206 29 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth
leakage module
Side panels
Facepla t e s w i t h h i n g e s a n d l o c k s
Set of 2 side panels
1 204 68 For enclosure height 1 550 mm With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with
1 204 69 For enclosure height 1 950 mm or without earth leakage module
1 204 43 Height 1 400 mm
1 204 44 Height 1 800 mm
I n t e r nal ca ble sleev es D o o rs
K i t s fo r 9 5 0 m m w i d e e n c l o s u r e s 1 204 83 Height 1 400 mm
Kits comprising: divider, upright and mounting 1 204 84 Height 1 800 mm
accessories
For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of Plinths
250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 950 mm
wide enclosures (see opposite) 1 204 60 For enclosures width 700 mm
1 204 28 For enclosure height 1 550 mm, Cat.No 204 58 1 204 61 For enclosures width 950 mm
1 204 29 For enclosure height 1 950 mm, Cat.No 204 59 1 204 62 For enclosures cable sleeve, width 500 mm
F i x i n g d ev i c e s
1 206 78 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical Accessories
1 206 79 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage module 1 205 85 Sealing kit for use when joining cabinets
together
Facepla t e s w i t h h i n g e s a n d l o c k s 1 204 86 Joining kit
With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without 1 204 82 Lifting rings.
earth leakage module Set of 2
Solid
1 204 48 Height 1 400 mm
1 204 49 Height 1 800 mm
277
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 278
XL3 800 XL3 800

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on rail , 2 mounting devices on rail 2
DPX-IS 250, Vistop up to 160 A, DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
P r i n c i p l e fo r i n s t a l l a t i o n o f a l u m i n i u m r a i l 2
Ca t. No 206 00/50
Adjustable device: upper position for Lexic device
and lower position for DPX
No screws required for installation
206 00
DPX
Lexic
DPX
208 10
Lexic
L o we r p o s i t i o n Upper position
209 10 DPX only DPX For Lexic

+ spacer for Lexic devices
devices
Pack Cat.Nos Rail 2 f o r m o d u l a r d ev i c e s, Vi s t o p

up to 160 A, DPX-IS 250, DPX 125,
DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
Comprise an aluminium profile rail
No. of modules
24 and 2 x 2-position fixing brackets
36
1 206 00 206 50 Fit onto functional uprights
Take XL-Part 100 and 125 row Metal facepla t e s
distribution blocks
For mounting DPX using the plates below 1/4 tur n f a s t e n i n g a n d s e a l a b l e
Fixing plates
For mounting DPX on rails Cat.Nos 206 00
and 206 50
1 262 08 For DPX 125 1/4
1 262 09 For DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
1 262 39 For DPX-IS 250
Rail height spacer
1 262 99 Designed to enable modular equipment
and DPX 125, DPX 160,
DPX 250 ER and DPX-IS 250 to be
mounted together on rail Cat.No 206 00 or
Cat.No 206 00 using the plates above
For 20 modules
Metal facepla t e s
No. of modules Height 150 mm
150
24 36 For Lexic device

1 208 00 1/4 turn(1) Ca p t iv e s c rew
1 209 00 209 50 With captive screws
Height 200 mm
For Lexic devices and DPX 125
1 208 01 1/4 turn(1)
200
1 209 01 209 51 With captive screws(2)

Height 300 mm
For DPX 125,160 and 250 ER
1 208 10 1/4 turn(1)
300
(1) For fastening and sealing

(2) Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option
278
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 279
XL3 800 XL3 800

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate mounting DPX-IS 250, DPX-IS 630
DPX-IS 250, DPX-IS 630
Installa t i o n p r i n c i p e
A t t a ch i n g a n d f i t t i n g p l a t e s d i re c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
206 05
1/4
208 10
Mounting DPX-IS 250
300
209 10
300
Pack Cat.Nos Pla t e s fo r d ev i c e s
No of modules Direct fixing on functional uprights
24 36 DPX-IS
1 206 05 206 55 For 1 or 2 DPX-IS 250
1 206 07 206 57 For 1 or 2 DPX-IS 630
Metal facepla t e s
No of modules
24 36 For 1 DPX-IS 250 centred
300
1 208 10 1/4 turn(1)

1 209 10 209 60 With captive screws(2) S e l e c t i o n o f f a c e p l a t e s a n d p l a t e s for DPX-IS
For 2 DPX-IS 250 Ca b i n e t s Facepla t e s Facepla te
300
1 208 06 1/4 turn(1) 300

e n cl o s u res
width
Pla t e s DPX-IS 1/4 tur n
fastening
S c rew height
(mm)
1 209 06 209 60 With captive screws(2) 206 05 DPX-IS 250 x1 208 10 209 10 300
660 mm 206 05 DPX-IS 250 x2 208 06 209 06 300
For DPX-IS 630 300 206 07 DPX-IS 630 x1 208 07 209 07 300
300
1 208 07 1/4 turn(1) 206 55 DPX-IS 250 x1 - 209 60 300

1 209 07 209 57 With captive screws(2) 910 mm 206 55 DPX-IS 250 x2 - 209 60 300
206 57 DPX-IS 630 x1 - 209 57 300

279
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 280
XL3 800 XL3 800

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate mounting DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER
DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
n In
I nsst a
t al l al at itoi onn pprri ni ncci pi pl e
A
Det tvaicchei ni ng vaenrdt i cf a
i t tl i n
pgo spi tl a
i otn
e s d i re c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
206 10
206 16
1/4
208 14 Dev i c e i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n

Pack Cat.Nos Pla t e s fo r f i xed vers i o n d ev i c e s,
No of modules Dev i c e i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
24 36 For 1 to 3 DPX only
1 206 10 206 60 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER
1 206 12 206 62 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER
300
1 206 14 For 1 DPX 125 or DPX 160 with or without
1 206 16 For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without
P l a t e s f o r s u p p l y i nv e r t e r s Dev i c e i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
24 modules Manual dev i c e i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
1 206 64 For 2 DPX 160
1 206 66 For 2 DPX 250 ER Dev i c e i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
Metal facepla t e s
24 36 For 1 to 3 DPX only
300
1 208 10 1/4 turn(1)

For 1 to 3 DPX with downstream earth 200
leakage module, positioned
using window adaptors below
400
1 208 12 1/4 turn(1)

200
For 1 DPX 125 with or without downstream
200
1 208 14 1/4 turn(1)

1 209 14 With captive screws(2)
For 1 DPX 160 with or without downstream
200
1 208 15 1/4 turn(1)

1 209 15 With screws(2)
For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without downstream
1/4 turn(1)
200
1 208 16
S u p p l y i nv e r t e r i n v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n
1 208 10 For 2 DPX 160 or 2 DPX 250 ER
300
with screws(2)
1 203 67 For DPX 125 with or without downstream
1 203 68 For DPX 160 with or without downstream
1 203 69 For DPX 250 ER with or without

280
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 281
XL3 800 XL3 800

distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate mounting DPX 250, DPX 630 and DPX 1 250/1 600
DPX 250, DPX 630 and DPX 1 250/1 600
A t t a ch i n g a n d f i t t i n g p l a t e s d i re c t l y o n f u n c t i o n a l u p r i g h t s
206 20
1/4
206 25
Dev i c e i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
400
208 34
Pack Cat.Nos Pla t e s fo r f i xed vers i o n d ev i c e s,

No of modules Direct fixing on functional uprights
24 36 Dev i c e s i n ver t i c a l p o s i t i o n
1 206 20 206 70 For 1 to 3 DPX 250 or DPX 630
1 206 22 206 72 For 1 to 3 DPX 250 or DPX 630
with earth leakage module Dev i c e s i n h o r i zo n t a l p o s i t i o n
1 206 30 206 80 For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600
leakage module
leakage module
1 206 30 206 80 For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600
Metal facepla t e s 200

24 36 For 1 to 3 DPX 250
and 630 only
400
1 208 20 1/4 turn(1)

1 209 20 209 70 With captive screws(2) 200
For 1 to 3 DPX 250 and 630

600
with downstream e.l.c.bs

1 208 22 1/4 turn(1)
For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600
400
1 208 30 1/4 turn(1)

For 1 DPX 250 with or without
200
1 208 24 1/4 turn(1)

For 1 DPX 630 with or without
300

1 208 25 1/4 turn(1)
For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600
400
1 208 34 1/4 turn(1)

281
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 282
XL3 800
distribution equipment and accessories
200 92 209 59
206 42 206 02 209 45
Pack Cat.Nos U n iv ers a l p l a t e s Pack Cat.Nos Solid metal facepla tes

Fit onto functional uprights 1/4 tur n
No of modules For fastening and sealing
Pe r fo rat e d p l a t e s w i d t h 6 0 0 m m 24 Height (mm)
1 206 41 Height 200 mm 1 208 40 50
1 206 42 Height 400 mm 1 208 41 100
Plain pla tes width 600 mm 1 208 42 150
1 206 43 Height 200 mm 1 208 43 200
1 206 44 Height 400 mm 1 208 44 300
1 206 45 Height 600 mm 1 208 45 400
Plain pla tes width 850 mm 1 208 46 600
1 206 46 Height 400 mm S c re w m o u n t i n g
Captive screws
U n iv ers a l ra i l s 2 No of modules
24 36
Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option
Height (mm)
1 206 04 Width 600 mm 1 209 40 209 90 50
1 206 54 Width 850 mm 1 209 41 209 91 100
1 209 42 209 92 150
U n iv ers a l a d j u s t a b l e f i x i n g d ev i c e s 1 209 43 209 93 200
Comprising a rail 2
and 2 adjustable fixing brackets 1 209 44 209 94 300
Fit onto functional uprights 1 209 45 209 95 400
1 206 02 For 24 modules cabinets and enclosures 1 209 46 209 96 600
1 206 52 For 36 modules cabinets and enclosures
Ve n t i l a t i n g f a c e p l a t e s
U n iv ers a l s u p p o r t s for ex t e r nal ca ble sleev e No of modules Assist natural ventilation
For mounting terminal blocks, earth terminals, etc. 24 36 Screw mounting
1 201 95 Set of 3 metal supports 1 209 49 209 99 Height 200 mm
W i re D u c t i n g Accessories
Lina 25™ ducting mounting suppor t s Hinges
For horizontal and vertical mounting and height 1 209 59 Set of 2 hinges
adjustment of Lina 25 ducting Fit on screw mounting faceplates
Supplied with plastic rivets Blanking plates
Fit directly on functional uprights For metal or plastic faceplates
1 204 70 Set of 2 for XL3 800 36 modules cabinets and 20 200 51 24 modules, smooth adjustable strip
enclosures 10 016 65 18 modules, separable into modules or 1/2
1 205 70 Set of 2 for XL3 800 24 modules cabinets and modules
enclosures C l i p - o n h o l d e r f o r a d h e s i v e la b e l s
Lina 25™ ducting 10 203 99 Supplied with a sheet of labels
Length: 2 m for marking rows on faceplate
W x H (mm) C l i p nu t s
48 362 07 40 x 60 Mounting on front panel by 1/4 turn
40 362 08 40 x 80 fastening on functional uprights
32 362 12 60 x 60 20 200 92 Bag of 20 clip nuts for M6 screw
32 362 13 60 x 80 20 200 91 Bag of 50 x M6 screws
P l a s t i c r iv et A e ro s o l p a i n t s p ray
100 366 46 For fixing Lina 25 ducting on supports 6 200 98 RAL 7035
Ca b l e f i x i n g s u p p o r t s
1 204 35 For 660 mm wide cabinets Key b a r r e l s
1 204 36 For 910 mm wide cabinets Supplied with a set of 2 keys
1 204 37 For horizontal external cable sleeve
1 202 91 Type 405
1 202 92 Type 455
1 202 93 Type 1242E
1 202 94 Type 2433A
1 202 96 Double bar knockout
282
ex25027_276-284.qxd 28/12/05 18:19 Page 283
XL3 800
technical characteristics IP 30-43, IP 55
■ Installa tion principle IP 43 ■ Dimensions IP 43 and IP 55

S i d e p a n e l s c a n b e r e m ov e d i n d i v i d u a l l y To t a l a c c e s s i b i l i t y Ca b i n e t s Ca b i n e t s w i t h i n t e r n a l
ca ble sleev e
H H
(1)
250
D W (1)
600
W
D
E n cl o s u res E n cl o s u re s w i t h
ex t e r nal ca ble sleev es i n t e r nal ca ble sleev e
H H
H o r i z o n t a l a n d ve r t i c a l j o i n i n g
(1)
250
D W (1)
600
W
D
(1) Usable width
IP 43 IP 55
Exter nal dimensions (mm) Exter nal dimensions (mm)
Ca t . N o s Ca t . N o s
W H D W H D
Ca b i n e t s Ca b i n e t s
204 01 660 1 050 230 204 51 700 1 095 225
■ Installa tion principle IP 55 204 02 660 1 250 230 204 52 700 1 295 225
204 06 910 1 050 230 204 56 950 1 095 225
204 07 910 1 250 230 204 57 950 1 295 225
E n cl o s u re s E n cl o s u re s
204 03 660 1 550 230 204 53 700 1 550 225
204 04 660 1 950 230 204 54 700 1 950 225
204 08 910 1 550 230 204 58 950 1 550 225
204 09 910 1 950 230 204 59 950 1 950 225
Ext. cable sleeves Ext. cable sleeves
204 23 460 1 550 230 204 73 500 1 550 225
204 24 460 1 950 230 204 74 500 1 950 225
IP 43 with cur v ed door

230
273
660 / 910
IP 55 with fla t d o o r
H o r i zo n t a l j o i n i n g
225
250
700 / 950
283
International version
GULF COUNTRIES
UAE – Main Office

JAFZA 15 – Office 601
Jebel Ali Free Zone
PO Box 61415
Dubai, UAE
Tel (+971) 4 881 6178
Fax: (+971) 4 881 8145
www.legrand.ae

Legrand Distribution &amp; Power Guide

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Legrand Distribution &amp; Power Guide

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Distribution

Welcome to the first edition of the Protection and Power Guide

This document serves as both a memorandum and a practical

A powerful specification tool, it integrates a complete approach

A guide to our commitment, it illustrates Legrand’s willingness

››› Technical part

DMX air circuit breakers 18

DPX moulded case circuit breakers 38

DX modular circuit breakers 76

ASSOCIATION of protective devices 84

VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS 104

XL3 enclosures 156

››› Offer part

ISOLATING SWITCHES 202

MODULAR DIN-RAIL EQUIPMENT 223

VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTOR 240

DMX ACBs, DPX MCCBs and

DX MCBs: in a fully integrated

People must be protected against indirect contact

Protection devices protect installations and people:

It is important to distinguish between product

LEGRAND CIRCUIT BREAKERS: DMX, DPX & DX

The electronic release

- “Long time delay” operating zone

Long Short Instantaneous I

FOR MORE INFORMATION

The electric arc

Nominal current In (in A) • 10000 : standard IEC 60898 for household

BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS (continued)

Short time withstand current Icw Utilization category

By convention the value Icw is given for a time

››› Standard IEC 60898

››› Standard IEC 60947-2

Legrand DX circuit breakers comply with the following standards.

››› Standard IEC 61009-1

››› Standard IEC 61008-1

The purpose of limiting is to reduce:

Example for a 6 kA type C circuit breaker from

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

is not zero and results in a residual current. Above

RCBO phase + neutral

Without a fault With fault present

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (continued)

SELECTING RESIDUAL CURRENT

These add a residual current function

DMX circuit breakers

and isolating switches

provide control and protection

at the head of low voltage

Find the complete offer

DMX AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A 4000 A system within your reach

THE DMX RANGE

All DMX, both circuit breakers and

• For draw-out, the following features

- Lockable safety shutters

External Memory Unit

The design of the DMX contributes

If a device is changed, the external memory

ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS

The protection unit is adjusted using rotary selector

The MP17 protection unit also has instantaneous

MP17 protection unit on draw-out DMX 2500

LED indicating correct operation

Legrand Distribution & Power Guide

Legrand Distribution & Power Guide